JP4025346B2 - Locking device and locking method - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a locking device that can be disassembled and assembled and capable of exchanging components, and a locking method for locking an article using the locking device.

Conventionally, in order to change the unlocking number of the dial ring, there are a dial lock that can be assembled and a wire lock in which a locking member is detachable from the lock body, and those techniques are disclosed in Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2. Has been.
JP-A-8-35363 Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 6-67753

  However, the conventional locking device has a problem that the manufacturing cost is high because many components are required.

  Further, in the development of the locking device, efforts have been made to make the structural members of the locking device robust, but replacement of the structural members of the locking device has not been regarded as important. Therefore, even if the material is excellent in shape change, it is rarely taken up as a component of the locking device except for a strong and durable material, which causes the morphological limitation of the locking device. It was.

  In addition, for example, it is almost impossible to lock a wide variety of umbrellas with a conventional and versatile locking device. If the locking device is incorporated in the umbrella itself, the umbrella becomes expensive. is there. In addition, although a band-type lock using a locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position has been devised, there is a problem that the locking part can be seen from the gap of the locking member passage, and the durability of the band It is not popular due to safety and cost performance issues.

  That is, it is considered difficult to spread a locking device with poor cost performance in which constituent members cannot be replaced for locking to prevent the placement of inexpensive articles such as umbrellas.

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the locking device which can be handled easily and can be used.

Specifically, an object is to provide a locking device that can be easily disassembled and assembled.

  Furthermore, it aims at providing the locking method for locking articles easily and effectively.

  In order to solve the above-described problems, a locking device according to the present invention includes a lock body, an elongated locking member, and a locking mechanism that penetrates and locks the locking member. The locking member has a locking portion for being locked by the locking mechanism portion at an arbitrary position, and at least a part of the locking member can be bent or bent. The first end portion in the longitudinal direction is formed with one or more through-holes that are opposed to the first end portion and have a size that allows the second end portion having the locking portion to pass therethrough. It is characterized by that.

  Further, the lock body has an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking the rear end of the locking member, and the first end has the end locking hole or There may be a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end portion locking groove, and the through hole may exist between the tail portion and the locking portion in the longitudinal direction of the locking member. In addition, the first end of the locking member is connected to the lock body, and the through-hole is connected to the portion connected to the lock body in the longitudinal direction of the locking member. It may be present between the parts.

  Moreover, it is a locking method of locking an article using a locking device provided with a locking member having a through-hole through which the second end of itself can pass, wherein the second end is connected to the locking member 1. Forming an annular region by only the locking member by penetrating through one through hole, passing the second end portion through the locking mechanism, and placing the article in the annular region The step of tightening the article with the locking member by pulling the second end portion in the same direction as the direction in which the locking member penetrates the locking mechanism portion; and Locking the locking member to the locking mechanism so that the locking member cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism. With this locking method, for example, a locking form having one annular region as shown in FIG. 27B (c) can be realized.

  Moreover, it is a locking method in which the first article is locked using a locking device including a locking member having a through-hole through which the second end of the first article can pass, and the first article and the second article are connected. The second article is wound by the locking member, and the second end is penetrated through one through hole of the locking member, so that the second article is formed only by the locking member. A first forming step for forming a first annular region in which at least a portion is present; and the second end portion is formed in a direction opposite to the direction penetrating the through hole in the first forming step. A second forming step of forming a second annular region different from the first annular region by penetrating through the through hole, a penetrating step of penetrating the second end portion into the locking mechanism portion, and the first Arrangement step for arranging the first article in two annular regions And tightening the first article with the locking member by pulling the second end portion in the same direction as the direction in which the locking member passes through the locking mechanism portion; and In the locking device, it is possible to implement a locking method including a locking step of locking the locking member to the locking mechanism so that the locking member cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism. By this locking method, for example, a locking form in which two articles are connected and locked by forming two annular regions as shown in FIGS. 27B (b) and 27B (d) can be realized.

  Also, a locking device in which a locking member having a through-hole through which its second end can be passed and a lock body are detachably attached, or an engagement having a through-hole through which its second end can pass. A locking method of locking a first article using a locking device in which a locking member and a lock body are connected, and connecting the first article and the second article, wherein the second end is connected to the engagement member. In a positional relationship in which the second article is present between the locking member and the lock body by passing through one through hole of the locking member to form an annular region only by the locking member A step of penetrating the second end portion into the locking mechanism portion, a step of placing the first article in the annular region of the locking member, and a portion of the second end portion of the locking member By pulling in the same direction as penetrating the locking mechanism A step of tightening the first article with the locking member, and a step of locking the locking member to the locking mechanism so that the locking member cannot be inserted into and removed from the locking mechanism in the locking device. The locking method including can be implemented. With this locking method, for example, a locking form in which two articles are connected and locked by forming two closed regions as shown in FIG. 27B (a) can be realized.

  Further, in the locking device according to the present invention, the locking mechanism portion includes a shaft member supported by the lock body, and a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation axis. A plurality of concavo-convex portions to be directly locked by a plurality of dial rings, and the lock body includes a body shaft hole or a body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted from the outside, and the lock of the dial ring. A wall that restricts movement of the shaft member in the insertion / extraction direction with respect to the main body, and a hole that allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of the shaft member into the lock body. The hole is located on the shaft head side and further opens on the outer surface of the lock body, the shaft member has a shaft-side groove or a shaft-side hole into which the locking member is inserted, and the shaft member The shaft side groove is provided, the shaft side groove is linear, and the shaft member In the same direction as the insertion / extraction direction with respect to the lock body, the insertion direction of the locking member into the shaft-side groove and the insertion direction of the shaft member into the lock body are the same direction, and the body shaft hole or the body The shaft hole has at least a part of an inner diameter smaller than an outer diameter of at least a part of the shaft member, or the shaft member does not penetrate the lock body, so that the shaft member is When the dial ring is in the unlocked position and the locking member is in the open state, the locking device can be extracted only in the direction opposite to the shaft head. Can do. Thus, the shaft member can be easily pushed out from the lock body and disassembled only when unlocking.

  Here, the hole that opens on the outer surface of the lock body and allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head is present as a hole extending from the outer surface of the lock body to the body shaft hole, and the shaft member of the body shaft hole. May exist as a part of the shaft head side when the is inserted. In addition, the hole that opens to the outer surface of the lock body and allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head is used for a dial lock with a shaft member, so that the shaft member can be easily pushed out of the lock body. It can be demonstrated.

  Further, in the locking device of the present invention, the locking mechanism portion includes a shaft member supported by the lock body, and a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation shaft, and the locking member includes the plurality of locking members. A plurality of concavo-convex portions to be directly locked by the dial ring, and the lock body includes a body shaft hole or a body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted from the outside, and the lock body of the dial ring. A wall for restricting movement of the shaft member in the insertion / extraction direction with respect to the shaft, the shaft member having a shaft-side groove or a shaft-side hole into which the locking member is inserted, and the shaft member having the shaft-side groove The shaft-side groove is linear, and when the shaft member is in the same direction as the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, the insertion direction of the locking member into the shaft-side groove and the lock body of the shaft member The insertion direction is the same direction, and the shaft member is further To provide a locking device having a hook for pulling out the shaft member from the lock body at the rear end when the dial ring is in an unlocked position and the locking member is in an open state. Can do.

  Also with this configuration, the locking member can be disassembled by easily pulling out the shaft member from the lock body only when unlocking, due to the hooks of the shaft member.

  In the locking device of the present invention, the locking mechanism portion restricts movement of the plurality of dial rings inserted into the lock body and a direction opposite to the loading direction of the plurality of dial rings with respect to the lock body. And the locking member has a plurality of concavo-convex portions to be directly locked by the plurality of dial rings, and the lock body allows the plurality of dial rings to rotate. Or it has a shaft part, and when it has the storage part, it has an insertion slot into which the plurality of dial rings can be inserted and removed from the storage part, and further, the plurality of dials from the insertion hole or the shaft part. There is an engagement groove or engagement projection for inserting the sub member so that a ring does not come out, and the sub member is inserted into the lock body and a sub hole for penetrating the locking member. Until the engagement groove Has an engaging portion corresponding to the engaging convex portion, and the direction in which the sub member is inserted into the lock body is different from the insertion / extraction direction of the locking member with respect to the lock body, and the locking member is A portion of the sub member inserted into the lock body and passing through the sub hole is locked in the plurality of dial rings.

  With this structure, when the locking member passes through the wall member and is locked to the dial ring, the wall member cannot move, so the wall member is locked to the lock body and can be disassembled and assembled only when unlocked. It becomes a locking device. In addition, in this structure, when the storage portion enables the dial ring to rotate, it does not depend on the presence or absence of a shaft member serving as a rotation shaft of the dial ring. Further, as long as the locking member penetrates the wall member, the dial member may have a wall member on both sides.

  Further, in the locking device of the present invention, the locking mechanism portion includes a shaft member supported by the lock body, and a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation shaft, and the locking member includes the plurality of locking members. A plurality of concave and convex portions to be directly locked by the dial ring, and the locking device further includes a shaft retaining member for restraining the shaft member to the lock body, and the lock body is externally provided. There is an insertion hole or insertion hole into which the shaft retaining member is inserted, and the shaft member is a shaft retaining hole and shaft into which the shaft retaining member is inserted at a position following the insertion hole or the insertion hole of the lock body. It has a retaining hole or a shaft retaining groove, and at least a part of the shaft retaining hole, the shaft retaining hole or the shaft retaining groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, The shaft retaining member includes a locking hole into which the locking member is inserted, and a locking Or having a locking groove, with the shaft member being inserted into the lock body, and being inserted through the insertion hole or the insertion hole, it exists across the lock body and the shaft member, At least a part of the locking hole, the locking hole or the locking groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft retaining member with respect to the lock body. Can do.

  In this way, the locking member passes in a direction that is at least partially different from the insertion / extraction direction of the locking member with respect to the lock body, so that the locking member cannot be disassembled from the lock body only at the time of locking, and only when unlocked. Can be possible.

  This structural feature can be used in all dial locks using a long locking member and having a dial ring rotating shaft and a shaft retaining member.

  Further, the locking device of the present invention further includes an adapter for changing the shape of the surface of the lock main body that contacts the lock target article, and the lock main body is a surface that contacts the lock target article, and the upper and lower or left and right surfaces of the surface. An adapter mounting groove for mounting the adapter, an adapter mounting hole or an adapter mounting hole, and a main body side hole or a main body side groove for allowing the locking member to pass therethrough, and the adapter includes the adapter mounting groove, The adapter mounting hole or a mounting portion having a shape corresponding to the adapter mounting hole, and an adapter side hole or adapter side groove for allowing the locking member to pass therethrough, the main body side hole or the main body side groove being the main body The side hole or the main body side groove and the adapter side hole or the adapter side groove exist at a position where one passage is formed, and the adapter side hole or the adapter The passage formed by the stopper side groove and the main body side hole or the main body side groove may be formed in a direction different from a direction in which the adapter is attached to and detached from the lock body, and the locking device further includes: An adapter for changing the shape of the surface of the lock body that contacts the object to be locked, and the lock body is an adapter for attaching the adapter to the surface that contacts the object to be locked, or to the top and bottom or left and right surfaces of the surface. There are a mounting groove, an adapter mounting hole or an adapter mounting hole, and a main body side hole or a main body side groove for allowing the locking member to pass therethrough, and the adapter includes the adapter mounting groove, the adapter mounting hole or the adapter mounting hole. And an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking one end of the locking member, and the body side hole or The main body side groove exists at a position where one passage is formed by the main body side hole or the main body side groove and the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove, and the locking member is only at one end. It has a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove, and an end portion where the tail portion does not exist is inserted from the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove. The dial ring may be engaged with the main body side hole or the main body side groove.

  As described above, when the passage for the locking member is formed by the adapter and the lock body to which the adapter can be detachably attached, the passage is in a direction different from the direction in which the adapter is attached to and removed from the lock body. Once formed, the adapter cannot be removed unless the locking member is removed from the passage. Even if the direction is not limited, if the locking member is locked to the adapter by a tail portion having a size that cannot penetrate the adapter, the adapter is locked at least when the locking device locks the article. It cannot be removed from the main body. That is, it is possible to make the adapter unremovable from the lock body only at the time of locking and to be removable only at the time of unlocking. This structural feature is not limited to the dial lock, and can be used in all locks using a long locking member.

  Further, in the locking device of the present invention, the locking mechanism portion includes a shaft member supported by the lock body, and a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation shaft, and the locking member is elastic. Or it has an uneven part, the uneven part is formed by repeating unevenness in the longitudinal direction of the locking member, and the shaft member is repeatedly formed with uneven parts on a straight line parallel to the axial direction on the circumference The shaft has a concave and convex portion and a locking hole for penetrating the locking member and for intruding into the locking member or for locking any convex portion of the concave and convex portion of the locking member. The plurality of dial rings allow the locking hole to move with respect to the lock body at a rotational position that is an unlocked position, and at a rotational position other than the unlocked position, It is provided in a part of the circumferential direction so as to contact the convex part The locking member is held in a locked state by the locking hole of the shaft member when the plurality of dial rings are in a rotational position other than the unlocked position, and the locking hole May release the locking state by becoming movable with respect to the lock body.

  With this structure, a locking device that can be locked and unlocked by moving a locking hole that locks the locking member is obtained.

  Further, as described above, the locking device of the present invention may be locked and unlocked by moving the locking hole of the shaft member. Here, in the locking device in which the locking and unlocking structure is effective by moving the locking hole, the locking member is held in a locked state by the locking hole outside the lock body. It is good. Also with this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 63 (d) can be realized. The lock body further includes a through hole or a through groove that allows the locking member to pass therethrough, and the locking member is held in a locked state by the locking hole in the through hole or the through groove. It may be. Also with this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 69 (b) can be realized.

  Further, the lock body has a wall that restricts movement of the shaft member in the axial direction of the plurality of dial rings, and a body shaft hole or a body shaft hole that supports the shaft member. A large-diameter portion having an outer diameter larger than an inner diameter of the main body shaft hole or the insertion opening of the main body shaft hole, and a notch portion for the large-diameter portion, and the large-diameter portion is inserted into the insertion port or the insertion When extracted from the mouth, the outer diameter of the large-diameter cutout portion may be narrowed so that it can be inserted into and removed from the insertion port. At the time of unlocking, for example, an effect that the shaft and the dial ring can be easily exchanged is exhibited.

  In addition, a protrusion is formed in the locking hole at a portion in contact with the locking member, and the locking member has elasticity that allows the protrusion to be recessed, or an uneven portion that can lock the protrusion. It is good. With this configuration, for example, a locking device including a shaft member having a locking hole shown in FIG. 72 (b) and a locking member shown in FIG. 73 (a) can be realized.

  The lock body further includes a body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted and a spring, the spring is present in the body shaft hole, and the shaft member is a shaft on which the locking hole is present. It is composed of a rear portion and a shaft head portion where the shaft unevenness exists, and a slope portion that is not parallel to the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body is formed in a part of the locking hole. The slope portion and the convex portion of the concavo-convex portion of the locking member are such that the convex portion is in the locking member insertion direction, which is a direction in which the locking member is inserted into the locking hole. When the shaft member moves in the insertion / removal direction while sliding, the spring is located in the body shaft hole when the shaft member moves from the initial position in the insertion / removal direction. Present at a position where force is applied to the shaft member in a direction to return the shaft member to the initial position. The slope portion is formed on the shaft head side of the locking hole, and the slope portion and the convex portion of the concavo-convex portion of the locking member are inserted into the locking member. When the convex portion passes through the locking hole in the direction, the shaft member is located at a position to move the shaft head in the direction of the shaft head, and the spring is located in the body shaft hole from the initial position. When moving in the axial head direction, it may be present at a position where force is applied to the axial member in a direction in which the axial member is pushed back in the axial rear direction by contraction. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having the structure shown in FIG. 105 can be realized.

  The slope portion is formed on the shaft rear portion side of the locking hole, and the slope portion and the convex portion of the concave and convex portion of the locking member are convex in the insertion direction of the locking member. When the portion passes through the locking hole, the shaft member is located at a position for moving the shaft member in the rear shaft direction, and the spring is moved from the initial position to the rear shaft direction in the body shaft hole. When moving, it may be present at a position where force is applied to the shaft member in a direction in which the shaft member is pulled back in the axial head direction by extending. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 107 can be realized.

  The shaft member includes a main shaft portion that serves as a rotation shaft of the plurality of dial rings, and a locking plate that is a member having the shaft uneven portion and the locking hole. When the plurality of dial rings are in the unlocked position, the locking plate is movable from the main shaft portion when the plurality of dial rings are in the unlocked position. The lock body may be movable with respect to the lock body, and the lock body further has a through hole or a through groove through which the locking member is passed, and the main shaft member is locked to pass through the locking member. There is a member hole, and a part of the holding groove is located in the middle of the locking member hole, and the through hole or the through groove and the locking member hole form a path through which the locking member passes. In the position of the concave and convex portions of the locking member Protrusion of the meaning may be held in a locked state by the locking hole in the retaining groove. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 70 can be realized.

  The lock body further includes a body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted and a spring, the spring is present in the body shaft hole, and the shaft member is a shaft on which the locking hole is present. A rear portion and a shaft head having the shaft irregularities are formed, and the spring applies a force to the shaft member, so that the plurality of dial rings are in the rotation position which is the unlocked position. When the portion releases all the engagement of the shaft member with the convex portion of the shaft uneven portion, the shaft member is moved to the position where the locking member can pass through the shaft shaft hole. And the locking hole is held so that the locking member can pass therethrough, and the shaft member has an arbitrary concave portion of the concave-convex portion of the locking member in the locking hole. In the state of being pushed against the force of the spring toward the main body shaft head, and When the number of the dial ring is a rotational position other than the unlocking position, at a position where the locking member is locked to the locking hole may be fixed in the main body shaft hole. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 63 (d) or 69 (b) can be realized.

  Further, in the locking device of the present invention, the locking mechanism portion includes a shaft member supported by the lock body, and a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation shaft, and the lock body is externally provided. A main body shaft hole or a main body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted; a main body side groove or a main body side hole into which the locking member is inserted; and the shaft member is a shaft side groove into which the locking member is inserted or The main body side groove or the main body side hole is present at a position where one passage is formed by the main body side groove or the main body side hole and the main shaft side groove or the main shaft side hole; At least a part of the side groove or the shaft side hole may be formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body.

  As a result, even if the shaft-side groove or the shaft-side hole penetrates the shaft member, when the locking member is locked with the dial ring, the shaft member of the dial ring is locked to the lock body, and the shaft member cannot be pulled out from the lock body. Can be possible. On the other hand, when the locking of the locking member by the dial ring is released and the locking member is removed from the shaft side (for locking member) groove and the shaft side (for locking member) hole, the shaft member is locked to the lock body. It can be assumed that the structure can be released. That is, this structure is one example of a structure of a locking device that can be easily disassembled and assembled repeatedly.

  Further, when the locking member is locked to the dial ring in a state that is at least partly different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, the locking member is locked to the dial ring, the shaft is locked to the lock body, The structure in which the shaft and the dial ring cannot be disassembled from the lock body helps to reduce the number of lock components that can be repeatedly disassembled and assembled.

  Here, the elongated locking member is a generic term for locking members of a band type, a belt type, a wire type, a chain type or the like.

  In addition, the main body side groove is formed so that the shaft side groove and the main body side groove form a hole or a hole when the shaft member is inserted into the main body shaft hole or the main body shaft hole. At least a part of the hole or hole formed by the shaft side groove and the body side groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body. It may be.

  As a result, when the locking member is locked with the dial ring, the shaft member of the dial ring is locked to the lock body, and when the locking member is unlocked by the dial ring and removed from the shaft side groove, the shaft with respect to the lock body is removed. An effect of unlocking the member can be provided.

  Further, the lock body has a wall that restricts movement of the dial ring in the insertion direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, and the shaft member has a hook for preventing the dial ring from coming off at a rear end portion. The dial ring may be restricted from moving in the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body by the hook and the wall of the lock body. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 121 (c) can be realized.

  The lock body may have a wall that restricts movement of the dial ring in the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, and the lock body is further inserted with a part of the locking member. And at least one end of the shaft-side groove is on the periphery of the shaft member, and the insertion portion is located at a position following the end of the shaft-side groove on the periphery in the lock body. Also good.

  Even with these configurations, when the locking member is locked with the dial ring, the shaft member of the dial ring is locked to the lock body, and when the locking member is unlocked by the dial ring and removed from the shaft side groove, the locking is achieved. An effect of unlocking the shaft member with respect to the main body can be provided. That is, a locking device that can be disassembled only when unlocked can be realized.

  In the locking device according to the present invention, if the shaft member has a shaft-side groove or a shaft-side hole into which the locking member is inserted, the shaft-side groove or the shaft-side hole Penetrating, the lock body further has a body side groove or body side hole through which the locking member can penetrate, and the locking member has an uneven portion in which unevenness is repeatedly formed in its longitudinal direction, The plurality of dial rings allow the locking member to be inserted / removed at a rotational position that is an unlocked position, and contact with an arbitrary convex portion of the concave / convex portion of the locking member at a rotational position other than the unlocked position. It is good also as having a notch part provided in a part of peripheral direction so that it may touch.

  With this configuration, it is possible to lock using a long locking member having an uneven portion in which unevenness is repeatedly formed in the longitudinal direction that can be locked at an arbitrary position. Even if this long locking member that can be locked at any position is used, as long as at least a part of the direction of the shaft-side groove or the shaft-side hole is different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, There is an effect that the shaft is locked to the lock body at the time of locking, and the lock of the shaft to the lock body is released at the time of unlocking.

  Here, the state in which the locking member penetrates the shaft is that the shaft side groove (the groove for the locking member made on the side surface of the shaft) or the shaft side hole (the hole for the locking member made on the shaft). Instead of dead ends in the shaft, a part or all of the tip of the band can move from end to end of the shaft side groove or shaft side hole, and the band passes through both ends.

  With the configuration described above, the locking device of the present invention can lock various articles with the elongated locking member. Furthermore, this structure using a long locking member that is locked at an arbitrary position is used for a dial lock with a shaft, regardless of the direction of the shaft-side groove or shaft-side hole. The effect of being able to lock various articles | goods can be exhibited by a shaped locking member.

  As described above, when a long locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position is used, a hook or enormous portion that hides the hole for the locking member cannot be formed. It is necessary to devise so that the part cannot be seen. However, the passage of the locking member formed by the shaft side groove, the shaft side hole, the main body side groove, or the main body side hole is not visible through the passage from outside the lock body. By bending or bending as much as possible, the dial ring closest to the opening portion opened in the lock outer surface of the passage formed in the lock body and the shaft member can be prevented from being seen. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to look into the part for unlocking.

  The effect of preventing peeping at the portion for unlocking by bending or bending the passage for the locking member is provided with a dial ring, and the passage for the locking member existing in the member such as the lock body is locked. If it is a locking device that leads from the outer surface of the dial to the dial ring, it will be demonstrated. That is, it is possible to prevent a portion for unlocking from being looked at regardless of whether the shaft is present or the position at which the locking member is locked is inside or outside the dial ring.

  Furthermore, the passage of the locking member formed by the shaft-side groove, the shaft-side hole, the body-side groove, or the body-side hole is not visible through the passage from outside the lock body. When the shaft side groove, the shaft side hole, the main body side groove, or the main body side hole forms a lateral width of the shaft side groove, the width of the passage of the locking member, The notch portions of the plurality of dial rings allow the plurality of locking members or the one locking member to be inserted / removed in a rotation position that is an unlocking position. At the same time, it may be in contact with an arbitrary convex portion of the concave and convex portions of the plurality of locking members or the one locking member at a rotational position other than the unlocking position.

  In this way, since the passage for the locking member is curved or bent, it is impossible to look into the portion for unlocking, so that the width of the passage for the locking member is only one (single). The locking member can be made wider than the passage for locking, and not only one but also a plurality of locking members or a plurality of overlapping locking members can be locked with a dial ring.

  That is, when the width of the passage for the locking member is made wider than the width of the passage for locking only one (single) locking member, the passage for the locking member is linear. If only one (single) locking member is locked, the part for unlocking the dial ring may be easily seen from the gap, but from the opening opening on the lock outer surface of the locking member passage Since the path to the nearest dial ring is curved or bent, the state of the locking portion can be prevented from being seen.

  The locking device of the present invention further includes a large-diameter portion forming member for increasing the outer diameter of one or more places when the umbrella to be locked is closed, and the outer diameter of the large-diameter portion forming member is The large-diameter forming member is located between the lower loft and the stone protrusion of the middle rod of the umbrella, or between the lower lokuro and the stone protrusion of the main bone of the umbrella when the umbrella is closed, Or when present in contact with the ribs, the umbrella is sized to be closed, and the locking member is curved or curved along the outer periphery of the cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the umbrella in the closed state. It may be a member that can be bent.

  By using this large-diameter portion forming member, it is possible to form a bulge on a closed umbrella. That is, when the locking device of the present invention is used and the umbrella is tightened and locked with the locking member, the effect of preventing the locking device from being pulled out of the umbrella can be improved.

  Further, the large-diameter portion forming member of the present invention includes a hole or a groove through which the middle rod, the main bone or the rib of the umbrella passes, and in the case of including the hole, from the outer periphery of the large-diameter portion forming member The hole or the groove has a size or a shape that allows the center rod, main bone, or rib of the umbrella to pass therethrough, and the large diameter portion forming member. The outer diameter of the large-diameter portion forming member is between the lower loft and the stone bump of the middle rod of the umbrella, or between the lower lokuro and the stone bump of the main bone of the umbrella when the umbrella is closed. The shape may be a size that allows the umbrella to be closed when it is in contact with a portion to be positioned or a rib.

  Thereby, the large diameter part formation member of this invention can take various shapes as shown, for example in FIG. That is, the large-diameter portion forming member having various shapes can be provided according to the user's preference and the shape of the umbrella. Furthermore, regardless of the type of locking device, by using the large-diameter portion forming member, it can be locked so as not to pass through the large-diameter portions on both sides of the narrowed portion of the umbrella, which is formed by the large-diameter portion forming member during locking. If it is a lock | rock, the more reliable locking effect which a large diameter part formation member has can be exhibited.

  In the locking device of the present invention, the lock body has an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking one end of the locking member, and the locking member is at least partially. It is a member that can be bent or bent, and has a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end portion engaging hole or the end portion engaging groove only at one end, and the end portion engaging hole or the end portion engaging member. At least a part of the inlet side of the stop groove is narrower than the tail part, and the tail part has elasticity, and the end part is deformed into a size that can be inserted into the end part locking hole or the end part locking groove. Inserted into the part locking hole or the end part locking groove, and after the insertion, the elasticity is restored to a shape corresponding to the shape inside the end part locking hole or the end part locking groove, and Even if the tail portion is deformed, at least a part of the exit side of the stop hole or the end portion locking groove is the tail portion. It may be the narrow impossible pass.

  Moreover, the tail part does not have elasticity, but the hole or groove | channel for attaching the locking member by the side of a lock main body may have elasticity. For example, the lock body has an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking one end of the locking member, and at least a part of the locking member can be bent or bent. A tail portion having a size that cannot pass through the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove only at one end, and at least on the inlet side of the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove. A portion forms a narrowed portion narrower than the tail portion, and the narrowed portion of the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove has elasticity, and the size of the narrowed portion is set to a size that allows the tail portion to be inserted. When the shape is deformed, the tail portion is inserted, and after insertion, the shape of the narrowed portion may be restored to a shape corresponding to the shape of the tail portion by the elasticity.

  As described above, the tail portion of the locking member, or the end locking hole or the end locking groove of the lock body has a deforming / restoring ability, so that the locking member can be easily attached to and detached from the lock body. It has a function of preventing the locking member from falling off from the lock body, and the locking member can be easily replaced. The structure in which the tail portion of the locking member, or the end locking hole or the end locking groove of the lock body has a deforming / restoring ability can be used regardless of the type of the locking device. It can be used in all locking devices used.

  Further, in the locking device of the present invention, the locking member has a concavo-convex portion that is locked by the dial ring, and the dial ring has an inner member that has a notch for passing the convex portion of the locking member. And an outer member which is a part other than the inner member are detachably fitted, and the inner member has a deformation notch on a side surface perpendicular to the axial direction, and the deformation notch The inner member may be inserted into the outer member while being narrowed, and may be fitted to the outer member by the restoring force of the deforming notch, and the inner member is formed only on one side surface perpendicular to the axial direction. And the maximum diameter perpendicular to the axial direction of the side surface where the notch for deformation does not exist is larger than the maximum inner diameter perpendicular to the axial direction of the outer member, and is centered on the central axis of the inner member, The axial thickness of the region included in the circle including the notch is The inner member and the outer member are thinner than the axial thickness of the outer member, and the thickest portion in the axial direction of the inner member and the thickest portion in the axial direction of the outer member have the same thickness, The inner member may be fitted so that the axial center plane of the thickest portion in the axial direction of the inner member coincides with the axial central plane of the thickest portion of the outer member in the axial direction.

  With this configuration, the dial ring can be disassembled into an inner member and an outer member, and they can be assembled. For example, a dial ring having the structure shown in FIG. 14 can be realized. Further, with this configuration, it is possible to change the relative position where the cutout portion is present with respect to the position where the outer member is located, and reassemble. That is, the number for unlocking can be changed. Furthermore, if the locking device uses a dial ring, the double structure of the dial ring can be adopted regardless of the structure, and the unlocking number can be changed stably as described above. The effect that there is.

  Here, in the dial lock that can change the unlocking number as it is assembled, the outer member needs to slide relative to the inner member. Changes do not go smoothly. Further, in the dial lock that is disassembled and reassembled as in the locking device of the present invention, if the outer member slides with respect to the inner member, the inner member tends to slide out of the outer member during assembly, and the assembly work is troublesome. Since it is easy, it is important to make it a structure that fits by deformation / restoration ability. Therefore, in the dial ring composed of the outer member and the inner member, it is considered that the technical type is different between the slide type and the type that is fitted by deformation / restoration ability.

  This structural feature is available in all dial locks that can be disassembled and assembled.

  Further, as described above, the lock body in the locking device of the present invention may have a hole that allows the shaft member to be pushed out. Here, as the locking device in which the hole exhibits an effect, for example, a lock body, a shaft member supported by the lock body, a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation axis, and the plurality of dial rings The locking body includes a main body shaft hole or a main body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted from the outside, and the dial ring with respect to the lock body. A wall that restricts movement of the shaft member in the insertion / removal direction and a hole that allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of the shaft member into the lock body. The hole is located on the shaft head side, and further opens to the outer surface of the lock body. The body shaft hole or the body shaft hole has at least a part of an inner diameter than at least a part of the outer diameter of the shaft member. Is also smaller, or the body shaft Is not penetrating the lock body, the shaft member is in a direction opposite to the shaft head when the dial ring is in the unlocked position and the locking member is in the open state. It is also possible to consider a locking device that can be extracted only. In other words, the hole that opens to the outer surface of the lock body and allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head is adopted for the dial lock with the shaft member, so that the shaft member can be easily pushed out of the lock body. It can be demonstrated.

  Further, in the locking device having a hole that opens on the outer surface of the lock body and allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head, the shaft member further includes a shaft-side groove or a shaft into which the locking member is inserted. The shaft-side groove or the shaft-side hole penetrates the shaft member, the lock body further has a body-side groove or body-side hole through which the locking member can penetrate, and the locking The member has a concavo-convex portion in which concavo-convex is repeatedly formed in the longitudinal direction, and the plurality of dial rings allow the locking member to be inserted / removed at a rotation position which is an unlocking position, and other than the unlocking position. It is good also as having the notch part provided in a part of the circumferential direction so that it may contact | abut with the arbitrary convex part of the said uneven | corrugated | grooved part of the said locking member in this rotation position. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having the structure shown in FIG. 5 can be realized.

  Further, in this locking device having a hole that opens to the outer surface of the lock body and allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head, the locking member is a U-shape in which the unevenness is formed in a straight portion. The dial ring is composed of a locking ring for locking the locking member and an alignment ring that meshes with and rotates with the locking ring. When the positioning ring reaches a predetermined rotational position, the rotational position of the locking ring becomes an unlocked position, and when the locking ring reaches a rotational position other than the unlocked position, the U-shaped bar The U-shaped bar is brought into a locked state by abutting with an arbitrary convex part of the concave-convex part of the outer peripheral portion, and the U-shaped bar is released from the locked state when the rotational position becomes the unlocked position. The lock body is further , A rod hole or a rod hole into which the straight portion of the U-shaped rod is inserted, the shaft member is a rotation shaft of the alignment ring, and at least a part of the outer diameter is the body shaft The direction in which the shaft member is inserted into the main body shaft hole or the main body shaft hole because it is larger than the inner diameter of a part of the hole or because the main body shaft hole does not penetrate the lock body. The rotation direction can be extracted only in the reverse direction, and the rotation direction of the rotating shaft with respect to the lock body is the same as the direction in which the U-shaped bar is pulled out when the U-shaped bar is released from the locked state. The main body shaft hole or the main body shaft hole is located in a position where the shaft member cannot be removed from the lock body due to the U-shaped bar being obstructed when the U-shaped bar is in the locked state in the lock body. It is good. With this configuration, for example, a locking device having a structure shown in FIG. 46A (a) can be realized.

  Further, the locking device having a hole that opens on the outer surface of the lock body and allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head is the above-described double structure of the dial ring and the bending of the passage for the locking member. Or, a structure for preventing peeping at the part for unlocking by bending, a structure in which the tail part of the locking member and the end locking hole or locking groove of the lock body have deformation / restoration ability are naturally adopted. And the effect of each structure is exhibited.

  Further, as described above, the shaft member in the locking device of the present invention may have a hook at the rear end for pulling out the shaft member from the lock body. Here, examples of the locking device in which the hook is effective include, for example, a lock body, a shaft member supported by the lock body, a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation axis, and the plurality of dial rings. The locking body includes a main body shaft hole or a main body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted from the outside, and the dial ring with respect to the lock body. A wall that restricts movement of the shaft member in the insertion / removal direction, and the shaft member has the shaft member when the dial ring is in the unlocked position and the locking member is in the open state. A locking device is also conceivable which has a hook at the rear end for pulling it out of the lock body.

  Also with this configuration, the effect that the shaft member can be easily pulled out from the lock body and the locking device can be disassembled by the hooks of the shaft member is exhibited.

  Moreover, this locking device provided with the shaft member which has a collar at a rear end is the structure using the above-mentioned long locking member locked at arbitrary positions, the double structure of a dial ring, and a locking member A structure for preventing peeping at a portion for unlocking by bending or bending of a passage for the structure, a tail portion of the locking member, an end locking hole or an end locking groove of the lock body having a deformation / restoration capability, and Naturally, each of the structures using the U-shaped bar can be adopted, and the effects of the respective structures are exhibited.

  Further, as described above, the locking device of the present invention may include a secondary member that is inserted into and attached to the lock body to limit the movement of the dial ring in the direction opposite to the loading direction with respect to the lock body. It was. Here, in the locking device in which the structure including the auxiliary member inserted into and attached to the lock body exerts an effect, the lock body further has a body side groove or a body side hole through which the locking member can pass, The locking member has an uneven portion in which unevenness is repeatedly formed in the longitudinal direction, and the plurality of dial rings allow the locking member to be inserted / removed at a rotation position which is an unlocked position, and the opening is opened. You may have a notch part provided in a part of the circumferential direction so that it may contact | abut with the arbitrary convex parts of the said uneven | corrugated | grooved part of the said locking member in rotation positions other than a lock position. With this configuration, an effect that various articles can be locked is exhibited in the locking device including the auxiliary member that is inserted and attached.

  Further, the passage of the locking member formed by the sub hole, the main body side groove or the main body side hole of the sub member is such that the dial ring is not visible from outside the lock body through the passage. It may be curved or bent. Thereby, in a locking device provided with the submember inserted and attached, the effect that the peeping of the site | part for unlocking by a dial ring and a locking member can be prevented is exhibited.

  Further, the locking device provided with the sub-member to be inserted and attached is deformed in the double structure of the dial ring described above, and the tail portion of the locking member, the end locking hole or the end locking groove of the lock body. Each of the structures having a restoring ability can naturally be adopted, and the effect of each structure is exhibited.

  Further, as described above, the locking device of the present invention may include a shaft retaining member for restraining the shaft member to the lock body. Here, as the locking device in which the shaft retaining member exerts an effect, for example, a lock body, a shaft member supported by the lock body, a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation shaft, A locking device comprising a long locking member directly locked by a dial ring and a shaft retaining member for restraining the shaft member to the lock body, wherein the lock body is externally connected to the shaft. There is an insertion hole or insertion hole into which a retaining member is inserted, and the shaft member is a shaft retaining hole or shaft retaining hole into which the shaft retaining member is inserted at a position following the insertion hole or the insertion hole of the lock body. Or it has a shaft retaining groove, and at least a part of the shaft retaining hole, the shaft retaining hole or the shaft retaining groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, The retaining member is a locking hole, a locking hole or a locking hole into which the locking member is inserted. A locking groove, and when inserted through the insertion hole or the insertion hole in a state where the shaft member is inserted into the lock body, the lock body exists between the lock body and the shaft member, and the locking A locking device is also conceivable in which at least a part of the hole, the locking hole or the locking groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft retaining member with respect to the lock body.

  Even in this configuration, the locking member is present in the shaft retaining member in a direction that is at least partially different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft retaining member with respect to the lock body, so that the shaft retaining member cannot be disassembled from the lock body only during locking. It can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  In addition, the locking device provided with the shaft retaining member has the above-described double structure of the dial ring, the tail portion of the locking member, the end locking hole or the end locking groove of the lock body, and the deforming / restoring ability. Naturally, each of the structures can be adopted, and the effect of each structure is exhibited.

  Further, as described above, the locking device of the present invention may include an adapter for changing the shape of the surface of the lock body that contacts the lock target article. Here, as a locking device in which this adapter exhibits an effect, for example, a lock body, a long locking member locked at a locking locking portion, and a shape of a surface of the lock body in contact with an object to be locked An adapter for changing the position of the lock body, wherein the lock body has a surface in contact with the article to be locked, and an adapter mounting groove and adapter mounting hole for mounting the adapter on the upper and lower or left and right surfaces of the surface. Or an adapter mounting hole and a main body side hole or main body side groove for allowing the locking member to pass therethrough, and the adapter is mounted in a shape corresponding to the adapter mounting groove, the adapter mounting hole or the adapter mounting hole And an adapter side hole or an adapter side groove for allowing the locking member to pass therethrough, and the main body side hole or the main body side groove includes the main body side hole or the main body side groove and the The passage formed by the adapter side hole or the adapter side groove and the main body side hole or the main body side groove is present at a position where one passage is formed by the adapter side hole or the adapter side groove. A locking device characterized in that it is formed in a direction different from the direction in which the adapter is attached to and removed from the adapter is also conceivable.

  Also with this configuration, the adapter cannot be removed from the lock body only during locking, and can be removed only during unlocking.

  Moreover, the locking device provided with this adapter can naturally adopt the structure in which the tail portion of the locking member, the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove of the lock body has deformation / restoration ability, And the effect which the structure has is exhibited.

  Further, as described above, the locking device of the present invention may include a large-diameter portion forming member for forming the large-diameter portion in the closed umbrella. Here, as a locking device provided with this large-diameter portion forming member, for example, it has an annular part that can be opened and closed, and when the annular part is locked, the lock body that can be closed and the umbrella that is to be locked is closed A large-diameter portion forming member for increasing the outer diameter at one or more locations, wherein the large-diameter portion forming member has an outer diameter such that the large-diameter portion forming member is the middle rod of the umbrella When the umbrella is closed, the umbrella is closed when it is in contact with the portion located between the lower lokuro and the stone bump of the main bone of the umbrella or the stone bump, The inner diameter of the closed annular portion when locked is larger than the outer diameter between the large diameter portions, and smaller than the outer diameter of the upper and lower large diameter portions between the large diameter portions, Between the large diameter portions, the outer diameter of the cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the umbrella in the closed state is the large diameter. By forming member, the locking device is also conceivable, wherein in the longitudinal direction is a portion which is smaller than the vertical.

  Also with this configuration, the bulge can be formed on the umbrella closed by the large diameter portion forming member. That is, it is possible to improve the effect of preventing the locking device from being removed from the umbrella when the umbrella is tightened and locked with the lock body.

  The large-diameter portion forming member includes a hole or a groove. When the large-diameter portion forming member has the hole, the large-diameter portion forming member further includes a cutout portion or a cutting portion that reaches the hole from the outer periphery of the large-diameter portion forming member. The umbrella may have a size or a shape that allows the center rod, main bone, or rib of the umbrella to pass therethrough. Thereby, the large diameter portion forming member can be easily attached, and in the umbrella to be locked, it can be attached at an optimal position for locking.

  Further, it is a locking method for locking an umbrella using a locking device provided with this large-diameter portion forming member, wherein the diameter is applied to a portion between the central rod of the umbrella or a lower loft and a stone protrusion of a main bone, or a receiving bone. Attaching a large part forming member, positioning the large diameter part of the umbrella, to which the large diameter part forming member is attached and closed, in the annular part of the locking device; and closing the locking device. The locking method including the step of locking can be implemented.

  When the umbrella is locked by this locking method, the locking device cannot be removed from the umbrella and the theft of the umbrella can be prevented.

  Further, the large-diameter portion forming member is a large-diameter portion forming member of the above-described locking device, which is attached to the umbrella to be locked and increases the outer diameter of one or more locations, A hole or a groove for passing a main bone or a bone bone through is provided, and when the hole is provided, the hole or the groove further includes a notch or a cutting part that reaches the hole from the outer periphery of the large diameter portion forming member. The outer diameter of the large-diameter portion forming member is such that the large-diameter portion forming member is the middle rod of the umbrella. When the umbrella is closed, the umbrella is closed when it is in contact with the portion located between the lower lokuro and the stone bump of the main bone of the umbrella or the stone bump, May be of a possible size. Thereby, the large diameter part formation member of various shapes can be provided according to a user's liking, the shape of an umbrella, etc.

  In other words, when the large diameter portion forming member is used, a lock using the long locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position, specifically, a dial lock, a cylinder lock, and a card lock Even a padlock can be locked. That is, if the locking device can be locked so as not to pass through the large-diameter portions on both sides of the narrowed portion of the umbrella, which is formed by the large-diameter portion forming member at the time of locking, the more reliable locking that the large-diameter portion forming member has The effect can be demonstrated.

  Thus, the locking device of the present invention is a locking device that can be easily handled and used, including disassembly and assembly only when unlocked. Accordingly, even if parts necessary for assembling the locking device such as the lock body are individually supplied and the user performs the assembly, the locking device is safe.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a locking device and an article locking method that can be easily handled and used. Specifically, it is possible to provide a locking device that allows a user to easily disassemble and assemble and replace constituent members. In addition, the unlocking number can be arbitrarily set, and can be replaced with a favorite dial ring. In addition, since it is possible to replace the locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position, which has a problem in durability, it is possible to reduce the maintenance cost of the locking device. Furthermore, the locking method for locking articles easily and effectively can be provided.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. The locking device of the present invention can be locked as long as it is an article that can be carried by a person. In Embodiments 1 and 2, an umbrella will be described as a locking object.

(Embodiment 1)
Hereinafter, Embodiment 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, an overview and an outline of the dial lock 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an overview of a dial lock 1 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. A dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a band-type lock that locks an article by fastening it with a band. The band-type lock is a locking device that locks the band by locking the band while tightening the article with the band.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the dial lock 1 includes a lock body 100 that is the center of the structure of the dial lock 1, a band 400 that is a band that is wound around the umbrella and does not open the umbrella, and the band 400 is connected to the lock body 100. The lock dial ring 200 is a ring that is locked so that it cannot be inserted into and removed from the lock, and the lock dial ring 200 is rotatably attached to the lock body 100, and a shaft 300 that serves as a rotation axis of the lock dial ring 200 is configured. Yes.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, there are three lock dial rings 200, and 10 numbers 0 to 9 are given at equal intervals on the radially outer surface of each lock dial ring 200. By rotating the three locking dial rings 200 to form a three-digit number for unlocking, the band 400 can be inserted into and removed from the lock body 100.

  Each of the band 400 and other bands described later is an example of a locking member in the locking device of the present invention. In addition, a dial lock having a single shaft as shown in FIG.

  Here, regarding the band-type lock, the structure of the lock part is classified into a dial lock, a cylinder lock, a card-type lock, and the like.

  The dial lock is a locking device that is unlocked only at a predetermined position of the dial ring by rotating the dial ring. When the cylinder lock is inserted into the cylinder and turned in a certain direction, the member that locks the locking part of the band moves away from the locking part of the band and is unlocked. The locking device is a locking device in which the member that locks the locking portion locks the locking portion of the band and is locked. When a card type lock is inserted, the member that locks the locking portion of the band is released from the locking portion of the band and is unlocked, and when the card is removed, the member that locks the locking portion of the band is the band. This is a locking device that locks the locking portion of the locking device. The card-type lock includes a lock called a plate-type lock that can be locked or unlocked by inserting a plate-like key.

  When comparing the above-mentioned band lock dial lock, cylinder lock, and card lock, the number of constituent members is the smallest, the structure is simple, the manufacturing cost of the members is low, and the user can easily use a device other than the band member. It is thought that it is a dial lock that the constituent members can be exchanged. This is because the components of the cylinder lock and the components of the card-type lock are complicated and have a large number of members, and it is difficult for the user to disassemble and assemble. When replacing a component, the parts including the component are replaced together. This is because replacement costs are high.

  That is, it can be said that the most advantageous in terms of cost for exchanging components among the band-type locks is the dial lock.

  Moreover, it is important to suppress the maintenance cost of the band-type lock as well as to reduce the manufacturing cost. Even if the band member is damaged, it becomes a big problem that it is necessary to replace the entire band-type lock every time. Therefore, it is necessary to provide a band member at low cost so that the user can easily replace the band member regardless of whether the band type lock is a dial lock, a cylinder lock or a card type lock. This is possible.

  Furthermore, it is possible to exchange components other than the band, and if these components can be manufactured at low cost, the maintenance cost of the lock can be further reduced.

  Considering components other than bands, conventionally, for example, for dial rings that are members other than bands, disassembly and assembly of dial rings can be considered mainly for changing the combination number, and wear and damage of the dial part, etc. It was not for the replacement of the parts in the case of. For this reason, it is thought that disassembly and assembly of the dial portion of the dial lock have not been regarded as important since a lock that can change the combination number without being disassembled was devised.

  Similarly, when replacing the locking member, if the strength of the locking member such as a chain or a wire is increased, it is not necessary to replace the locking member. In other words, it seems that the idea of increasing the strength of the locking member so as not to require replacement of the locking member has been mainstream.

  However, in a band-type lock that can be locked at an arbitrary position of the locking member, it is important to give the band flexibility. For this reason, it is considered extremely difficult to make it as strong as a chain-type dial lock that locks at a specific part.

  The durability performance of the band-type lock and the costs related to the manufacture and replacement of the components will be described below. First, regarding the durability performance related to wear and damage due to frequent use of the band-type lock, the band portion is a member that is likely to cause a problem particularly in the durability performance due to the form of the band-type lock.

  Here, rather than multiplying the manufacturing cost to increase the rigidity of the band part, lowering the manufacturing cost by lowering the rigidity of other members to match the strength of the band, and further enabling disassembly and assembly only at the time of unlocking Therefore, it seems that it is important to increase the cost performance by allowing only the damaged member to be replaced.

  That is, it is considered that the strength of the lock is the weakest part, and the strength of the band-type lock that can be locked at an arbitrary position of the locking member depends on the strength of the band. Therefore, it seems to be useless to increase the production cost in order to increase the strength of members other than the band. Therefore, if the manufacturing cost of the member other than the band can be suppressed by making the strength of the member other than the band slightly higher than the strength of the band, it should be given priority to suppress the manufacturing cost. It is done. As a result, wear and damage also become a problem in components other than the band, but only when unlocking can the problem of wear and damage due to daily use be solved if the damaged member can be replaced. Conceivable.

  The present invention is intended to lock a portable article such as an umbrella, but in general, a locking device is worth using as long as it has a strength suitable for the use situation, purpose of use, or endurance. To do. For example, since the method of use is limited even if the rigidity is high, a lock that cannot be used for an article to be locked is not worthy as a locking device under the circumstances.

  In addition, the band-type lock that can be locked at an arbitrary position is particularly excellent in that it can be locked at a stenosis site because it has a structure that can be locked by tightening an article. Further, since it can be locked at an arbitrary position, it can be locked to an article having a certain size range. Therefore, the utility value for preventing shoplifting of umbrellas and merchandise is very high.

  However, the band type lock is weaker (strength) than other U-shaped bar type locks, chain type locks and wire type locks. In addition, there is a limit to increasing the strength of the band portion, and it has been reduced in strength compared to other locking devices, and has received little attention due to problems with its strength. In other words, even if a band-type lock was manufactured and sold, it would have been thought that few people would purchase it because there would be no utility value corresponding to the purchase price and no locking effect.

  However, it is considered that the rigidity of the band-type lock can be compromised to some extent by limiting the use object and usage situation of the band-type lock to some extent. That is, the industrial availability of the band-type lock can be improved by providing the band-type lock at a low cost and allowing the components to be easily and inexpensively replaced. In other words, the band-type lock does not need to increase the structural strength so much depending on the use situation, and it is most important for the spread of the band-type lock to lower its manufacturing cost.

  For example, a lottery for umbrellas and shoplifting of products are often carried out with great care. For example, umbrella placement is often performed because it suddenly began to rain, and tools such as pliers and cutters are rarely used. Therefore, even if it shows only the state of being locked (for example, the state of locking an umbrella or a product with a band-type lock connected to a non-animal with a wire), it is thought that the intention to carry out reservation or shoplifting can be suppressed to some extent. It is done.

  And, as long as the band-type lock is strong enough not to be easily broken by hand, it seems to be sufficiently useful as a lock. Therefore, each of the above components constituting the dial lock 1 is made of plastic with a minimum condition that it cannot be torn off by hand. Therefore, the components constituting the dial lock 1 shown below are made of plastic unless otherwise specified.

  As described above, the dial lock 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention is a band-type lock, and the part that locks the band is a dial lock. An overview of each part before assembly of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 1 is shown in FIG. 5 to be described later, but the number of members constituting the dial lock 1 is small, and each part is independent and can be replaced. . In addition, it can be repeatedly disassembled and assembled only when unlocked. Unless otherwise specified, this feature is the same as in the first and second embodiments of the present invention and the dial locks of application examples and modifications described below.

  The locking device of the present invention can also use a locking member other than a band. The case of using a locking member other than the band will be described later.

  FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of the front, diagonally upper, and upper surfaces of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 2A is a schematic view of the front face of the dial lock 1, FIG. 2B is a schematic view of the dial lock 1 from diagonally above, and FIG. 2C is a diagram of the dial lock 1. FIG. Hereinafter, “front” means the surface shown in FIG. 2A, and “upper surface” means the surface shown in FIG. 2C.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of the side surface of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 3A is an overview of the left side surface of the dial lock 1, and FIG. 3B is an overview of the right side surface of the dial lock 1. The “right side surface” of the dial lock 1 is the right side surface when the front surface of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. Similarly, the “left side surface” of the dial lock 1 is also the left side surface when the front surface of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state in which the dial lock 1 is attached to the umbrella, that is, a state in which the umbrella is locked by the dial lock 1. Umbrellas have joints for connecting the main bone and the ribs, and ledges for gathering the dew, etc., so the outer diameter of the cross section perpendicular to the axial direction of the middle rod of the umbrella is closed. Instead, there is a portion where the outer diameter is narrower than the top and bottom.

  Therefore, in the annular part formed by the band 400 and the lock body 100 shown in FIG. 1, the part in which the outer diameter of the closed umbrella is thinner than the upper and lower parts comes, and the band is squeezed in the direction of squeezing the umbrella. If the 400 is locked while being pulled, the dial lock 1 cannot be easily moved up and down. That is, the umbrella cannot be opened unless the dial lock 1 is unlocked.

  The plurality of convex portions 401 of the band 400 are portions for locking the band 400 to the locking dial ring 200 depending on the shape of the locking dial ring 200 described later. When attached to an umbrella, it also has an effect of making it difficult to remove the dial lock 1 upward by biting into an umbrella cloth or the like.

  In particular, when locking the umbrella with the dial lock 1 turned upside down on the stump of the umbrella cloth slightly offset from the tip of the umbrella toward the stone bump direction, that is, with the convex portion 401 facing the stone bump direction of the umbrella The convex portion 401 bites into the stump of the umbrella cloth, and the dial lock 1 is extremely difficult to come off in the stone bump direction. This locking method is one of the locking methods effective for preventing theft of the umbrella. Examples of other locking methods will be described in detail in the description of FIG.

  In addition to attaching the dial lock 1 to the umbrella, the umbrella and other articles, for example, an umbrella stand column, a lattice rod, and the umbrella may be tied together with a band 400. This can prevent theft more.

  Next, the structure of the dial lock will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an overview of the lock body 100, the shaft 300, the lock dial ring 200, and the band 400 constituting the dial lock 1.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the lock body 100 includes a band attachment hole 101 that is a hole for attaching the band 400 to the lock body 100 and a lock body side shaft hole 102 a that is a hole for attaching the shaft 300 to the lock body 100. , The lock body side shaft hole 102b, the lock body side shaft hole 102c, and the lock body side shaft hole 102d, and the dial attachment portion 105, which is a space for attaching the lock dial ring 200 to the lock body 100.

  Three dial attachment portions 105 are provided at equal intervals in the left-right direction of the lock body 100. Therefore, the three locking dial rings 200 arranged in the dial attachment portion 105 are arranged at equal intervals.

  Each of the lock body side shaft holes 102a to 102d is provided with a lock body side band groove 104 which is a groove for allowing the band to pass therethrough. The shaft 300 is inserted into the lock body side shaft hole 102a. In this case, a guide notch 103 for determining the circumferential position of the shaft 300 is provided. The four lock body side band grooves 104 are arranged in a straight line when viewed from the lock body side shaft hole 102a to the lock body side shaft hole 102d.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the lock dial ring 200 has a cylindrical structure as a whole, and includes a ring-side shaft hole 201 that is a hole through which the shaft 300 is passed, and a number display unit that displays a number. 203. Further, the ring side shaft hole 201 is provided with a ring side band groove 202 which is a notch for allowing the band to pass therethrough.

  When the shaft 300 is passed through the ring-side shaft hole 201, the locking dial ring 200 can be rotated in the circumferential direction of the shaft 300 with the shaft 300 as a rotation axis. The lock dial ring 200 has a double structure so that the user can set the unlocking number. Details of the lock dial ring 200 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the shaft 300 has a cylindrical shape with a groove in the axial direction as a whole, and when attached to the lock body 100, a guide 301 for determining a circumferential position, and a band And a shaft-side band groove 302 that is a groove for allowing the light to pass therethrough. In addition, the axial front side of the shaft 300 shown in FIG. 5, that is, the end portion of the shaft where the guide 301 exists is hereinafter referred to as a shaft rear portion, and the end portion opposite to the shaft rear portion is hereinafter referred to as a shaft head portion. The shaft side band groove is an example of the shaft side groove in the locking device of the present invention. The shaft-side groove is a groove into which a locking member such as a band of the shaft member is inserted, and there may be a plurality of shaft-side grooves as described later with reference to FIG.

  The band 400 includes a plurality of convex portions 401 provided at regular intervals so that the band 400 is locked to the lock body 100 by the locking dial ring 200 and the band 400 inserted from the band mounting hole 101 of the lock body 100. And a stopper 403 for preventing the band 400 from coming off in the direction of the outlet of the band attachment hole 101.

  Note that in the band 400, there are recesses between adjacent protrusions 401, and the band 400 can be said to have a plurality of recesses provided at regular intervals.

  The end of the band 400 opposite to the stopper 403 is hereinafter referred to as a band head, and the portion other than the stopper 403 of the band 400 is hereinafter referred to as a band body. Further, the portion other than the convex portion 401 of the band main body is hereinafter referred to as a band basic portion. The band 400 can be inserted into the band attachment hole 101 of the lock body 100 from the band head, and the band head can be pulled out from the right side surface of the lock body 100. Further, since the stopper 403 of the band 400 is larger than the outlet of the band mounting hole 101 on the right side surface of the lock body 100, it cannot penetrate the lock body 100. It is locked inside the mounting hole 101 and fixed in the band head direction.

  Further, the locking member penetrates the shaft, and the dial ring uses the shaft as a rotation shaft. Thereby, since it can be disassembled only when the user unlocks it and has a simple structure, the user can assemble it.

  Further, although the band 400 is illustrated in a U shape for convenience of illustration, it is not fixed to the U shape. The band 400 is made of a material such as a plastic or rubber that can be bent, and has the flexibility to lock the umbrella with the dial lock 1.

  The shaft 300 has a shaft head inserted through the lock body side shaft hole 102 a, three lock dial rings 200 each having a shaft head placed on each of the three dial mounting portions 105 of the lock body 100, and a lock. It passes through the main body side shaft hole 102b and the lock main body side shaft hole 102c and is inserted into the lock main body side shaft hole 102d until the shaft head is fixed. The shaft 300 is fixed to the lock body 100 by fixing the shaft head to the lock body side shaft hole 102d. The relationship between the shaft head of the shaft 300 and the lock body side shaft hole 102d will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, as described above, each of the three locking dial rings 200 can be rotated in the circumferential direction of the shaft 300.

  Further, when the shaft 300 is inserted into the lock body 100, the guide 301 of the shaft 300 and the guide notch 103 of the lock body side shaft hole 102a engage with each other, so that the shaft 300 is circumferential with respect to the lock body 100. The position of is fixed. The fixed position is a position where the shaft-side band groove 302 of the shaft 300 comes directly below the four lock body-side band grooves 104 arranged in a straight line.

  In this state, each of the ring-side band grooves 202 of the three locking dial rings 200 is rotated so as to form a straight line with the four lock body-side band grooves 104 in the lock body 100, that is, on the shaft side of the shaft 300. When the ring side band groove 202 is rotated to a position just above the band groove 302, the band band is composed of one shaft side band groove 302, four lock body side band grooves 104, and three ring side band grooves 202. A band passage hole through which 400 band bodies can pass is formed.

  That is, in this state, the dial lock 1 is in an unlocked state, and the user of the dial lock 1 can insert and remove the band main body from the lock main body 100. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as an “unlocked state”. For example, in the case of the lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5, each of the lock dial rings 200 has “1”, “8”, and “6” in a row directly above the shaft-side band groove 302 of the shaft 300. The dial lock 1 can be brought into an unlocked state by rotating in line, that is, by adjusting to “1”, “8”, “6”. The sequence of numbers for achieving the unlocked state is hereinafter referred to as “unlocked number”.

  Further, in the unlocked state, as shown in FIG. 1, the band main body of the band 400 is passed from the front side of the figure, and the position of the convex portion 401 of the band main body is in the ring side band groove 202 of the locking dial ring 200. If there is no position, the lock dial ring 200 can be rotated. That is, the interval between adjacent convex portions 401 is wider than the axial width of the locking dial ring 200.

  Here, the plurality of convex portions 401 of the band 400 are arranged at equal intervals as described above, and this interval is the same as the interval between the three locking dial rings 200 arranged at equal intervals. In addition, the reference | standard of the space | interval of the convex part 401 is taken as the cross section which passes along the center of the width | variety of the longitudinal direction of the band of the convex part 401, and is perpendicular | vertical to a longitudinal direction. The reference of the interval between the lock dial rings 200 is a cross section that passes through the center of the width of the lock dial ring 200 in the axial direction and is perpendicular to the axial direction.

  That is, when at least one lock dial ring 200 is matched to a number other than the unlocking number, the convex portion 401 contacts the side surface perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lock dial ring 200 on the band body of the band 400. The band main body of the band 400 is locked and cannot be inserted into and removed from the lock main body 100. That is, the band body of the band 400 is locked by the locking dial ring 200.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the structure of the lock dial ring 200. 6A is a left side view of the lock dial ring 200, FIG. 6B is a front view of the lock dial ring 200, and FIG. 6C is a diagram of the lock dial ring 200. 6D is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of the locking dial ring 200, and FIG. 6E is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB of the lock dial ring 200. FIG.

  The lock dial ring 200 has a double structure as described above, and the structure of the lock dial ring 200 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 6A to 6E, the locking dial ring 200 includes a ring inner member 210 and a ring outer member 220. That is, the locking dial ring 200 has a double structure of the ring inner member 210 and the ring outer member 220.

  The ring inner member 210 has a ring side shaft hole 201, a ring side band groove 202, and a deformation cutout portion 204, and the ring outer member 220 has a number display portion 203.

  The ring inner member 210 has ten deformation notches 204 as shown in FIG. The deformation notch 204 is a cut from the left side surface shown in FIG. 6A toward the right side surface shown in FIG. 6C. As shown in the AA sectional view of FIG. 6D, the notch 204 for deformation is about half of the thickness of the inner ring member 210, that is, the left and right width of the AA sectional view of FIG. It is a part cut by about half the width.

  When the inner ring member 210 is pushed in from the right side of the outer ring member 220 shown in FIG. 6D so that the deformation notch 204 is on the left side, a radially inward force is applied to the circumference of the inner ring member 210. It acts and the circumferential width of the deformation notch 204 is reduced. As shown in the AA cross-sectional view of FIG. 6D, the ring outer member 220 has a mountain-shaped cross section at the center, but the deformation notch 204 has a circumferential width of the deformation notch 204. By shrinking, the mountain is crossed and restored with restoring force. That is, the ring inner member 210 is incorporated into the ring outer member 220, and the lock dial ring 200 is completed.

  Also, after assembling the lock dial ring 200, when the ring inner member 210 is pushed from the left side of the ring outer member 220 shown in FIG. As the circumferential width of 204 decreases, the inner ring member 210 can be removed from the outer ring member 220.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 6C, the inner ring member 210 includes ten inner fitting portions 205 for determining the circumferential position of the outer ring member 220. It exists at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In the ring outer member 220, ten outer fitting portions 206 exist at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the ring outer member 220 in a shape corresponding to the ten inner fitting portions 205.

  In the ring outer member 220, numbers are assigned to the number display portions 203 on the radially outer side of the ten outer fitting portions 206, respectively. That is, ten numbers are assigned to the number display portion 203 of the lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 6C, in the ring inner member 210, one inner fitting portion 205 exists on the outer side in the radial direction of the ring-side band groove 202.

  The number of the number display portion 203 on the outer side in the radial direction of the ring-side band groove 202 is a number that is one of the unlocking numbers as described in the explanation of FIG. That is, the user of the dial lock 1 selects the number to be the unlocking number, and the ring outer member 220 is attached to the ring inner member 220 so that the ring side band groove 202 comes to the inside of the number display portion 203 in the radial direction of the number. 210 is incorporated. In this way, a lock dial ring in which the selected number is one of the unlocking numbers can be assembled.

  As described above, the lock dial ring 200 can be disassembled and assembled by dividing the dial ring into an inner member having a notch for unlocking and an outer member at the outer peripheral portion. This structure is convenient in that the unlocking number can be changed when replacing the member by disassembling and assembling the dial ring. Further, it is not necessary to purchase a new dial ring in order to change the unlocking number, and the cost for maintaining the user's dial lock can be further reduced.

  Further, the locking dial ring 200 has a double-structured disassembly / assembly type structure in which the inner member constituting the dial ring is loaded into the outer member while being deformed and is fitted by a restoring force. This eliminates the need for a member for coupling the inner member and the outer member. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the inner member and the outer member from being detached unintentionally when the dial body is disassembled and assembled when the lock body, the dial ring, and the shaft are disassembled.

  Furthermore, if the manufacturing cost of the outer member of the dial ring can be reduced by making the outer member simple like the outer member 220 shown in FIG. 6, characters, symbols, pictures, etc. other than numerals are written. It is possible to produce various kinds of outer members and provide the outer members as a single unit at low cost. Therefore, even if the person who forgets the unlocking number in the unlocking number, which is the combined number for unlocking, the user is free to use the combination number, letters, symbols and pictures for unlocking the dial ring. Since it can be selected and assembled, it is difficult to forget the combination of dials for unlocking. In addition, there is an effect that it is difficult to forget even when the interval between the locks is used.

  FIG. 7 is a perspective view when the lock body 100 is viewed from the front. As described above, the shaft 300 is fixed to the lock body 100 by fixing the shaft head portion by the lock body side shaft hole 102d. The relationship between the shaft head of the shaft 300 and the lock body side shaft hole 102d will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the inner diameters of the lock body side shaft hole 102a, the lock body side shaft hole 102b, and the lock body side shaft hole 102c are r1. Further, the inner diameter on the left side of the lock body side shaft hole 102d is r1, while the inner diameter on the right side is r2, and r1> r2.

  Here, the shape of the shaft 300 not including the guide 301 and the shaft side band groove 302 is a cylinder, and the inner diameter is r1. That is, when the shaft 300 is pushed into the lock body 100 from the left side of FIG. 7, the shaft head of the shaft 300 has the lock body side shaft hole 102a, the lock body side shaft hole 102b, and the lock body side shaft hole 102c. It can pass through and can enter the lock body side shaft hole 102d. However, since the inner diameter on the right side of the lock body side shaft hole 102d is smaller than the outer diameter of the shaft 300, when the shaft 300 is driven into the lock body 100, the shaft head faces radially inward from the wall surface of the lock body side shaft hole 102d. Under pressure. Therefore, a frictional force is generated between the circumference of the shaft head due to the pressure and the wall surface of the lock body side shaft hole 102d, and the shaft head is fixed to the lock body side shaft hole 102d. Thereby, the shaft 300 is fixed to the lock body 100.

  Since the shaft 300 is fixed to the lock body 100 by frictional force, after the lock body 100 is assembled into the shaft 300, the shaft 300 is used from the right side of the lock body 100 shown in FIG. From the lock body 100. However, in a state where the umbrella is locked, the band body of the band 400 passes through the shaft-side band groove 302 of the shaft 300 and is locked in a tightened state, and thus the shaft 300 cannot be removed.

  As described above, the dial lock 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention can be adjusted in the length of the portion of the band 400 that locks the umbrella, and therefore is shown in FIG. 4 regardless of the size and shape of the umbrella. Thus, the closed umbrella can be locked by the dial lock 1.

  That is, another person cannot open the umbrella and cannot use the umbrella. Therefore, it has the effect of preventing theft of the umbrella performed for the purpose of using the umbrella.

  In addition, when the positional relationship between the umbrella and the object such as the pillar of the umbrella stand or the lattice bar can be tied together with the band 400, the umbrella and the umbrella stand can be tied together with the band 400. be able to. This can prevent theft more.

  Moreover, the dial lock 1 has a simple structure, and a user who is supplied with the lock body 100, the lock dial ring 200, the shaft 300, and the band 400 can be easily assembled.

  Further, the lock dial ring 200 has a double structure, and the lock dial ring 200 can be produced using the number selected by the user as the number for unlocking. That is, it is possible to assemble the dial lock 1 with a desired number such as a number that can be easily remembered as an unlocking number.

  Further, since the shaft 300 can be detached from the lock body 100 after the dial lock 1 is assembled, the unlocking number can be changed at any time.

  Here, since the shaft 300 cannot be removed from the lock body 100 as described above when the dial lock 1 is attached to the umbrella, only the user of the dial lock 1 who knows the unlocking number locks the shaft 300. It can be removed from the main body 100.

  That is, the dial lock 1 according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention can be disassembled only when unlocked, and can be repeatedly reassembled. Moreover, the number of members required for assembly is small and the structure is simple. In the conventional dial lock, there are problems such as a large number of members necessary for assembly, difficulty in assembly, and production cost. However, in the dial lock 1, these problems are solved.

  In addition, by making it possible to disassemble and assemble the band, dial ring, shaft, and lock body, it becomes possible to select and change the components of the lock according to the usage situation. For example, the strength, length and shape of the band can be changed, and the strength and shape of the dial ring, shaft and lock body can be changed.

  In other words, the user only has to purchase and assemble parts according to the assumed usage situation, and can combine various materials such as plastic, wood, ceramics, glass, and metal. As a result, it is possible to provide a variety of band-type dial locks that are extremely inexpensive.

  The dial lock 1 can be provided with a coiled wire that can be expanded and contracted. One end of the coiled wire can be attached to a fixed object such as a door handle or a stair railing, that is, the umbrella locked by the dial lock 1 can be connected to the fixed object.

  FIG. 8 is a view showing an example of a state in which a coiled wire is attached to the dial lock 1 and the dial lock 1 and a door handle as a fixed object are connected by the coiled wire.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8, the dial lock 1 has a wire attachment portion 110 that is a U-shaped member in order to attach the coiled wire 20 to the dial lock 1. The coiled wire 20 has a ring 21 for attaching to the dial lock 1 at one end, and a ring 22 for attaching to a fixed object such as a door handle at the other end. . The ring 21 for attaching to the dial lock 1 has a size that allows the coiled wire 20 itself to pass through. The ring 22 for attaching to a fixed object such as a door handle can pass through the dial lock 1. It is a size that can be done.

  The coiled wire 20 can be attached to the dial lock 1 by passing the ring 22 through the ring 21 passed through the wire attaching portion 110. In this state, the ring 22 is passed through the door handle shown in FIG. 7, and the dial lock 1 is passed through the ring 22, whereby the dial lock 1 and the door handle are connected, Become.

  Thus, by attaching the coiled wire 20 to the dial lock 1, the dial lock 1 can be connected to another fixed object. As a result, the umbrella itself can be connected to a fixed object, and other people can not only use the umbrella to which the dial lock 1 is attached, but cannot take the umbrella away from the connected place.

  That is, by attaching the coiled wire 20 to the dial lock 1, the effect of preventing theft of the umbrella by the dial lock 1 can be improved.

  Note that, by locking the stenosis portion of the locking object such as an umbrella, there is an effect that the locking object cannot be used, for example, the umbrella is not opened as described above. However, there is a possibility that the entire locking object is taken away only by locking. In addition, for example, when locking a long article such as an umbrella, if the band is locked through a non-animal such as a handrail, the band may be twisted by twisting the long article such as an umbrella. .

  Therefore, a method of connecting the lock body to the animal with an object other than the band for fastening the object to be locked, such as the coiled wire 20 shown in FIG. 8, is effective. If the animal has a closed annular portion, the lock can be connected to the animal by using a wire connected to the lock.

  Here, the size of the ring 22 of the coiled wire 20 shown in FIG. 8 is such that the dial lock 1 itself can finally pass therethrough when unlocked and if the article is locked. If it is a size that can not be.

  Of course, the larger the lock object, the more difficult it is to pass through the dial lock 1 including the lock object after connection to a non-animal even if the size of the ring 22 is large. However, the above-mentioned size is optimal for exhibiting the anti-theft effect of the coiled wire 20 for more types of articles. In other words, regardless of the size of the object to be locked, the lock body can be passed through when the band is extended straight from the body when unlocked, but the lock is locked when the band is locked and the band is annular. Since the minimum diameter of the ring 22 becomes large, the size of the ring that cannot be passed through is the optimum size of the ring 22.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the umbrella and the door handle are connected by the dial lock 1 to which the coiled wire 20 is attached.

  In the long umbrella shown in FIG. 9A, the dial lock 1 is attached to the main body portion of the closed umbrella as in the example of attaching the dial lock 1 to the umbrella shown in FIG. As shown in b), it is also possible to connect the folding umbrella to the door handle by attaching the ring 22 side of the coiled wire 20 to the folding umbrella strap and attaching the dial lock 1 to the door handle. .

  Further, as another locking method using the coiled wire 20, there is a method of attaching the ring 22 side of the coiled wire 20 to the middle rod of the umbrella. For example, in a state where the umbrella is opened, the ring 22 side of the coiled wire 20 is attached to a portion between the lower loft of the middle rod of the umbrella and the stone bump, and the coiled wire 20 and the dial lock 1 are placed outside the umbrella. put out. In this state, the umbrella is closed and the dial lock 1 is attached to the door handle.

  When the ring 22 side of the coiled wire 20 is attached to the portion between the lower loft of the middle rod of the umbrella and the stone bump, and the dial lock 1 is attached to a fixed object such as a door handle, the coiled wire 20 is The umbrella locked in this way cannot be taken away because it cannot be removed from either the lower locomotive direction or the stone bump direction. Further, the same effect can be obtained by attaching the ring 22 side of the coiled wire 20 to the handle of the door and attaching the dial lock 1 to a portion between the lower lokuro of the middle rod of the umbrella and the stone bump.

  The above-described locking method using the portion between the lower lokuro of the middle rod of the umbrella and the stone bump is effective when locking an umbrella that does not have a portion whose outer diameter is narrower than the top or bottom or is difficult to find.

  In addition, an auxiliary tool may be used on the closed umbrella to create a bulge that becomes a part for locking. For example, a donut-shaped disk with an outer diameter that is the same as that of an umbrella's ball and a hole that is large enough to accommodate a center rod, with a notch or notch reaching the hole from the outside in the radial direction. And The auxiliary disk is attached to a portion between the lower lokuro of the middle bar of the umbrella and the stone bump so that the middle bar enters the hole of the disk. Thereby, when the umbrella is closed, it is possible to create a knob-like bulge between the lower lokuro and the stone protrusion. That is, it is possible to create a portion where the outer diameter of the cross section perpendicular to the middle rod becomes narrower than the upper and lower sides between the lower roll of the umbrella in the closed state and the bulge-like bulge. The dial lock 1 cannot be removed from the umbrella by attaching the dial lock 1 to the thin portion between the bulge by the auxiliary tool and the lower rocker so as to tighten the umbrella. Also, a plurality of knob-shaped bulges may be created on the umbrella using a plurality of the above-mentioned assisting tools. In addition, an auxiliary tool is an example of the large diameter part formation member of this invention.

  In the locking method using this auxiliary tool, there is almost no bulge in the joint for connecting the main bone and the receiving bone, and when the umbrella is closed, there is a recess for enabling locking from the tip to the stone tip. This is an effective locking method in the case of an umbrella that does not exist, that is, an umbrella that does not have two or more obvious convex portions.

  In FIG. 8, the coiled wire 20 is attached to the wire attaching portion 110 attached to the lock body 100. However, the coiled wire 20 may be attached to the dial lock 1 by another method. For example, a hole for attaching the coiled wire 20 is formed in the lock body 100, and the coiled wire 20 is attached to the hole. Also good.

  Moreover, you may provide the wire mooring part for mooring the coiled wire 20 when the coiled wire 20 is not used.

  FIG. 10 is a view showing an overview of the front face of the dial lock 1 when the lock body 100 is provided with the wire attachment hole 111 and the wire anchoring portion 112.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the coiled wire 20 can be attached by providing the wire attachment hole 111 in the lock body 100, and the coiled wire 20 is not used by providing the wire anchoring portion 112. At this time, the ring 22 of the coiled wire 20 can be moored. The wire anchoring portion 112 is a recess provided in the lock body 100, but may not be a recess as long as the ring 22 can be anchored. For example, a protrusion may be used.

  Further, the material of the coiled wire 20 may be a plastic or rubber material in addition to an elastic metal, and may be linear instead of coiled. That is, what is necessary is just to provide the function which can connect the dial lock 1 and the fixed thing which the coil-shaped wire 20 has.

  Further, the shape of the lock body 100 may be other than the shape shown in FIG. 5, and for example, the shape of the surface of the lock body 100 that contacts the umbrella or the shape of the lock body 100 being curved may be used.

  FIG. 11 is a view showing a modified example of the lock body 100. A lock main body 120 shown in FIG. 11A is an example of a lock main body having a flat surface that contacts the umbrella of the lock main body 100, and the lock main body 130 shown in FIG. It is an example of the lock | rock main body which curved.

  The lock main body 120 and the lock main body 130 have a portion for configuring the dial lock 1 such as the band attachment hole 101 provided in the lock main body 100, and only the shape is different from that of the lock main body 100. The lock body 120 can use the shaft 300 as it is, but the lock body 130 needs to have a curved shaft.

  FIG. 12 is a view showing an overview of the upper surface of the dial lock 1 using the lock body 120 and the lock body 130 described above instead of the lock body 100. 12A shows an overview of the upper surface of the dial lock 1 using the lock body 120, and FIG. 12B shows an overview of the upper surface of the dial lock 1 using the lock body 130. FIG.

  By making the surface in contact with the umbrella flat like the lock body 120, for example, it is not necessary to process the curved surface of the surface in contact with the umbrella, and the lock body 120 can be easily manufactured. Further, by curving the entire lock body like the lock body 130, the band 400 and a shaft-side band groove 312 of the shaft 310 (to be described later) are in contact with each other by a curved surface, and the band 400 is locked when the umbrella is locked. Can be dispersed, that is, the service life of the band 400 can be extended.

  Further, as described below, it is possible to prevent the position of the ring-side band groove, which is a notch portion of the locking dial ring, from being viewed from the outside of the lock body. As a result, the dial lock can be prevented from being illegally unlocked.

  FIG. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a shaft for attaching to the lock body 130. As shown in FIG. 13A, the shaft 310 is curved so as to be inserted into the lock body 130, and has a guide 311 and a shaft-side band groove 312, similar to the shaft 300. Further, like the shaft 300, it becomes a rotation shaft of the locking dial ring 200.

  Thus, the shaft may be curved as shown in FIG. 13A in accordance with the shape of the lock body, and the shaft-side groove may also be curved. Thereby, the locking dial ring can be made invisible through the shaft side groove. The fact that the lock dial ring is not visible through the shaft side groove means that the lock dial ring is notched and the position of the ring side band groove, which is the part for unlocking, is located outside the lock body. It is that you can not peek from.

  Even in the case of a locking device that does not have a shaft, if the band passage formed by a hole through which the band of the lock body passes is similarly curved, the portion for unlocking is similarly viewed. You can prevent seeing. Moreover, the same effect is exhibited by bending instead of bending.

  In short, in the locking device, the passage of the locking member such as a band formed by the shaft or the groove or hole of the lock body is curved or bent through the passage so that the dial ring is not visible. In this case, the effect of preventing the peeping of the part for unlocking the dial ring as described above is exhibited.

  Therefore, even in a locking device in which the locking member has no part or member for preventing peeping such as a wrinkle or an enormous portion, there is a path from the opening opening on the lock outer surface of the locking member hole to the nearest dial ring. By curving or bending to such an extent that it cannot be visually recognized, unauthorized unlocking can be prevented.

  FIG. 13B and FIG. 13C are diagrams showing an example of the structure of a conventional locking device for preventing unauthorized peeping from the outside.

  Both the locking devices in FIGS. 13B and 13C have a structure in which the locking member is locked at a fixed position. Further, both the flange 779a in FIG. 13 (b) and the enormous portion 779b in FIG. 13 (c) can be prevented from looking inside from the insertion port of the locking member. For example, in the locking device shown in FIG. 13C, the enormous portion 779b protects a retainer and a pin for preventing the dial ring from being removed from the locking device so that the locking device cannot be disassembled.

  Here, in the locking device in which the locking member is locked at an arbitrary position like the dial lock of the present embodiment, the peep prevention is fixed to the locking members such as the collar 779a and the enormous portion 779b. It is virtually impossible to have a structure for

  However, as described above, it is possible to prevent peeping from the outside by curving or bending the shaft side groove. Further, the effect of preventing peeping by this structure is naturally exhibited also in a locking device in which the locking member is locked at a predetermined position.

  FIG. 13D and FIG. 13E are diagrams each showing an outline of the structure of the dial lock in which the shaft side groove is curved. FIG. 13 (f) and FIG. 13 (g) are diagrams each showing an outline of the structure of the dial lock in which the shaft side groove is bent.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (d), even if the locking device is such that the band 494a does not penetrate the lock body 131 and is locked at a fixed position, the locking member passage 131a is curved, The part for unlocking the dial ring is not looked into from the outside.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (e), even if the locking device 131 has a band 494a that passes through the lock body 131 and is locked at an arbitrary position, the locking member passage 131c is curved, The part for unlocking is not seen from the outside.

  In addition, as described above, the same effect is exhibited when the locking member passage is bent rather than curved. For example, as shown in FIG. 13 (f), even if the locking member passage 132a does not penetrate the lock body 132 and is locked at a position where the locking member is fixed, Since the member passage is bent, the part for unlocking is not looked out from the outside.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13G, even if the locking member passage 132b penetrates the lock body 132 and the locking member is locked at an arbitrary position, Since the passage 132b is bent, a portion for unlocking the dial ring is not seen from the outside.

  In this way, when the locking member passage is curved or bent, the dial ring can be made invisible through the passage. That is, it is possible to prevent peeping at the site for unlocking the dial ring. Note that the locking member passage is a passage formed by a shaft side groove, a shaft side hole, a main body side groove, or a main body side hole into which a locking member such as a band is inserted.

  That is, even if the shaft does not exist, the locking member passage is bent or bent as shown in FIGS. 13 (d) to 13 (g), so that the locking portion can be viewed from the outside. You can prevent seeing.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19C, when the locking member passes through the lock body twice, it is necessary to widen the width of the locking member passage. In this case, the locking member passage is straight, and when the locking member is locked in a state where it has passed only once instead of passing twice, the portion for unlocking the dial ring can be easily seen from the gap. There is a risk. However, it is possible to prevent the locking portion from being seen by bending or bending the locking member passage as described above.

  This curved shape or bent shape also has the effect of preventing unauthorized unlocking in the locking member passage of the dial lock that locks the locking member on the outer periphery of the dial ring.

  Note that the lock body side band groove 134 of the lock body 130 shown in FIG. 11B is curved in the same manner as the shaft side band groove 312 of the shaft 310. When the dial lock 1 is assembled using the lock body 130 and the shaft 310, the ring-side band groove 202 of the locking dial ring 200 is also curved in the same manner as the shaft-side band groove 312 of the shaft 310. .

In the locking dial ring 200 described with reference to FIG. 6, the axial width of the ring inner member 210 and the axial width of the ring outer member 220 are the same. The inner axial width may be narrower than the axial width of the ring outer member 220.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an overview of a lock dial ring 230 that is a modification of the lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 14A is a left side view of the lock dial ring 230, FIG. 14B is a right side view of the lock dial ring 230, and FIG. 14C is a lock dial ring 230. FIG. 14D is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D of the locking dial ring 230.

  As shown in FIG. 14C, W1 which is the axial width of the inner ring member 210 in the radial direction and W2 which is the width of the outer ring member 220 have a relationship of W1 <W2.

  By doing so, when the dial lock 1 is assembled using the lock dial ring 230, the ring-side band groove 202 becomes difficult to see from the lateral gap of the lock dial ring 230.

  As described above, the number assigned to the number display portion 203 on the outer side in the radial direction of the ring-side band groove 202 is a number for unlocking, and thus making the ring-side band groove 202 difficult to see from the outside, This prevents the unlocking number of the dial lock 1 from leaking to others.

  The locking dial ring 200 and the locking dial ring 230 can be separated into the ring inner member 210 and the ring outer member 220 as described above, but may be integrated. The advantage of being separable into the ring inner member 210 and the ring outer member 220 is that the user can determine the number for unlocking and make a lock dial ring of that number.

  However, even if it is an integrated type, for example, a lock dial ring in which 10 numbers from 0 to 9 become numbers for unlocking, that is, 10 types of integrated lock dial rings are supplied to the user. For example, the user can produce the dial lock 1 in which the number selected by the user becomes the unlocking number by obtaining the integral lock dial ring of the necessary number.

  Further, the deformation notch 204 of the inner ring member 210 shown in FIG. 6 is a portion that is cut by about half the thickness of the inner ring member 210. However, the depth of the notch of the inner ring member 210 is as follows. The inner ring member 210 may be incorporated into the outer ring member 220 in consideration of the elasticity, strength, etc. of the inner ring member 210 and the outer ring member 220. Should be deep enough not to come off. Further, the ring inner member 210 has ten deformation notches 204. However, if the ring inner member 210 is deformed and can be inserted into the ring outer member 220, the number of deformation notches 204 is other than ten. It doesn't matter.

  In addition, although the inner fitting portion 205 and the outer fitting portion 206 are both ten, the number may be other than ten as long as they are compatible with each other. For example, the inner fitting portion 205 and the outer fitting portion 206 can be manufactured even if there are five or twenty inner fitting portions 205, and the inner fitting portion 205 has five outer fitting portions 206 for five pieces. It doesn't matter. That is, if the number of convex inner fitting parts 205 is smaller than the number of outer fitting parts 206, the production is possible.

  Further, the locking dial ring 200 locks the band main body of the band 400 by the convex portion 401 of the band 400 coming into contact with the side surface thereof. However, other than the side surface, the 400 band bodies may be locked.

  FIG. 15 is a view showing an overview of a lock dial ring 250 which is an example of a type in which the band main body is locked on the inner surface of the lock dial ring. 15A is a side view of the locking dial ring 250, FIG. 15B is an EE cross-sectional view of the locking dial ring 250, and FIG. 15C is a locking dial ring. It is FF sectional drawing of 250. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the locking dial ring 250 has a ring-side shaft hole 251 and a ring-side band groove 252 as in the case of the locking dial ring 200, and like the locking dial ring 200, The dial lock 1 can be incorporated into the dial lock 1 and used as a component.

  The lock dial ring 250 may be a double structure type similar to the lock dial ring 200 or the lock dial ring 230, or may be an integral type. Whether it is a double structure type or an integral type, it does not affect the function of locking the band body of the locking dial ring 250.

  As shown in FIGS. 15B and 15C, the locking dial ring 250 has a ring-side engagement portion 253 having a saw blade shape on the shaft-side surface, and the ring-side engagement portion 253. It is possible to lock the band main body having the engaging portion corresponding to.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an overview of a band 410 which is an example of a band having a band main body corresponding to the ring-side engagement portion 253. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, the band 410 includes a band side engaging portion 411 and a stopper 413. As in the case of the band 400, a portion excluding the band stopper described below is referred to as a band body.

  The band side engaging portion 411 is an uneven portion having the same shape as the ring side engaging portion 253 of the locking dial ring 250. When the dial lock 1 is assembled using the locking dial ring 250 and the band 410, the band side engaging portion 411 engages with the ring side engaging portion 253 of the locking dial ring 250, so that the band body Is locked.

  Similarly to the relationship between the lock dial ring 200 and the band 400, when the ring side band grooves 252 of all the lock dial rings 250 are directly above the band body of the band 410, the ring side engagement is performed. Since the portion 253 does not exist, the band main body can be inserted and removed from the lock main body.

  As described above, when the umbrella is locked by the dial lock 1 by locking the band main body by the engagement of the ring side engaging portion 253 and the band side engaging portion 411, the band 400 and the locking dial ring 200 The length of the band of the portion that locks the umbrella can be adjusted more finely than when using.

  Further, the band side engaging portion 411 has an effect of making it difficult to remove the dial lock 1 upward by biting into the umbrella cloth or the like when the dial lock 1 using the band 410 is attached to the umbrella.

  The band used for the dial lock 1 may have a shape other than the band 400 and the band 410 described above, and may be any shape as long as the band main body is locked by the lock dial ring 200 or the lock dial ring 250.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a band corresponding to the lock dial ring 200 or the lock dial ring 250. The band shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C is a band corresponding to the lock dial ring 200, and is a modified example of the band 400 described above. The band shown in FIG. 17D is a band corresponding to the lock dial ring 250 and is a modification of the band 410 described above.

  A band 420 shown in FIG. 17A has a convex portion 421 similar to that of the above-described band 400 on the upper side of the band main body, and further has a saw blade-shaped anti-slip portion 422 on the bottom side. The anti-slip portion 422 has an effect of preventing the dial lock 1 from coming down downward by biting into the umbrella cloth or the like when the dial lock 1 is attached to the umbrella.

  A band 430 shown in FIG. 17B has a convex portion 431 on the upper side of the band main body in the same manner as the band 400 described above, but the shape is different from the convex portion 401 of the band 400 and between adjacent convex portions 431. Is composed of curves. By doing so, the band main body is difficult to tear from the base portion of the convex portion 431.

  The band 440 shown in FIG. 17C has a convex portion 441 having the same shape as the band 430 shown in FIG. 17B on the upper side of the band main body, and the band main body is difficult to tear from the base portion of the convex portion 441. . Furthermore, although the anti-slip part 442 is provided on the bottom side of the band body, the anti-slip part 442 of the band 440 is different in shape from the anti-slip part 422 of the band 420, and the apex of the adjacent protrusions is configured by a curve. ing. By doing so, the band main body is difficult to tear from the base portion of the anti-slip portion 442. Further, as described above, when the dial lock 1 is attached to the umbrella, the anti-slip portion 442 bites into the umbrella cloth or the like, so that the dial lock 1 is difficult to come down downward.

  A band 450 shown in FIG. 17D has a band-side engaging portion 441 on the upper side of the band main body, similarly to the band 410 for the lock dial ring 250 shown in FIG. However, the band-side engagement portion 451 of the band 450 is different in shape from the band-side engagement portion 411 of the band 410, and the vertices of adjacent protrusions of the band-side engagement portion 451 are configured by curves. By doing so, the band main body is difficult to tear from the base portion of the side engaging portion 451.

  Note that these shapes may be combined. For example, the band 450 may have the anti-slip portion 442 included in the band 440 on the bottom side of the band main body.

  In addition, the band 400 and the like described above are made of a material such as plastic having flexibility for locking the umbrella with the dial lock 1, but the material constituting the band is not limited to plastic, for example, A metal band may be used.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a band 460 that is an example of a metal band that can be used for the dial lock 1. As shown in FIG. 18A, the band 460 has a shape in which a plurality of steel plates are connected like a wristwatch belt, and has a convex portion 461 like the band 400. Further, as shown in FIG. 18B, adjacent steel plates are shaped to be bendable with pins 462.

  The band 460 is metallic, but the steel plates joined by the pins 462 have a degree of freedom in the circumferential direction around the pins 462 and are sufficient to wrap an umbrella as shown in FIG. 18 (b). Have flexibility.

  A band 460 shown in FIG. 18 has a convex portion 461 and is a band corresponding to the locking dial ring 200, but includes a band side engaging portion 411 included in the band 410 instead of the convex portion 461. Thus, it can correspond to the lock dial ring 250.

  By using a strong material such as metal like the band 460 for the band, for example, it is possible to prevent the band portion from being destroyed for the purpose of theft of an umbrella. In addition, the service life of the band can be extended.

  Also, the shape shown in FIG. 18 can be applied to other materials such as ceramics. Further, when a metal is used as the material of the band like the band 460, a non-ferrous metal that is not easily corroded, a metal having a non-metallic coating on the surface, or the like may be used. By doing so, the service life of the band is further extended, and rust or the like does not adhere to the locked umbrella.

  Further, the unit to be bendable may be made finer.

  FIG. 18C is a view showing an example of a locking member in which a plurality of plate-like members are connected so as to be bent in a band shape. In the band 459 shown in FIG. 18C, the member 459a and the member 459b are joined together by a pin 462 so as to be bent. By reducing the length of the band in the longitudinal direction of the members that can be bent by the pins 462, such as the member 459a and the member 459b, for example, the degree of adhesion to the object to be locked at the time of locking is improved. be able to.

  Furthermore, the concavo-convex portion locked to the locking dial ring can be bent or bent more flexibly as the entire concavo-convex portion than the band 460 shown in FIG. Therefore, it can also be used in a locking device in which the locking member passage is curved or bent as shown in FIGS. As a result, it is possible to use a stronger locking member such as a metal even in a locking device that can prevent peeping at a site for unlocking from the outside.

  Further, in the above-described dial lock 1, the band 400 is configured such that the stopper 403 of the band 400 is locked to the band mounting hole 101 of the lock body 100 and the band head is locked to the lock body 100 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2. The band body is locked with the lock dial ring 200. The same applies to the components constituting the dial lock 1 other than the components shown in FIG. 1, for example, the lock main body 130, the lock dial ring 250, the shaft 310, and the band 410.

  However, the usage of the band is not limited to the usage described above. For example, the usage may be such that the band main body passes through the lock main body twice.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of how to use a band in which the band body passes twice in the lock body 120 as an example of how to use the band in which the band body passes twice in the dial ring. In addition, it is assumed that the lock dial ring 200 and the shaft 300 are used as parts constituting the dial lock 1. FIGS. 19A and 19B are diagrams illustrating an example using the band 400, and FIG. 19C is a diagram illustrating an example using the band 470 illustrated in FIG. In addition, all figures are figures which show the external view at the time of seeing the state which locked the umbrella with the dial lock 1 from the upper surface.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19A, the band head is inserted into the lock body 120 from the left side, and the band head coming out from the right side of the lock body 120 is inserted again from the left side of the lock body 120. Further, the band head coming out from the right side of the lock body 120 is pulled in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 19A, and the lock dial ring 200 is rotated and locked while appropriately tightening the umbrella.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the band head is inserted into the lock body 120 from the left side, and the band head coming out from the right side of the lock body 120 is inserted again from the right side of the lock body 120. Further, the band head coming out from the left side of the lock body 120 is pulled in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 19B, and the lock dial ring 200 is rotated and locked while appropriately tightening the umbrella.

  Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, the band 400 is used without being locked to the band mounting hole, but the stopper 403 enters the lock body 120. The band 400 cannot be pulled out even if the band head is pulled.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19C, the band 470 shown in FIG. 20 is used. As shown in FIG. 20, the band 470 has a shape in which the stopper 403 is eliminated from the band 400 and both ends are band heads, that is, a double-headed shape. Further, like the band 400, it has a convex portion.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19 (c), both ends of the band 470 are inserted from the left side of the lock body 120, and both ends coming out from the right side of the lock body 120 are pulled in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 19 (c). The lock dial ring 200 is rotated and locked.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19C, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B, both ends of the band are pulled when finally locking. A band 470 shown in FIG. 20 has a double-headed shape in which both ends are band heads applied to the band 400, but this double-headed shape is not limited to the band 400 and can be applied to other bands. Moreover, in each example shown in FIG. 19, the insertion direction of the band 400 is an example, and it can be locked even if left and right are reversed.

  Thus, by providing variations in the usage of the band, for example, the dial lock 1 can be used in the usage of the band that suits the user's preference of the dial lock 1. Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 19, the lock body 120 does not need to be provided with a band attachment hole, and the cost for manufacturing the lock body 120 can be reduced.

  In addition, for example, when the band 400 can be further passed through the lock body 120 due to the relationship between the thickness of the band 400 and the width of the shaft side band groove of the shaft 300 in the axial direction and the vertical direction, a plurality of bands are provided. It is also possible to use it.

  For example, one band 400 is passed through the lock body 120 by the method shown in FIG. 1, and the other band 400 is used for the same lock body 120 by the method shown in FIG. In this way, for example, the umbrella can be tightened with one band 400, and the other band 400 can be tightened through a fixed object such as a handrail. That is, the same antitheft effect as that of connecting the umbrella and the fixed object using the coiled wire 20 described above is produced.

  In each of the various bands described above, the band main body is locked by locking the convex portion 401 and the like of the band main body. However, the band itself may have a function of locking the band body, and the dial lock 1 may be used by using the band according to the function.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a band 480 which is an example of a band having a function of locking the band body itself and a usage method.

  FIG. 21A is a diagram showing an overview of the band 480. The band 480 has a convex portion 485 similar to that of the band 400, and further includes a retaining hole 481 and a stopper 483 with a passage hole. Further, the stopper 483 with a passage hole has a passage hole 482 and a retaining plate 484. As shown in FIG. 21A, a plurality of retaining holes 481 are arranged in the band body.

  FIG. 21B is a bottom view of the band 480. The dotted lines in the figure indicate the presence of the retaining hole 481, the passage hole 482, and the retaining plate 484.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the passage hole 482 can pass the band main body, and the clasp plate 484 can be inserted into the clasp hole 481.

  FIG. 21 (d) is an overview diagram showing a method of using the band 480 for the dial lock 1. When the band 480 is used for the dial lock 1, as shown in FIG. 21 (d), a concave portion is formed on the right side of the lock body so that the end of the clasp 484 enters the lock body. For example, in the lock body 100, the right side portion of the lock body where the lock body side shaft hole 102d exists is extended to such an extent that the recess can be formed, and then the recess is formed. Hereinafter, the lock body 100 in which the recess is formed is referred to as a lock body 10. Further, it is assumed that the lock body 10 incorporates three lock dial rings 200 on the shaft 300.

  The shaft 300 is fixed to the lock body 10 by the frictional force between the shaft head and the lock body side shaft hole 102d of the lock body 10.

  FIG. 21E is an overview diagram showing a state where the band 480 is locked to the lock body 10. From the state shown in FIG. 21 (d), the band 480 is shaped as shown in FIG. 21 (c), the band 480 is properly pushed into the lock body 10, and the locking dial ring is rotated, so that the convex portion 485 of the band 480 is formed. Locked.

  When the band 400 is used for the dial lock 1, the band body of the band 400 is locked to the lock body 100 by being locked by the locking dial ring 200. That is, the length of the band body necessary to properly tighten the umbrella is determined by the dial ring lock position.

  However, in the band 480, the length of the band body necessary for properly fastening the umbrella is determined by the position of the band body retaining hole 481 into which the retaining plate 484 of the band 480 is inserted. Furthermore, since the convex portion 485 of the band 480 is locked inside the lock body 10, the entire band 480 cannot be moved to the right with respect to the dial lock 1.

  That is, since the tip of the retaining plate 484 cannot be taken out from the lock body 10, the retaining plate 484 cannot be removed from the retaining hole 481. In this way, the umbrella can be locked by the dial lock 1 using the band 480.

  Further, the band itself having a function of locking the band main body may have another shape.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a band 490 which is another example of a band having a function of locking the band body itself and a method of using the same.

  FIG. 22A is a diagram showing an overview of the band 490. The band 490 includes a convex portion 495 similar to the band 400, a protrusion 491, and a stopper 493 with a passage hole, and the stopper 493 with a passage hole has a passage hole 492. As shown in FIG. 22A, a plurality of protrusions 491 exist on the band body.

  FIG. 22B is a bottom view of the band 490. The dotted line in the figure indicates the presence of the passage hole 492. The passage hole 492 can pass through the band body as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 22D is an overview diagram showing a state in which the band 490 is locked to the lock body 10. The band 490 is inserted into the lock body 10 from the right, the band 490 is brought into the state shown in FIG. 22C, the band 490 is appropriately pushed into the lock body 10, and the locking dial ring is rotated to thereby project the convex portion 495 of the band 490. Is locked.

  As shown in FIG. 22D, in the locked state, the protrusion 491 hits the right side of the passage hole 492, and the band body cannot be pulled out. Similarly to the band 480, the convex part 495 of the band 490 is locked inside the lock body 10, so that the entire band 490 cannot be moved to the right with respect to the dial lock 1.

  In this way, the umbrella can be locked by the dial lock 1 using the band 490.

  As described above, when locking the band, the band 480 and the band 490 do not lock the band while pulling it, but appropriately push the stopper with pass hole 483 or the stopper with pass hole 493 into the lock body 10, Will lock in place. That is, another locking procedure for the dial lock 1 can be provided to the user.

  Moreover, the band 480 may be separable into the part which has the retaining hole 481 of a band main body, and a part other than that.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a band in which the band 480 can be separated into a part having a retaining hole 481 of the band main body and a part other than the part.

  A band 500 shown in FIG. 23A includes a band main body 501 and a band tail 503. The band main body portion 501 has a retaining hole 502. The band tail portion 503 has a convex portion 508, a main body fixing plate 507, and a stopper with passage hole 505, and the stopper with passage hole 505 has a passage hole 504 and a retaining plate 506.

  The band 500 has the same appearance as the band 480 shown in FIG. 21, and has the same function. That is, the umbrella can be locked by the dial lock 1 using the band 500.

  FIG.23 (b) is GG sectional drawing of the band 500 shown to Fig.23 (a). As shown in FIG. 23B, the main body fixing plate 507 of the band tail portion 503 has a plurality of sharp protrusions on the surface in contact with the band main body portion 501, and further, the surface facing the main body fixing plate 507 of the band tail portion 503. In addition, a plurality of sharp protrusions are provided on the surface in contact with the band main body 501. That is, the band main body portion 501 is fixed to the band tail portion 503 by being sandwiched between a plurality of sharp protrusions from above and below.

  As shown in FIG. 23C, the main body fixing plate 507 is attached to the side opposite to the convex portion 508 of the band tail portion 503 so as to be opened and closed by a predetermined means. That is, the band main body 501 and the band tail 503 can be separated by the user.

  By doing so, for example, when the band main body 501 is damaged, only the band main body 501 can be replaced. Further, the band tail 503 is a portion that is not wound around the umbrella, and flexibility is not required. That is, it can be made of a material having strength and durability such as metal.

  Note that the band 490 illustrated in FIG. 22 can also be formed into a shape that can be separated into a band main body portion and a band tail portion, similarly to the band 500.

  The band tail 503 can use a band other than the band main body 501.

  FIG. 24 is a conceptual diagram showing a method of locking using the band tail portion 503 and a band other than the band main body portion 501 for the lock main body 10.

  A band 510 shown in FIG. 24A has a rosary shape and includes a string and a plurality of spheres.

  FIG. 24B is a conceptual diagram showing a case where the band tail 503 and the band 510 are used for the lock body 10. The shaft 300 and the lock dial ring 200 are incorporated in the same manner as the lock body 10 shown in FIG. 21, and the band tail 503 can be locked to the lock body 10.

  The band tail 503 has a passage hole 504 in the stopper 505 with passage hole as shown in FIG. 23A, and FIG. 24B shows a band in which both ends of the band 510 are passed through the passage hole 504. A state where the tail portion 503 is locked to the lock body 10 is shown. In a state where the band tail portion 503 is locked, the sphere of the band 510 cannot pass through the passage hole 504.

  Further, only one end of the band 510 can be used through the passage hole 504.

  FIG. 24C is a conceptual diagram showing a state in which only one end of the band 510 is passed through the passage hole 504 of the stopper 505 with passage hole, and the band tail portion 503 is locked.

  In this case, the lock body 10 may be provided with a circular band attachment hole 106 that allows the sphere of the band 510 to pass through, as shown in the schematic view of the rear surface of the lock body 10 shown in FIG. When the band 510 is inserted from the band attachment hole 106, the terminal end is tied, so that the band 510 does not fall out of the lock body 10 even in the state shown in FIG.

  As described above, the umbrella is fastened with the band 510 by the method shown in the conceptual diagrams of FIGS. 24B and 24C, that is, the umbrella is locked by the dial lock 1 using the band tail 503 and the band 510. Can be locked. Of course, it is also possible to lock the umbrella by the locking method shown in FIG. 24 (b) using a band having the same shape as the band main body 501 in FIG. For example, if the band attachment hole 106 of the lock body 10 is formed in the same shape as the band attachment hole 101 of the lock body 100, the lock is performed as shown in FIG. be able to.

  Note that the user can produce a band having the same function as the band 510. For example, a band having a function similar to that of the band 510 can be manufactured by creating a knot by knotting at regular intervals on the string.

  Further, the band for applying the locking method shown in the conceptual diagram of FIG. 24C to both the band tail 503 and the band tail having the shape of the stopper 493 with the passage hole of the band 490 shown in FIG. Can also be produced.

  FIG. 25 is a conceptual diagram showing that a band made of one string can correspond to both the stopper 505 with a passage hole of the band tail 503 and the stopper 493 with a passage hole of the band 490.

  As shown in FIG. 25, two band attachment holes 106 are provided in the lock body 10, and both ends of the string are inserted from the two band attachment holes 106. Then, both ends of the string coming out of the lock body 10 are tied together at a constant interval, and a band 520 having a shape in which a knob and a ring formed by two strings are repeated is produced.

  In this way, in the case of the stopper 493 with a passage hole, the band 520 can be locked by the bump of the band 520, and in the case of the stopper 505 with the passage hole, the band 520 can be not only by the band 520 but also by a ring. Can be locked. That is, as described above, the locking method shown in the conceptual diagram of FIG. 24 (c) is shown in FIG. In addition, a band to be applied to both the band tail portion having the shape of the stopper 493 with the passage hole of the band 490 can be manufactured. The band 520 only ties the string at regular intervals and is easy for the user to make.

  In addition, when using the band tail part 503 for the locking method shown in FIG. 24, the site | part for couple | bonding with the band main-body parts 501, such as the main body fixing plate 507 shown in FIG.23 (c), is unnecessary. In addition, the band tail portion 503 has a shape extending in the direction opposite to the direction in which the passage hole 504 exists, and the band tail portion 503 is inserted into the lock body 10, and the tip of the band tail portion 503 on the side where the passage hole 504 does not exist. The band tail portion 503 may be prevented from falling off from the lock body 10 even when unlocked by bending the portion or attaching a metal ring to the tip portion on the side where the passage hole 504 does not exist.

  Further, the band body portion 501 is passed through the passage hole 504 of the band tail portion 503, the retaining plate 506 is inserted into the retaining hole 502, the band tail portion 503 is pushed into the lock body 10, and the lock dial ring is rotated to lock. However, the band head does not pass through the band tail, but the band main body has a plurality of through holes that are holes for passing the locking portions present in the band head, and the band head through the through holes of the band main body. The locking portion may be locked by pushing the locking portion present in the lock body into the lock body and rotating the locking dial ring.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an outline of the band 530 having a plurality of holes into which the locking portions are inserted into the band body portion and the dial lock 1 for using the band 530.

  FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an overview of the lock main body 140 and the like for using the band 530. The shaft 320 corresponding to the band 530 and the lock main body 140 having a cylindrical shape as a whole are used. Yes.

  The shaft 320 is a shaft for using the band 530 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 26 (c), the cross section of the locking portion 532 existing on the band head of the band 530 is circular except for the convex portion 531, and therefore the shaft on the side into which the locking portion 532 is inserted. 320 is also provided with a circular hole and a groove (cylindrical groove) through which the convex portion 531 passes, and the locking portion 532 can be inserted.

  The shape of the lock body 140 shown in FIG. 26A is a cylindrical shape, but is a shape as one of the variations of the shape of the lock body, and instead of the lock body 140, the lock body 100, the lock body 120, etc. May be used.

  As shown in FIG. 26B, the band main body of the band 530 has a plurality of through holes 531 a that are holes through which the locking portions 532 are passed. Similarly to the bands 480 and 490 described above, the band 530 is a band that locks the band main body, and after the locking portion 532 is passed through one of the through holes 531a, that is, the band main body is the band. After being locked to 530 itself, it is inserted into the shaft 320 shown in FIG. 26A, and the locking portion 532 is locked to the lock body 140 in the form shown in FIG.

  That is, the locking portion 532 is inserted into one of the through-holes 531a so that the band main body is properly tightened with the umbrella, and then inserted into the lock main body 140 and locked in the lock main body 140. Thus, the locking portion 532 does not come out of the through hole 531a, and the umbrella can be locked.

  Further, the band main body of the band 530 may be modified by providing a slip prevention portion similar to that of the band 420. FIGS. 27A (a) and 27A (b) are diagrams showing modifications of the band 530. is there.

  A band 540 shown in FIG. 27A (a) is a band having anti-slip portions similar to the band 420 on the upper and lower sides of the band body of the band 530. Since the saw blade-like projections that are the anti-slip portions bite into the umbrella cloth or the like, the dial lock 1 using the band 530 has an effect of making it difficult to remove the dial lock 1 from the umbrella in the vertical direction.

  A band 550 shown in FIG. 27A (b) is a band having a through hole 551 in which a right angle portion of the through hole 531a of the band 530 is rounded. By doing so, the band body of the band 550 is difficult to tear from the through hole 551.

  Further, even in a dial lock in which one end of the locking member is locked to the dial lock body, the locking portion locked to the dial ring of the locking member uses a locking member structure that penetrates the locking member itself. Thus, the object to be locked can be tightened and locked to the closed annular portion of the inanimate body.

  The band 560 shown in FIG. 27A (c) and the band 570 shown in FIG. 27A (d) are large in size so that the locking member cannot pass through the mounting hole or the mounting groove of the lock body, similarly to the band 400 shown in FIG. Has a tail. Each of the band 560 and the band 570 is a locking member having one end detachably attached to the dial lock body, and a locking portion locked to the dial ring of the locking member penetrates the locking member itself. It is a stop member. Further, the band 560 and the band 570 are examples showing different shapes of the locking members.

  Using the band shown in FIGS. 27A (c) and 27A (d) and, for example, the lock body shown in FIG. 1 or 12, the locking portion locked by the dial ring of the locking member can be penetrated. It is possible to produce a dial lock having a large number of holes in the locking member itself.

  A band 560 shown in FIG. 27A (c) includes a stopper 563 that can be attached to and detached from the band mounting hole or the band mounting groove of the lock body. Further, a locking portion 562 locked by a dial ring of the dial lock at a specific fixed position of the locking portion, a convex portion 561 formed in the locking portion 562, and a plurality of through holes 561a through which the locking portion 562 passes. Have.

  A locking procedure using a dial lock body having a band attachment hole or a band attachment groove to which the band 560 can be attached will be described. First, the band 560 is attached to the band attaching hole or the band attaching groove of the dial lock body, and the band 560 is wound around the narrowed portion of the object to be locked, and the locking portion 562 is passed through the through hole 561a at the optimum position. . Further, the locking portion 562 is inserted into the dial lock body, and the dial ring is turned to lock. Before inserting the locking portion 562 into the dial lock body, the dial lock body is passed through the closed annular portion of the inanimate body, and then the locking portion 562 is inserted into the dial lock body and the dial ring is turned to lock. It is also possible to lock the object on the closed annular part of the inanimate body.

  A band 570 shown in FIG. 27A (d) includes a stopper 573 that can be attached to and detached from a band mounting hole or a band mounting groove of the lock body, and a locking portion 572 that is locked by a dial ring of the dial lock at an arbitrary position of the locking portion. And a plurality of projections 571 formed in the locking portion 572 and a plurality of through holes 571a through which the locking portion 572 passes.

  A locking procedure using a dial lock body having a band attachment hole or a band attachment groove to which the band 570 can be attached will be described. First, the band 570 is attached to the band attachment hole or the band attachment groove of the dial lock body, and the band 570 is wound around the narrowed portion of the object to be locked, and the locking portion 572 is passed through the through hole 571a at the optimum position. . Further, the locking portion 572 is inserted into the dial lock body, the locking portion 572 that has come out of the lock body through the lock body is pulled out from the lock body, and then the locking object is tightened, and then the dial ring is turned. Lock it. In this way, locking after further tightening than when the band 560 is used becomes possible.

  Before inserting the locking portion 572 into the dial lock body, pass the dial lock body through the closed ring portion of the inanimate body, and then insert the locking portion 572 into the dial lock body and turn the dial ring to lock it. It is also possible to lock the object on the closed annular part of the inanimate body.

  Of course, a non-removable lock having the same structure as the band 560 and the band 570 can be produced except that there is no stopper, the locking member is fixed to the lock body, and there is no stopper. However, in that case, if the locking member is damaged, the lock itself becomes unusable, so that the locking member can be detached from the lock body and exchangeable, such as the band 560 and the band 570. It is thought that the dial lock using is superior in terms of maintenance costs.

  The structural features of the bands 560 and 570 described above can also be applied to the dial locks shown in FIGS. 63, 67, 68, 69, 70, and 78 described later.

  Further, the band 570 can be attached to the constricted portion of the object to be locked without attaching the stopper 573 to the band mounting hole or band mounting groove of the dial lock body having the band mounting hole or band mounting groove to which the stopper 573 of the band 570 can be mounted. The locking portion 572 is passed through the through-hole 571a at the optimum position so as to be wound, and then inserted into the dial lock body, and the locking portion 572 that has come out of the lock body through the lock body is inserted into the lock body. It is possible to lock the locking object by pulling it out from the dial and then turn the dial ring to lock it. In this case, it is necessary to lock the non-animal closed annular portion together with the object to be locked, which is difficult, but it is possible not to open the umbrella. For this reason, the band 570 can be used without a stopper portion. When the band 570 without the stopper portion is used, the dial lock body does not need a band attachment hole or a band attachment groove.

  FIG. 27A (e) is a diagram illustrating an example of a band having no stopper that is a band tail and having a plurality of through holes. A band 574 shown in FIG. 27A (e) includes a first end portion in which a plurality of through holes 575a are arranged in the longitudinal direction and a second end portion in which a plurality of convex portions 575 are arranged in the longitudinal direction.

  The through hole 575a has a size that allows the second end portion having the convex portion 575 to pass therethrough. Further, since the first end portion does not need to penetrate the lock body, the width perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the first end portion, that is, the width of the first end portion in the vertical direction in FIG. Can be enlarged regardless of the size.

  In addition, although the band 570 illustrated in FIG. 27A (d) has a plurality of through holes 571a, the number of through holes may be one.

  FIG. 27A (f) is a diagram illustrating an example of a band having only one through hole. A band 576 shown in FIG. 27A (f) includes a first end where a stopper 578 and one through hole 577a are present, and a second end where a plurality of convex portions 577 are arranged in the longitudinal direction.

  The through hole 577a has a size that allows the second end portion having the convex portion 577 to pass therethrough. Further, the lock body is locked by a stopper 578.

  Further, the band 574 shown in FIG. 27A (e) has a plurality of through-holes 575a. However, even a band without a stopper may have one through-hole.

  FIG. 27A (g) is a diagram showing an example of a band having no stopper and only one through hole. A band 579 shown in FIG. 27A (g) includes a first end where one through-hole 580a exists and a second end where a plurality of convex portions 580 are arranged in the longitudinal direction.

  The through hole 580a has a size that allows the second end portion having the convex portion 580 to pass therethrough. Further, like the band 574, the first end portion does not need to penetrate the lock body, and therefore the width perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the first end portion can be increased regardless of the size of the lock body.

  In this way, a plurality of types of bands can be used with the dial lock by combining the number of through holes and the presence or absence of a stopper that is a band tail, and specific locking modes are shown in FIGS. 27B (a) to 27B (d). It explains using.

  FIG. 27B (a) is a diagram showing an example of a locking configuration using the band 570 shown in FIG. 27A (d) or the band 576 shown in FIG. 27A (f).

  The locking form shown in FIG. 27B (a) shows a locking form when the umbrella is locked and the locked umbrella and the article in the region indicated by the dotted line are connected.

  For example, when the band 570 is used, (1) an annular region formed only by the band 570 by penetrating the second end portion having the convex portion 571 of the band 570 locked to the lock body into one through hole 571a. Form. (2) In a positional relationship where, for example, a part of a handrail exists in an area between the band 570 and the lock body, for example, a dotted circle in FIG. To penetrate. (3) For example, an umbrella is arranged in an annular region formed only by the band 570. (4) The umbrella is fastened with the band 570 by pulling the second end portion in the same direction as the direction in which the band 570 penetrates the shaft member. (5) The rotational positions of the plurality of locking dial rings are set so that the band 570 cannot be inserted and removed from the shaft. That is, the locked position is set.

  According to the procedures (1) to (5), the umbrella can be locked, and the locked umbrella and the handrail that is an inanimate can be connected.

  FIG. 27B (b) is a diagram showing an example of a locking configuration using the band 574 shown in FIG. 27A (e).

  The locking form shown in FIG. 27B (b) shows a locking form in the case where the umbrella is locked and the locked umbrella and the article in the region indicated by the dotted line are connected.

  When using the band 574, (1) by passing the second end of the band 574 through one through hole 575a, for example, by winding a part of the handrail in the dotted circle, with the band 574. An annular region of only the band 574 where a part of the handrail exists is formed. (2) Another annular region is formed by penetrating the second end portion through another through hole 575a in the direction opposite to the direction penetrating in the procedure (1). (3) The second end is passed through the shaft of the lock body. (4) An umbrella is arranged in the annular region formed in the procedure (2). (5) The umbrella is tightened with the band 574 by pulling the second end portion in the same direction as the direction in which the band 574 passes through the shaft. (6) The rotational positions of the plurality of locking dial rings are set so that the band 574 cannot be inserted and removed from the shaft. That is, the locked position is set.

  According to the procedures (1) to (6), the umbrella can be locked, and the locked umbrella and the handrail which is an inanimate can be connected. In addition, the same locking form can be taken by the above procedure using, for example, the band 570 shown in FIG. 27A (d) instead of the band 574. In this case, the stopper 573 of the band 574 is not used.

  FIG. 27B (c) is a diagram showing an example of a locking configuration when the umbrella is locked using the band 574 shown in FIG. 27A (e) or the band 579 shown in FIG. 27A (g).

  For example, in the case where the band 574 is used, (1) an annular region including only the band 574 is formed by penetrating the second end of the band 574 through one through hole 575a. (2) The second end is passed through the shaft of the lock body. (3) An umbrella is arranged in the annular region formed in the procedure (1). (4) The umbrella is tightened with the band 574 by pulling the second end portion in the same direction as the direction in which the band 574 passes through the shaft. (5) The rotational positions of the plurality of locking dial rings are set so that the band 574 cannot be inserted into and removed from the shaft. That is, the locked position is set.

  The umbrella can be locked by the procedures (1) to (5) above. Note that the same locking form can be obtained by the above procedure using, for example, the band 570 shown in FIG. 27A (d) or the band 576 shown in FIG. 27A (f) instead of the band 574 or the band 579. In this case, the stopper of each band is not used.

  FIG. 27B (d) is a diagram showing an example of a locking configuration using the band 574 shown in FIG. 27A (e) or the band 579 shown in FIG. 27A (g).

  The locking form shown in FIG. 27B (d) shows the locking form when the umbrella is locked and connected to the article in the area indicated by the dotted line. Moreover, this locking form is realizable in the substantially same procedure as the procedure demonstrated using FIG. 27B (b). The difference in the procedure is that the second end is not penetrated into the other through hole 575a in the procedure (2), but the same penetration as the through hole 575a in which the second end of the band is penetrated in the procedure (1). This is the part that penetrates the hole 575a.

  According to the above procedure, the umbrella can be locked, and the locked umbrella and the handrail that is a non-animal can be connected. Note that the same locking form can be obtained by the above procedure using, for example, the band 570 shown in FIG. 27A (d) or the band 576 shown in FIG. 27A (f) instead of the band 574 or the band 579. In this case, the stopper of each band is not used.

  27B (a) to 27B (d) described above use the bands shown in FIGS. 27A (d) to 27A (g), and these bands all have their second ends. It has a through hole that can penetrate the part. In the locking configuration shown in FIGS. 27B (a) to 27B (d), one or two closed regions can be formed by passing the second end of the band through the through hole. Therefore, when the band is locked, one or more articles can be locked while strongly tightening simultaneously by strongly pulling and locking the second end that penetrates the shaft and comes out of the lock body. . This is very significant for improving the crime prevention effect.

  In addition, it is natural that a plurality of articles can be arranged in one closed region and locked according to the size and shape of the article to be locked.

  Moreover, in the locking form shown to FIG. 27B (a), FIG. 27B (b), and FIG. 27B (d), although the umbrella and the handrail were connected, you may lock two things simultaneously. For example, one umbrella may be arranged in each of two closed regions formed by only the band or the band and the lock body, and the two umbrellas may be locked simultaneously. As described above, since the two umbrellas can be strongly tightened at the same time due to the effect of the through-hole passing through the second end portion of the band, the two umbrellas can be locked simultaneously.

  In addition, the procedure for implement | achieving the locking form shown to FIG. 27B (a)-FIG. 27B (d) may not be according to said order respectively. For example, the locking configuration shown in FIG. 27B (a) can also be realized by (3) placing an umbrella and (2) penetrating the second end of the band 570 through the shaft of the lock body.

  Further, the band for realizing each locking form may not have the same shape as the band shown in FIGS. 27A (d) to 27A (g). The number of through holes, the presence or absence of a stopper, etc. The shape may be changed depending on the shape of the object to be locked or the size of the lock target. In short, any band may be used as long as at least a part thereof can be bent or bent, and an end having a portion locked by a dial lock has a through-penetrating hole at an opposite end.

  As described above, the band can have a through-hole through which the second end portion of the band to be locked can be penetrated, thereby locking the article to be locked, which can be locked more securely, to the animal. It is possible to improve the crime prevention effect.

  Further, by applying FIG. 27B (a), FIG. 27B (b) and FIG. 27B (d), it is possible to create three or more annular regions and lock three or more.

  As described with reference to FIG. 7, the shaft 300 can be removed from the lock body 100 after the dial lock 1 is assembled using the shaft 300 and the lock body 100. That is, the dial lock 1 can be reassembled. However, for example, the dial lock 1 may be configured so that it cannot be reassembled for a user who does not change the unlocking number after first determining and assembling the unlocking number.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating an example of the lock body 100 in which the dial lock 1 cannot be reassembled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 28, when the left inner diameter of the lock body side shaft hole 102a of the lock body 100 is r3 and the right inner diameter of the lock body side shaft hole 102a is r1, r3 <r1. Keep it like that.

  In this case, the outer diameter of the shaft 300 is r1, and the length of the shaft 300 is slightly shorter than the lateral width of the lock body 100. In this state, the shaft 300 inserted from the left side of the lock body side shaft hole 102a expands the inner diameter of the left side of the lock body side shaft hole 102a, and passes through the left side of the lock body side shaft hole 102a. The shaft 300 is deformed so that the width in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft 300 is narrowed, the outer diameter of the shaft 300 is reduced, passes through the left side of 102a, and is pushed into the lock body 100. Further, when the shaft head of the shaft 300 reaches the same plane as the right side surface of the lock body 100, the inner diameter on the left side of the lock body side shaft hole 102a returns to r3 which is the original inner diameter by a restoring force. The outer diameter of the rear part also returns to r1, which is the original outer diameter, by restoring force.

  By doing so, the shaft 300 cannot be removed from the lock body 100. For example, as described above, the unlock number is first determined and the unlock number is not changed after the dial lock 1 is assembled. Can use the dial lock 1 as a more stable locking device.

  Moreover, although the above-described band 400 and the like have flexibility and can be bent, a metal or the like having a fixed shape that does not bend may be used for the dial lock 1 instead of the band.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an outline when the dial lock 1 is configured using a U-shaped bar instead of a band. FIG. 29A shows an example of how to assemble the dial lock 1 with the U-shaped bar 800, which is a U-shaped bar, the shaft 330, the lock body 150, and the lock dial ring 200. FIG.

  The U-shaped bar 800 is another example of a locking member. 29 (b) is a bottom view of the U-shaped bar 800 shown in FIG. 29 (a). As shown in FIG. 29 (b), the U-shaped bar 800 is engaged with the locking dial ring 200. It has a convex part 801.

  FIG. 29C is a cross-sectional view of the lock main body 150 excluding the lock dial ring 200. As shown in FIG. 29C, the lock main body 150 has a space in which the shaft 330 can be inserted and the U-shaped bar 800. A fixing hole 153 for fixing one end of the U-shaped portion where the convex portion 801 does not exist is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), a dial mounting portion 151 for accommodating the lock dial ring 200 is provided.

  The user assembles each of the three locking dial rings 200 so that the unlocking number desired by the user is obtained, and puts the locking dial ring 200 into each of the three dial mounting portions 151 of the lock body 150.

  Further, when the shaft 330 is inserted into the lock body 150, the guide protrusion 331 at the shaft head of the shaft 330 engages with the guide notch 152 of the lock body 150, and the circumferential direction of the shaft 330 is shown in FIG. It is fixed in the direction shown in.

  In the above state, each of the lock dial rings 200 is matched with the unlocking number, that is, the dial is turned so that the unlocking number comes to the center front of each dial mounting portion 151 shown in FIG. By doing so, the U-shaped bar 800 can be inserted into the shaft 330 inserted in the lock body 150.

  When the locking dial ring 200 is rotated so as to have a number other than the unlocking number while the U-shaped bar 800 is inserted into the shaft 330, the U-shaped protruding part 801 of the U-shaped bar is locked by the locking dial ring 200. The bar 800 cannot be removed from the lock body 150.

  As shown in FIG. 29B, the U-shaped bar 800 has five convex portions 801, and is locked at two different positions from the three locking dial rings 200. . However, the U-shaped bar 800 may have more convex portions 801. By doing so, the position where the U-shaped bar 800 can be locked increases, and the position where the U-shaped bar 800 is locked can be changed according to the size of the umbrella to be locked. In this case, necessary size changes such as the axial lengths of the shaft 330 and the lock body 150 may be performed.

(Embodiment 2)
Next, the dial lock 2 of Embodiment 2 of this invention is demonstrated using FIGS. 30-51.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock 2 of the second embodiment. Unlike the dial lock 1 of the first embodiment, the dial lock 2 is a dial lock having two shafts.

  A dial lock having two shafts as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30A is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the dial lock 2, and the dial lock 2 has two shafts, a shaft 340 and a shaft 350, as shown in FIG.

  The dial lock 2 includes a lock body 160 that is the center of the configuration of the dial lock 2, three geared dial rings 260 through which the shaft 340 is passed, and three geared peripheral locking rings 270 through which the shaft 350 is passed. And a band 600.

  Each of the geared dial rings 260 can be rotated using the shaft 340 as a rotation shaft, and each of the geared peripheral locking rings 270 can be rotated using the shaft 350 as a rotation shaft. Further, the geared dial ring 260 and the geared peripheral lock ring 270 are engaged with each other, and the geared peripheral ring 270 can be rotated by rotating the geared dial ring 260. it can.

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing an overview of the right side surface of the peripheral lock ring 270 with a gear, and has a gear as described above. Further, it has a band-passing cutout portion 271 and the outer peripheral shape is a circular shape partially cut off with a straight line. As described above, by rotating the geared dial ring 260, the geared peripheral locking ring 270 rotates.

  FIG. 30 (c) is a diagram showing an overview of the left side surface of the geared dial ring 260, which has a gear as described above. Similar to the locking dial ring 200 described above, the outer circumferential surface has a number display portion (not shown), and numbers for locking are displayed at equal intervals. Unlike the lock dial ring 200, it does not have a notch or the like for locking a band or the like. The geared dial ring 260 is a dial ring for rotating the geared peripheral locking ring 270 for the user to lock and unlock.

  The geared peripheral locking ring 270 is an example of a locking ring in the locking device, and the geared dial ring 260 is an example of an alignment ring in the locking device.

  FIG.30 (d) is a figure which shows another form of the dial lock 2 shown to Fig.30 (a). The dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 30D has a shaft-side groove or a shaft-side hole into which the band 600 that is a locking member is inserted. Moreover, each shaft side groove | channel or shaft side hole is formed in the direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of each shaft with respect to a lock main body. As shown in FIG. 30 (d), when the band 600 passes through the shaft-side grooves or shaft-side holes of these two shafts, neither the shaft 340 nor the shaft 350 can be extracted from the lock body. That is, the shaft can be extracted only when unlocked.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an overview of the band 600. As shown in FIG. 31, the band 600 has a plurality of slit holes 601 which are notches for locking the band body by a peripheral ring locking ring 270 with a gear, and the band 600 is attached to the lock body. A stopper 603 for locking to 160 is provided. The slit hole 601 has a size in which a part of the peripheral edge of the geared peripheral lock ring 270 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the slit holes 601 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the band main body, and unevenness is formed in the longitudinal direction on the band main body. That is, the portion between the adjacent slit holes 601 in the band main body is another example of the convex portion of the locking member in the locking device.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the band body is inserted from the left side of the lock body 160 in a state where the band 600 is inserted from the band mounting hole 161 of the lock body 160. Further, as shown in FIG. 30A, the band 600 and the three peripheral locking rings 270 with gears are such that a part of the peripheral part of the peripheral locking ring 270 with gears is a slit hole 601 of the band 600. It is in a positional relationship to be inserted into.

  That is, when the geared peripheral lock ring 270 is rotated about the shaft 350 and the band passing notch 271 is located at a position other than the position of the slit hole 601 of the band 600, the geared peripheral lock ring 270 is provided. A part of the peripheral edge of the band 600 is inserted into the slit hole 601 of the band 600. Thus, the band main body of the band 600 is locked by the geared peripheral locking ring 270.

  Here, the dial lock 1 of the above-described first embodiment has one shaft, and a ring having the shaft as a rotation shaft locks the band main body, that is, a function of locking, and a rotation position where the user locks. It has a function that can be adapted to. On the other hand, the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 30 (a) has only the function of the geared peripheral locking ring 270 to lock the band body, and the geared dial ring 260 allows the user to lock the band body. It has only a function that can be adjusted to the rotational position. Further, by using a gear, the user rotates the geared dial ring 260 to rotate the geared peripheral lock ring 270 so that the band body of the band 600 can be locked and unlocked. .

  Similarly to the dial lock 1, the dial lock 2 can be assembled by the user of the dial lock 2, and the three gears in the state where the three band passing notches 271 are positioned at the slit holes 601 of the band 600. The dial dial 260 is incorporated with the shaft 340 to form the unlocking number desired by the user. That is, the dial lock 2 can also be assembled so as to have the number desired by the user as the unlocking number.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the dial lock 2 assembled in this way has an annular portion formed by a band 600 and a lock body 160, and the umbrella can be bound, that is, locked by the annular portion.

  The dial lock 2 has two axes. Of the two axes, the axis existing in the lower direction in FIG. 30A is hereinafter referred to as the front axis, and the axis existing in the upper direction is referred to as the following. The rear axis. That is, in FIG. 30A, the front axis is the axis 340 and the rear axis is the axis 350.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an overview of the shaft 340. The shaft 340 has a protrusion 341 for fixing the shaft 340 to the lock body 160. Further, the rear portion of the shaft where the protrusion 341 exists has an outer diameter slightly thicker than the other portions, and when the shaft 340 is struck into the lock body 160, the groove at the rear portion of the shaft shown in FIG. 160 is inserted. Furthermore, the shaft 340 is fixed to the lock body 160 by the friction force between the protrusion 341 and the periphery of the rear portion of the shaft due to the restoring force of the narrowed groove and the lock body 160.

  The shaft 350 has an elongated shape than the shaft 340, but has the same structure as the shaft 340 shown in FIG. The shaft 350 is also fixed to the lock body 160 in the same manner as the shaft 340.

  FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of the lock body 160. The lock body 160 includes a lock body lower part 168 and a lock body upper part 169.

  FIG. 33A is a diagram showing an overview of the upper surface of the lock body lower portion 168. As shown in FIG. 33A, the lock main body lower portion 168 includes a band attachment hole 161, a front shaft insertion hole 162, a rear shaft insertion hole 163, a lock band hole 164, and a band outlet 165.

  In addition, there are holes for supporting the front shaft and the rear shaft on the opposite sides of the front shaft insertion hole 162 and the rear shaft insertion hole 163, respectively.

  The lock body lower portion 168 has an engagement hole 910 for coupling the lock body lower portion 168 and the lock body upper portion 169 to each other.

  FIG. 33B is a diagram showing an overview of the upper surface of the lock body upper portion 169. The lock main body upper portion 169 shown in FIG. 33 (b) has three dial window portions 166, and the user moves the circumferential outer surface of the geared dial ring 260 appearing in the dial window portion 166 up and down. The geared dial ring 260 can be rotated. That is, the shaft 340, which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring 260, is engaged with the gear of the geared dial ring 260 and the gear of the geared peripheral lock ring 270 in the lock main body 160. The geared dial ring 260 is disposed at a position where it can be rotated.

  Further, the lock body upper portion 169 has an engagement protrusion 911 (not shown) on the back surface thereof, and the engagement protrusion of the lock body upper portion 169 is inserted into the engagement hole 910 of the lock body lower portion 168 as shown in FIG. By inserting 911, the lock body lower part 168 and the lock body upper part 169 can be coupled. Note that when the engagement protrusion 911 is inserted into the engagement hole 910 due to the action of the enlarged diameter portion at the tip of the engagement protrusion 911, the engagement protrusion 911 cannot be removed from the engagement hole 910.

  As described above, the peripheral lock ring 270 with gear, the shaft 350, the dial ring 260 with gear, and the shaft 340 are incorporated into the lower lock body 168, and the upper lock body 169 is coupled to the lower lock body 168. Fit from above. Furthermore, the band 600 is inserted from the band attachment hole 161, and the dial lock 2 is completed. That is, the user can assemble the dial lock 2 by the above procedure.

  Similarly to the dial lock 1, the dial lock 2 can also have a structure in which the band main body penetrates the shaft of the ring and the band main body is locked in the shaft.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock 2 in which the band body is locked in the shaft. The dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 34A includes a geared dial ring 260, a shaft 340, a geared locking ring 280, a shaft 300, a lock body 170, and a band 400.

  FIG. 34 (b) is a diagram showing an overview of the right side surface of the geared locking ring 280. The geared locking ring 280 has a gear similar to the geared peripheral locking ring 270, and is a ring side shaft hole 281 and a notch for allowing the band to pass through, like the locking dial ring 200. And a ring-side band groove 282.

  The band 401 of the band 400 is locked when the convex portion 401 of the band 400 shown in FIG. 5 comes into contact with the side surface other than the ring-side band groove 282 of the geared locking ring 280.

  The lock main body 170 is structurally similar to the lock main body 160 shown in FIG. 33, but has a structure in which a portion supporting the rear shaft supports the shaft 300.

  The dial lock 2 has two shafts, a front shaft and a rear shaft, as described above, and a ring is attached to each shaft. The band body is locked by the ring of these two shafts. It can also be set as a structure.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock 2 in which the band main body is locked by the rings respectively attached to the two shafts.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the band main body of the band 620 passed through the dial lock 2 is locked by the three geared peripheral locking rings 270 and the three geared locking dial rings 290. .

  FIG. 35B is a diagram showing an overview of the left side surface of the geared locking dial ring 290. The geared locking dial ring 290 has the same gear as the geared dial ring 260 shown in FIG. 30C, and, like the locking dial ring 200, allows the ring side shaft hole 291 and the band to pass therethrough. And a ring-side band groove 292 which is a notch for the purpose. In addition, a number display portion (not shown) is provided on the outer circumferential surface. The geared locking dial ring 290 is an example of a ring that has both the function of the positioning ring in the locking device of the present invention and the function of the locking ring.

  That is, the geared locking dial ring 290 has the function that the geared dial ring 260 has, that is, the function that the user can adjust to the rotational position locked by the geared peripheral locking ring 270, It also has the function of locking the band body.

  The geared locking dial ring 290 can also have a double structure similar to the locking dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 6, so that the number determined by the user can be unlocked. A lock dial ring 290 with a gear serving as a number can be produced.

  Also, the geared locking dial ring 290 may have an integral structure, for example, ten types of geared locking dial ring 290 in which 10 numbers from 0 to 9 are used for unlocking. , The user can produce the dial lock 2 in which the number selected by the user becomes the unlocking number by obtaining the geared locking dial ring 290 of the required number.

  FIG. 35 (c) is a diagram showing an overview of the band 620. The band 620 includes a plurality of convex portions 621 to be locked by the geared locking dial ring 290 and a plurality of slit holes 622 to be locked by the geared peripheral locking ring 270. Moreover, it has the stopper 623 for latching by the band attachment hole 181 provided in the lock main body 180. FIG.

  The lock main body 180 is structurally similar to the lock main body 160 shown in FIG. 33, but the band attachment hole is provided on the left side of the rear part unlike the lock main body 160.

  Thus, by locking the band main body with the respective rings of the two shafts, two annular portions formed by the band main body and the lock main body 180 can be formed as shown in FIG. 35 (a). .

  Using these two annular portions, for example, the umbrella can be locked with one annular portion, the other annular portion can be attached to a fixed object such as a handle of a door, and the umbrella and the fixed object can be connected. That is, as in the case where the coiled wire 20 shown in FIG. 8 is attached to the dial lock 2, not only can another person not open the umbrella, but the umbrella connected to the fixed object cannot be taken away.

  Further, the dial lock 2 may have a configuration in which the shaft 300 is used for both the front shaft and the rear shaft, and a locking dial ring 290 with a gear is attached to each.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock 2 in a state in which the shaft 300 is used for both the front shaft and the rear shaft, and three geared locking dial rings 290 are passed through each.

  In this case, a band 400 having a band main body to be locked to the geared locking dial ring 290 is used. Further, as described above, the geared locking dial ring 290 has a number display portion on the outer surface in the radial direction, and the three geared locking dial rings 290 on the rear shaft are used as unlocking dial rings. Also good.

  As described above, the dial lock 2 according to the second embodiment of the present invention has two shafts, the front shaft and the rear shaft, and one shaft is mounted like the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. The lock ring can be used as a shaft for rotating, and the other shaft can be used as a shaft for rotating a dial ring for matching the unlocking number.

  Furthermore, the rotation of the locking ring and the rotation of the dial ring can be synchronized with a gear, and with the locking ring in the unlocked state, the dial ring is adjusted to the unlocking number desired by the user. Can be incorporated.

  That is, instead of assembling the dial ring itself according to the unlocking number as in the case of the locking dial ring 200 used in the dial lock 1 of the first embodiment described above, it is necessary to open the three dial rings desired by the user. The positions in the rotational direction are aligned so that the lock number is obtained, and the dial lock 2 is incorporated.

  Further, like the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 35 (a) or FIG. 36, the rings having the two shafts as the rotation shafts can be both rings having a function of locking the band main body. By carrying out like this, it will have two lockable annular parts, for example, an umbrella and a fixed thing can be connected, and an umbrella can be protected more firmly from theft. In this case, the ring having at least one of the axes as the rotation axis is a ring having a function of locking the band body and a function that can be adjusted to a rotation position locked by the user.

  The locking ring is, for example, a geared peripheral locking ring 270, and the dialing ring is, for example, a geared dial ring 260, which has a function of locking the band body and a user locks. An example of the ring having a function that can be adjusted to the rotational position is a geared locking dial ring 290.

  Moreover, the dial lock 2 can also be used by penetrating the lock body twice without locking the band to the lock body, similarly to the method of using the band in the dial lock 1 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a method of using the dial lock 2 by penetrating the lock body twice without locking the band to the lock body.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a diagram showing the dial lock 2 when the geared locking dial ring 295 is used instead of the geared locking dial ring 290 in the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 35 (a). . As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the band main body of the band 620 is inserted from the left side of the shaft 300 which is the front shaft, and further, the band main body is inserted from the right side behind the rear shaft.

  The band body of the band 620 is locked by each of three geared locking dial rings 295 and three geared peripheral locking rings 270.

  The geared locking dial ring 295 has a function similar to that of the geared locking dial ring 290 shown in FIG. 35B, and is different from that of the geared locking dial ring 290 in FIG. As shown in b), the diameter of the gear is only smaller than the outer diameter. By doing so, for example, the gear is not exposed to the outside, and it is difficult for dust or the like to adhere to the gear.

  FIG. 37 (c) is a diagram showing the dial lock 2 when the geared locking dial ring 295 is used instead of the geared locking dial ring 290 in the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 37 (c), the band main body of the band 400 is inserted from the left side of the shaft 300 which is the front shaft, and further, the band main body is inserted from the right side of the shaft 300 which is the rear shaft.

  The band main body of the band 400 is locked by each of the three geared locking dial rings 295 on the front shaft and the three geared locking dial rings 295 on the rear shaft.

  As described above, when the band penetrating the lock body twice is locked, as shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (c), an annular portion is formed between the lock body and the band on the right side of the lock body. Is formed. That is, the umbrella can be locked by this annular portion.

  Moreover, in each example shown to Fig.37 (a) and FIG.37 (c), the insertion direction of a band is an example, and locking is possible also in right and left reverse.

  Further, when assembling the dial lock 2 having the three peripheral gear locking rings 270 like the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 35 (a), with the three band passing notches 271 aligned, It is necessary to incorporate three dial rings aligned with the unlocking number. Therefore, a tool for holding the three band passing notches 271 in an aligned state may be used.

  FIG. 38 is a view showing a state in which the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 30 is assembled using the rotation stopper 275 that prevents the rotation of the peripheral lock ring 270 with gears.

  In order to assemble the dial lock 2 using the rotation stopper 275, first, the rotation stopper 275 is inserted into the lock band hole 164 of the lock body lower part 168, and a gear is provided so that the band passing notch 271 contacts the rotation stopper 275. The peripheral locking ring 270 is inserted into the lower lock body 168. In this state, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), the geared peripheral locking ring 270 cannot rotate because the band passing notch 271 contacts the rotation stopper 275.

  Next, the shaft 350 for the geared peripheral locking ring 270 is inserted into the rear shaft insertion hole 163 of the lock body lower portion 168, and the lock body upper portion 169 is engaged with the lock body lower portion 168 as shown in FIG. 33 (c). The holes 910 and the engaging protrusions 911 are used for coupling. In FIG. 38A, for convenience of illustration, the shaft 350, the lock body upper portion, and the engagement hole 910 are omitted.

  In this state, the three geared dial rings 260 are placed in the locations shown so that their numbers (not shown) form an unlocking number on the upper surface of the dial lock 2. Furthermore, the basic part of the dial lock 2 is completed by inserting the shaft 340 from the left.

  By providing a tool that assists in assembling the dial lock 2 like the above-described rotation stopper 275, the user can assemble the dial lock 2 more easily.

  Various bands other than the above-described band 600 can be used for the dial lock 2.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a double-headed band that can be used for the dial lock 2. A band 630 shown in FIG. 39 is a band obtained by applying a double-headed shape in which both ends are band heads to the band 620 shown in FIG. The band 630 has a plurality of convex portions 631 and a plurality of slit holes 632, and is used for a dial lock 2 having a geared peripheral locking ring 270 and a geared locking dial ring 295 shown in FIG. can do.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a method of using a double-headed band in the dial lock 2.

  FIG. 40A is a view showing a method of using the band 630 in the dial lock 2 having the geared peripheral locking ring 270 and the geared locking dial ring 295. FIG. 40B is a diagram showing a method of using the band 470 in the dial lock 2 having only the geared locking dial ring 295.

  The band 470 is a double-headed band having a plurality of convex portions 471 as shown in FIG. In the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 40 (b), only the locking dial ring 295 with a gear locks the band body, and therefore a band 470 having a plurality of convex portions 471 can be used.

  40 (a) and 40 (b), both ends of each band are inserted into the lock body from the left direction, and the band body is locked at an appropriate position. That is, the umbrella can be locked by the method shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b). In addition, the insertion direction of the band is an example, and locking is possible even if left and right are reversed.

  Thus, by providing variations in the usage of the band, for example, the dial lock 2 can be used in the usage of the band that suits the user's preference of the dial lock 2. In addition, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 40A, the lock body 160 does not need to have a band attachment hole, and the cost for manufacturing the lock body 160 can be reduced.

  Similarly to the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 19, the dial lock 2 can also be locked by passing the band twice on the same shaft. It is also possible to use a plurality of bands for one dial lock 2. For example, another band 630 is inserted from the right side of the dial lock 2 into the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. Is also possible. Also, other shaped bands can be used for the dial lock 2.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a modified example of the band 600 and the band 620.

  A band 640 shown in FIG. 41A has a shape having an anti-slip portion 644 at the bottom of the band body of the band 620. Others have a plurality of convex portions 641 and slit holes 642 as with the band 620, and have stoppers 643. The saw blade-like projections that are the anti-slip portions 644 bite into the umbrella cloth and the like, so that the dial lock 2 using the band 640 is less likely to be pulled out downward.

  A band 650 shown in FIG. 41B has a shape having a band side engaging portion 651 similar to the band 410 shown in FIG.

  By doing so, the band 650 can be used when the lock dial ring having the same internal shape as the lock dial ring 250 shown in FIG.

  Specifically, the surface of the dial lock 295 with a gear lock of the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 37 (a) in contact with the shaft 300 has a saw-tooth-like unevenness shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c). By providing, the band 650 can be used.

  A band 660 shown in FIG. 41C is a band obtained by deforming the slit hole 601 of the band 600 into an ellipse. By doing so, the band main body is difficult to tear from the slit hole 661.

  Further, as described above, the geared peripheral locking ring 270 has the band passing notch 271 and a part of the peripheral edge other than the band passing notch 271 is inserted into the slit hole of the band. The band body is locked.

  However, since the band is locked by the peripheral locking ring 270 with the gear, it may have a protrusion instead of the slit hole.

  FIG. 42 is a view showing an example of a band having a protrusion for locking the band main body with the peripheral locking ring 270 with a gear.

  The band 670 shown in FIG. 42A has a plurality of locking projections 671 and a stopper 673 for locking to the lock body 160 and the like. FIG. 42 (b) is a bottom view of the band 670, and as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the locking protrusion 671 is a protrusion having a certain height.

  Further, the plurality of locking protrusions 671 are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the band main body, and unevenness is formed in the longitudinal direction on the band main body. That is, the plurality of locking protrusions 671 are another example of the protrusions of the locking member in the locking device.

  In the case of the band 600, the band main body is locked by inserting a part of the peripheral edge of the geared peripheral locking ring 270 into the slit hole 601, but the band 670 includes the locking projection 671 and the geared peripheral part. The band main body is locked by engaging a part of the peripheral edge of the locking ring 270.

  Further, when the geared peripheral locking ring 270 is rotated and the band passing notch 271 comes to the position of the locking projection 671, the locking projection 671 disappears, and the geared peripheral portion The locking ring 270 can be moved in the direction of the rotation axis.

  The relationship between the locking protrusion 671 and the geared peripheral locking ring 270 is the same in the band having the locking protrusion described below.

  The band 680 shown in FIG. 42C has a plurality of convex portions 681 like the band 620, and unlike the band 620, has a plurality of locking protrusions 682 instead of slit holes. Moreover, it has the stopper 683 for latching to the lock main body 160 grade | etc.,.

  Similarly to the band 620, the band 680 can be used for the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 37 (a). The band main body is locked by the peripheral locking ring 270 with gears and the locking dial ring 295 with gears. Is done.

  The band 690 shown in FIG. 42 (d) has a plurality of convex portions 691 and a plurality of locking projections 692 in the same manner as the band 680, and has a stopper 693 to be locked to the lock body 160 or the like. Further, a saw blade-like anti-slip portion 694 is provided at the bottom of the band body.

  Similarly to the band 680, the band 690 can be used for the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. Further, the saw blade-like projections which are the anti-slip portions 694 bite into the umbrella cloth and the like, thereby making it difficult to remove the dial lock 2 using the band 690 downward from the umbrella.

  A band 700 shown in FIG. 42E has a band-side engaging portion 701 like the band 650, and unlike the band 650, has a plurality of locking projections 702 instead of slit holes. Moreover, it has the stopper 703 for latching to the lock main body 160 grade | etc.,.

  Similar to the band 650, the band 700 has a geared peripheral locking ring 270 and a geared locking ring having sawtooth-shaped irregularities shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) on the side in contact with the shaft. It can be used for the dial lock 2 having

  A band 710 shown in FIG. 42 (f) is an example of a band in which the band 700 has a double-headed shape, and includes a band-side engaging portion 711 and a plurality of locking protrusions 712.

  Moreover, since it is a double-headed shape, for example, an annular portion that can lock an umbrella on the left side of the lock body by inserting both ends of the band 710 into the front shaft and the rear shaft from the left side of the lock body. To be used.

  Further, the shape for locking the band main body by the geared peripheral locking ring 270 is not limited to the above-described slit hole and locking protrusion, and may be a sphere, for example.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating an example of a band having a plurality of spheres in the band body. FIG. 43A shows the band 510 shown in FIG. 24A. By attaching the stopper 723 shown in FIG. 43B to this band 510, the band 720 shown in FIG. 43C is manufactured. .

  Specifically, the left and right sides of the stopper 723 in the state shown in FIG. 43B are closed in such a manner that the sphere at one end of the band 510 is sandwiched between the two mounting holes 724 of the stopper 723. Further, the surfaces of the stoppers 723 that are in contact with each other are bonded by a predetermined means, whereby a band 720 having a spherical body in the band body and a stopper 723 for locking the lock body as shown in FIG. Can be produced.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the band main body of the band 720 is locked by the peripheral locking ring 270 with a gear.

  44 (a) shows that the band passing notch 271 of the three geared peripheral locking rings 270 is in a position where the movement of the band 720 in the left-right direction is not restricted, that is, in the unlocked position. It shows a case.

  By rotating the geared dial ring 260 from this state, the three geared peripheral locking rings 270 rotate, and as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the peripheral edges of the three geared peripheral locking rings 270 A part of the part enters between the spheres of the band 720 and the sphere cannot move left and right. That is, the band main body of the band 720 is locked.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating an example of an overview when the band 720 is used for the dial lock 2. 45 (a) is a top view of the dial lock 2, FIG. 45 (b) is a rear view of the lock body 190, and FIG. 45 (c) is a left side view of the lock body 190. 45 (d) is a right side view of the lock body 190. FIG.

  The lock body 190 shown in FIG. 45 (a) has the same internal structure as that of the lock body 160, and only the rear part is curved.

  After the dial lock 2 is in the unlocked state, the band head of the band 720 is inserted through the band mounting hole 191 at the rear of the lock body 190 shown in FIG. 45 (b), and the lock body 190 shown in FIG. 45 (d). It comes out of the lock body 190 from the first band outlet 192 on the right side. Further, the band head is inserted into the lock body 190 from the lock band passage hole 193 on the left side surface of the lock body 190 shown in FIG. 45C, and the right side surface of the lock body 190 shown in FIG. It comes out of the lock body 190 from the second band outlet 194.

  In this way, the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. That is, an umbrella can be locked by the annular part formed in the upper part of the dial lock 2 shown to Fig.45 (a).

  FIG. 29 shows a case where a U-shaped bar is used for the dial lock 1, but a U-shaped bar can also be used for the dial lock 2.

  Each of FIG. 46A (a)-FIG. 46A (g) is a figure which shows the outline | summary at the time of comprising the dial lock 2 using the U-shaped stick | rod body instead of the band. Each of the dial locks 2 shown in FIGS. 46A (a) to 46A (g) can be pulled out at the time of locking due to the positional relationship between the U-shaped rod body and the rotary shaft of the dial ring. In addition, it has a structure that allows its rotating shaft to be extracted when unlocked. Further, a member such as a pin for realizing this structure is not required. That is, it has a simple structure and allows the dial ring to be taken out only at the time of unlocking. For example, the unlocking number can be changed.

  The configuration of each of the dial locks 2 shown in FIGS. 46A (a) to 46A (g) is the same as that of the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 30 (a), and includes a peripheral lock ring 270 with gears, a shaft 350 and a geared dial ring 260 are provided in common. Further, each dial lock 2 has a shaft and a lock body which are different. In addition, in FIG. 46A (b)-FIG. 46A (g), the code | symbol of these members provided in common is abbreviate | omitted.

  Furthermore, each dial lock 2 includes a U-shaped bar 810, a U-shaped bar 811, or a U-shaped bar 812, which is a U-shaped bar used as a locking member. Although the opening method of the U-shaped portion is different, each has three concave portions. In each of the dial locks 2, the concave portions engage with a part of the peripheral edge of the geared peripheral lock ring 270, so that the U-shaped bar is locked and cannot be unlocked. That is, each figure of FIG. 46A (a)-FIG. 46A (g) has shown the locked state. Hereinafter, individual drawings will be described.

  In the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (a), the shaft hole into which the shaft 342 which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring is inserted passes through the lock body. At the time of locking, the U-shaped bar 810 prevents the shaft from being removed from the lock body 900. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 810 is not obstructed, and the shaft 342 can be removed from the lock body by pushing the shaft head, and the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed.

  In the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (b), the shaft hole into which the shaft 343 which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring is inserted does not penetrate the lock body 901, but the shaft 346 has a hook for pulling out the shaft. attached. At the time of locking, the U-shaped bar 810 prevents the shaft 343 from being removed from the lock body 901. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 810 is not obstructed, and the shaft 343 can be removed from the lock body 901 by pulling the hook, and the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed.

  46A (c), like the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (a), the shaft hole into which the shaft 344 which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring is inserted through the lock body 900. The shaft 344 is provided with a hook for pulling out the shaft. At the time of locking, the U-shaped bar 810 prevents the shaft 344 from being removed from the lock body 900. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 810 is not obstructed, and the shaft 344 can be removed from the lock body 900 by pushing the shaft head or pulling the hook, and the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed. .

  In the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (d), a recessed portion into which the end of the U-shaped bar 811 can be inserted exists at the rear end portion of the shaft 345 which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring. The shaft hole into which the shaft 345 is inserted penetrates the lock body 902. At the time of locking, the U-shaped bar 811 hinders and the shaft 345 cannot be removed from the lock body 902. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 811 is not obstructed, and the shaft 345 can be removed from the lock body 902 by pushing the shaft head, and the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed.

  In the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (e), a recessed portion into which the end of the U-shaped bar 811 can be inserted exists at the rear end portion of the shaft 346 which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring. The shaft hole into which the shaft 345 is inserted does not penetrate the lock body 903, but the shaft 346 has a hook for pulling out the shaft 346. At the time of locking, the U-shaped bar 811 hinders and the shaft 346 cannot be removed from the lock body 903. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 811 is not obstructed, and the shaft 346 can be removed from the lock body 903 by pulling the hook, so that the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed.

  In the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (f), a recessed portion into which the end of the U-shaped bar 811 can be inserted exists at the rear end portion of the shaft 347 which is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring. The shaft hole into which the shaft 347 is inserted passes through the lock body 902, and the shaft 347 is provided with a hook for pulling out the shaft 347. At the time of locking, the U-shaped bar 811 hinders and the shaft 347 cannot be removed from the lock body 902. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 811 is not obstructed, and the shaft 347 can be removed from the lock body 902 by pushing the shaft head or pulling the hook, and the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed. .

  In the dial lock 2 of FIG. 46A (g), a recessed portion into which a part of the end of the U-shaped bar 812 can be inserted exists at the rear end portion of the shaft 348 that is the rotation shaft of the geared dial ring. The shaft hole into which the shaft 348 is inserted passes through the lock body 904. During locking, the U-shaped bar 812 is obstructed, and the shaft 348 cannot be removed from the lock body 904. However, at the time of unlocking, the U-shaped bar 812 is not obstructed, and the shaft 348 can be removed from the lock body 904 by pushing the shaft head, and the unlocking number of the geared dial ring can be changed.

  46A (a) to 46A (g) as described above, in each dial lock 2 having a U-shaped bar, the outer diameter of at least a part of the rotating shaft of the geared dial ring which is an alignment ring is The rotation shaft is only in the direction opposite to the direction in which the rotation shaft is inserted into the shaft hole or the shaft hole because it is larger than the inner diameter of a part of the shaft hole or because the shaft hole does not penetrate the lock body. Extraction is possible.

  Further, the direction in which the rotary shaft is pulled out from the lock body is the same as the direction in which the U-shaped bar is pulled out when the U-shaped bar is released from the locked state, and the U-shaped bar prevents the U-shaped bar from being locked during locking. Therefore, the rotating shaft cannot be extracted.

  Therefore, the dial lock 2 of FIGS. 46A (a) to 46A (g) does not extract the rotating shaft from the lock body at the time of locking, and can extract the rotating shaft only at the time of unlocking. That is, it becomes possible to take out the dial ring with gears only at the time of unlocking, and the unlocking number can be changed. Further, in order to allow the geared dial ring to be taken out only at the time of unlocking, a member such as a pin is not required separately, and only a member necessary for locking the article is configured.

  In addition, a more stable locking device can be provided by connecting the shaft and the lock body in a screw manner.

  Each of the dial locks 2 shown in FIGS. 46B (a) to 46B (d) is equivalent to the dial lock 2 shown in FIGS. 46A (a), 46A (b), 46A (d), and 46A (e). It is a schematic diagram of an internal structure at the time of making it the structure which couple | bonds the rotating shaft of a dial ring, and a lock main body with a screw type.

  The dial lock 2 in FIG. 46B (a) corresponds to the dial lock 2 in FIG. 46A (a), and the lock main body 900a and the shaft 342a are coupled in a screw manner.

  The dial lock 2 in FIG. 46B (b) corresponds to the dial lock 2 in FIG. 46A (b), and the lock body 901a and the shaft 343a are coupled in a screw manner.

  The dial lock 2 in FIG. 46B (c) corresponds to the dial lock 2 in FIG. 46A (d), and the lock body 902a and the shaft 345a are coupled in a screw manner.

  The dial lock 2 in FIG. 46B (d) corresponds to the dial lock 2 in FIG. 46A (e) except that there is no wrinkle at the rear part of the shaft, and the lock body 903a and the shaft 346a are coupled in a screw manner. . Further, a groove (not shown) exists at the rear end of the shaft. Therefore, it is possible to unscrew the shaft 346a from the lock body 903a and disassemble the lock body 903a, the shaft 346a, and the geared dial ring only when unlocking using a coin, a flat-blade screwdriver or a plus screwdriver.

  Each dial lock 2 shown in FIGS. 46B (a) to 46B (d), like the corresponding dial lock, is obstructed by the U-shaped bar during locking, and the shaft cannot be removed from the lock body. Further, the U-shaped bar is not obstructed at the time of unlocking, and the shaft can be screwed out of the lock body. Thereby, the dial ring with a gear can be removed from the lock body, and the unlocking number of the dial ring with a gear can be changed. Furthermore, since the rotating shaft and the lock body are coupled to each other in a screw manner, it is possible to prevent the rotating shaft from unexpectedly dropping from the lock body at the time of unlocking, for example.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an outline of the internal structure of the lock body 900 before the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 46A (a) is assembled.

  The U-shaped bar 810 is in a state in which the tip of the U-shaped portion is detached from the lock body 900 and faces the outside of the lock body 900. Accordingly, the concave portion of the metal rod 810 is also in a direction facing the tip of the U-shaped portion. Further, the three band passing notches 271 of the geared peripheral locking ring 270 are in the direction of the U-shaped bar 810.

  In this state, the bar portion inside the lock body 900 of the U-shaped bar 810 plays a role similar to that of the rotation stopper 275 shown in FIG. 38A, and the peripheral lock ring 270 with gears freely rotates. I can't do it.

  That is, the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 46A (a) is supplied to the user in the state shown in FIG. 47, and the user attaches the geared dial ring 260 to the lock body 900 by the procedure shown in FIG. In this way, the assembly of the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 46A (a) is completed.

  46A to 47, the portion of the lock body into which the straight portion of the U-shaped bar is inserted may not be a hole that does not penetrate the lock body as shown in FIG. It may be a hole. These holes and holes are called rod holes and rod holes.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a procedure for assembling the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 46A (a).

  FIG. 48A is a diagram showing a state where the geared dial ring 260 is attached to the lock body 900 shown in FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 48 (a) is an unlocked state, and the dial ring 260 with gears is inserted into the lock body 900 from each of the three dial mounting windows 905 provided in the lock body 900, and the user desires. The shaft 340 is inserted into the lock body 900 in a state where the unlocking number is formed at the center of the dial mounting window 905.

  With the above procedure, the dial lock 2 having the unlocking number desired by the user can be assembled.

  In addition, the geared dial ring 260 may be supplied to the user in a state in which the geared dial ring 260 is provided in advance in the lock body 900. In this case, by reducing the size of the dial mounting window 905, the geared dial ring 260 is provided. What is necessary is just not to jump out from the lock body 900.

  FIG. 48B is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft 340 is inserted into the lock body 900 in which the geared dial ring 260 is provided in advance.

  The dial attachment window 906 has a longer side direction shorter than the dial attachment window 905 shown in FIG. 48A, and the geared dial ring 260 inside the lock body 900 does not jump out. However, the geared dial ring 260 is not fitted in the periphery of the geared dial ring 260 inside the lock body 900 without the gears of the geared dial ring 260 and the geared peripheral locking ring 270 being fitted. There is a space that can be rotated. Therefore, the user rotates the three geared dial rings 260 without rotating the geared peripheral locking ring 270 so that the unlocking number is formed at the center of the dial mounting window 905. Can be made.

  By rotating the locking dial ring 260 so as to form the unlocking number by the above method and inserting the shaft 340 into the lock body 900, the gear of the geared dial ring 260 and the geared peripheral lock ring 270 The gear engages with each other, and the assembly of the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 46A (a) is completed.

  Note that the U-shaped bar 810 has a concave portion, but the concave-convex portion between adjacent concave portions has an unevenness, for example, and has the same effect as the convex portion 401 of the band 400 in the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. .

  Moreover, although the dial lock 2 shown to FIG. 46A and FIG. 46B can be locked to an umbrella by the U-shaped part of a U-shaped stick | rod, there may be three or more recessed parts of the U-shaped stick | rod 810. FIG. By doing so, the U-shaped bar 810 is locked at a plurality of positions, and can be locked, for example, on umbrellas of various sizes. In this case, since the U-shaped bar 810 is locked at a plurality of positions, the length of the lock body 900 may be changed in the axial direction.

  Further, the method of preventing the dial ring 260 existing inside the lock body 900 from coming out as described with reference to FIG. 48B can be applied to other dial locks 2. For example, the length of the long side of the dial window portion 166 of the lock body upper portion 169 shown in FIG. 33B is set to such a length that the lock dial ring 260 cannot pass through, so that FIG. The lock main body upper part 169 is attached to the dial lock 2 shown in FIG.

  By doing so, the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 30A does not jump out of the lock body 160 even if the shaft 340 is pulled out. In this state, the unlocking number of the dial ring 2 shown in FIG. 30A can be changed by rotating the lock dial ring 260 and changing the unlocking number and then inserting the shaft 340 again.

  The lock main body 160 includes a lock main body lower portion 168 and a lock main body upper portion 169. The lock main body lower portion 168 and the lock main body upper portion 169 include an engagement hole 910 and an engagement protrusion 911 as shown in FIG. Thus, they are combined in a state where they cannot be separated again. However, as described above, it is possible to produce the dial lock 2 in which the unlocking number can be changed by removing the shaft 340 without separating the lock body 160 even after the assembly is completed.

  The material of the band such as the band 400 used in the dial lock 1 in the first embodiment and the dial lock 2 in the second embodiment and the material of the lock body such as the lock body 100 and the lock body 160 are plastic. did.

  This has a limit in increasing the rigidity of the band in order to improve the durability performance against the other person's act of unlocking the band. Therefore, rather than focusing on increasing the rigidity, it is considered that the utility value can be greatly expected by limiting the use situation of the lock and avoiding the manufacturing cost.

  However, the band for which the locking device can be used is not limited to plastic. For example, the caterpillar band shown in FIG. 18 in which a highly rigid member such as a metal plate is connected like a metallic band of a wristwatch is an example of a band made of a material other than plastic. In addition, it is possible to improve the strength of the band by making the band itself from a metal excellent in shape change, or by encapsulating a wire even if the basic material of the band is plastic. Of course, the lock body, dial ring, shaft, etc. can also be made of a highly rigid material such as metal, and in this way, a more robust locking device can be provided.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in a band used for the dial lock 1 and reinforced. In addition, the continuous line inside each band shown to the following FIGS. 49-51 represents the wire.

  49A is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed and reinforced in the band 400, and FIG. 49B is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in the band 420 and reinforced, and FIG. ) Is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed and reinforced in the band 410, FIG. 49 (d) is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in the band 430 and reinforced, and FIG. FIG. 49 (f) is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in 440 and reinforced, and FIG. 49 (f) is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in a band 450 and reinforced.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (f), in a form that reinforces the portion and direction to which the force is applied when locked, such as a band body and a convex portion that engages with the locking dial ring 200 or the like, Enclose the wire in each band.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a wire is enclosed and reinforced in a band 600 that is a band used for the dial lock 2.

  Since the band 600 has a plurality of slit holes 601, it is necessary to enclose a wire so as to prevent the band main body from tearing from the slit holes 601.

  However, enclosing a plurality of ring-shaped wires so as to surround each of the plurality of slit holes 601 is not an optimal method in terms of labor and cost. Therefore, a procedure for reinforcing the band 600 having a plurality of slit holes 601 with a small number of wires will be described with reference to FIG.

  50 (a) and 50 (b), by enclosing the wire so as to surround each of the slit holes 601 and to reinforce the stopper at the right end, the wire is formed as shown in FIG. The shape is as shown in c).

  50C further encloses the wire in the shape shown in FIG. 50D, that is, in the form against the tensile force applied in the longitudinal direction of the band 600. .

  FIG. 50 (e) is a diagram showing a result of enclosing a wire in the shape shown in FIG. 50 (c) and FIG. 50 (d). Fig. 50 (f) is a diagram showing a wire arrangement state when the band 600 in the state shown in Fig. 50 (e) is viewed from below.

  In this way, a band in which a hole such as a slit hole is formed can be prevented from tearing from the hole by reinforcing the periphery of the hole. Moreover, a wire can be efficiently enclosed by enclosing a wire by the method shown in FIG. Further, it is possible to reinforce a band having a locking projection like a band 670 with a wire.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in a band 670 and reinforced.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (a), the entire band 670 including the locking protrusion 671 is reinforced with a wire. FIG. 51B is a diagram showing a wire arrangement state when the band 670 in the state shown in FIG. 51A is viewed from below. FIG. 51 (c) is a diagram showing a wire arrangement state when the band 670 shown in FIG. 51 (a) is viewed from the left.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 (b) and 51 (c), a wire is enclosed in a form that enters the locking protrusion 671. Since the lock protrusion 671 is applied with a force in the longitudinal direction of the band, enclosing the wire so as to enter the lock protrusion 671 is effective in reinforcing the band 670.

  Note that the wire encapsulated in each band may be made of a metal, chemical fiber, or the like that can be used to reinforce the band and has a strength that does not lose the flexibility of the band.

  Moreover, the band used for the dial lock 2 may be used for the dial lock 1, and for example, the band 620 shown in FIG. 35C may be used instead of the band 400 of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. . The band 620 has a convex portion 621 to be locked to the locking dial ring 200 and can be used for the dial lock 1 including the locking dial ring 200 as a component.

  That is, the dial lock 1 or the dial lock 2 is formed as long as the shape for locking such as the notch portion of the ring matches the shape for locking such as the convex portion of the band main body of the band. be able to.

  By doing so, for example, the user of the dial lock 1 and the dial lock 2 can use one band for both the dial lock 1 and the dial lock 2, which is economical.

  Further, the U-shaped bars such as the U-shaped bar 800 and the U-shaped bar 810 shown in FIGS. 29, 46A, and 46B may not be made of metal and cannot be broken by hand as long as they have the same shape. A material such as reinforced plastic or ceramic having a certain degree of strength may be used. By doing this, the range of material selection at the time of production increases.

  Further, the band itself may be provided inside the lock body. For example, a winding-type band reel may be provided inside the lock body so that it can be wound from the outside of the lock body when the band is not used. The band reel may be one that can wind up the band using the elasticity of the spring. When the band is not in use, the band is wound inside the lock body by the elasticity of the spring and pulled out when necessary. It may be a mechanism to use.

  When using a band reel, for example, a reel stopper that prevents the band from being pulled out from the band reel is provided, and the reel stopper is pushed in a predetermined direction to rotate the band reel in the direction in which the band is pulled out. I can't do that. Further, the lock body has a shape in which the band head does not penetrate the lock body. Further, when the band head of the drawn band is inserted into the lock body to a predetermined position, the band head presses the reel stopper.

  By doing so, for example, the band is not lost. Moreover, since the locked band cannot be pulled out by the reel stopper, it is not removed from the umbrella. Also, if the band reel and reel stopper described above are supplied as parts, the user can also assemble them.

  Further, in the dial lock 2, the peripheral lock ring 270 with a gear exists on one side of the band main body, and a slit or a lock protrusion is engaged with a part of the peripheral edge of the peripheral lock ring 270. By doing so, the band body is locked.

  However, the structure may be such that a plurality of geared peripheral locking rings 270 are arranged so as to sandwich the band main body therebetween and locked from both sides of the band main body.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an outline of a dial lock that locks the band main body of one band from both sides by a geared peripheral locking ring 270 attached to two shafts that face each other.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 52 has a structure in which the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. That is, three geared dial rings 260 through which the shaft 340 is passed and three geared peripheral locking rings 270 through which the shaft 350 is passed are provided on both sides of the band 730.

  The band 730 has a plurality of convex portions on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the band, and is configured to be locked from both sides in the longitudinal direction of the band.

  In FIG. 52, the three peripheral locking rings 270 existing on the lower side of the band 730 and the three peripheral locking rings 270 existing on the upper side are caused by the rotation of the geared dial ring 260 existing in contact therewith. Rotates asynchronously. Also, the band 730 can be freely inserted and removed only when the upper and lower six peripheral locking rings 270 are simultaneously unlocked.

  The number of the peripheral locking rings 270 with gears arranged on both sides of the band main body is arbitrary. For example, one peripheral locking ring 270 is arranged on one side of the band main body and has two gears. It is also possible to arrange a peripheral lock ring 270 on the other side to produce a dial lock with an unlocking number of 3 digits.

  In this way, by arranging the components that lock the band main body so as to sandwich the band main body, for example, a dial lock having a larger number of digits is produced without extending the lock main body in the longitudinal direction of the band. be able to. Moreover, the freedom degree of the design at the time of producing a dial lock can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the lock body 100 is configured to fix the shaft 300 by frictional force because the right inner diameter of the lock body side shaft hole 102d is narrowed. It may be fixed.

  For example, if the inner diameter of the lock body side shaft hole 102d itself is made thinner than the outer diameter of the shaft 300 and the shaft head of the shaft 300 is tapered, the shaft 300 can be similarly fixed by frictional force.

  That is, the frictional force necessary to fix the shaft 300 to the lock body 100 is generated at least at one shape of the shaft 300 and the lock body side shaft hole 102a to the lock body side shaft hole 102d of the lock body 100. Just make it into shape. The relationship between the shaft 300 and the lock body 100 is the same even if it is a relationship between another shaft and the lock body.

  By doing so, the choice of the shape related to the portion where the shaft is fixed by the lock body is increased. For example, when manufacturing the shaft or the lock body, the convenience of the combination of the shaft variation and the lock body variation, and the production cost are reduced. The shaft and lock body can be manufactured in consideration of optimization.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, when the shaft hole of the lock body has a tapered shape and the shaft is inserted into the lock body so as to drive the wedge, the shaft is fixed to the lock body by frictional force. It can be extracted only in the direction opposite to the insertion direction. However, at the time of locking, since the locking member in a state where an article such as an umbrella is tightened passes through the shaft, it cannot be pulled out in the opposite direction. For example, in the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 1, when the umbrella is tightened and locked with the band 400, the shaft 300 cannot be pulled out to the front side.

  Moreover, since the shaft can be extracted in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the shaft at the time of unlocking, the locking device can be disassembled and reassembled. This reassembly can be repeated.

  Thus, the locking device of the present invention does not require separate use of parts for preventing the shaft from being pulled out of the lock body even when the shaft and the lock body are independent. That is, the user can easily disassemble and assemble. In addition, there is a low possibility that parts constituting the locking device will be lost during disassembly and assembly. Furthermore, the manufacturing cost of the locking device can be reduced.

  An example of the shape of the shaft and the lock body that allows reassembly of the locking device only when unlocking without using a part for fixing the shaft to the lock body will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57. Each figure is a relational diagram showing the positional relationship between the shaft and the lock body. In addition, illustration of other elements, such as locking members, such as a band, and a dial ring, is abbreviate | omitted. Each shaft has a shaft-side groove or shaft-side hole for a locking member such as a band.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing the relationship between the shaft and the lock body when the shaft is fixed to the lock body by a frictional force. FIG. 53 (a) is a view showing a state in which the shaft is fixed to a shaft hole penetrating the lock body in a state where the shaft can be extracted only in one direction. FIG. 53 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft with a hook is fixed in a state where it can be extracted only in one direction into a shaft hole that penetrates the lock body. FIG. 53 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft with a hook is fixed in a state where it can be extracted only in one direction into a shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b), when the shaft has a tapered shape, the shaft can be fixed to the lock body by a frictional force. Further, in this case, it can be inserted only from the left side, and the shaft cannot be extracted from the right side. When pulling out the shaft from the lock body, it may be pushed from the right side to the left side.

  Further, in the case shown in FIG. 53 (b), the shaft has a flange 303 at the rear portion of the shaft. The user can pull out the shaft to the left by pinching the hook 303. Also, the shaft 303 is not pulled out from the right side of the lock body by the hook 303.

  In the case shown in FIG. 53 (c), the shaft is fixed to the lock body as in FIGS. 53 (a) and 53 (b). Further, although the shaft cannot be pushed out from the right side of the lock body, the shaft can be pulled out to the left side using the hook 303.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (c), even if the portion for fixing the shaft is a shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body, if the hole through which the locking member passes is provided in the lock body, the portion can be engaged at any position. It is also possible to use a locking member that can be stopped. The same applies to the following drawings.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the relationship between the shaft and the lock body when the shaft having a thread is fixed to the lock body having a thread groove. FIG. 54A is a view showing a state in which a shaft having a thread is fixed to a shaft hole that penetrates the lock body. FIG. 54 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a shaft having a thread is fixed to a shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body.

  54 (a) and 54 (b), the shaft is inserted while being screwed from the left side of the lock body. Moreover, it is extracted from the left side of the lock body by being screwed in the direction opposite to that at the time of insertion.

  Moreover, it becomes possible to fix the shaft firmly to the lock body by making the shaft into a tapered shape and making the shaft hole of the lock body a corresponding shape. Furthermore, it is impossible to extract the shaft from the right side of the lock body.

  Even when the shaft and the shaft hole of the lock body are not tapered but cylindrical, the shaft can be rotated by locking the locking member across the shaft and the lock body during locking. Disappear. Thus, the shaft cannot be extracted from the right side or the left side of the lock body.

  Moreover, when inserting or extracting the shaft at the time of unlocking, the shaft side groove of the shaft can be used. For example, a flathead screwdriver can be inserted into the shaft side groove at the rear of the shaft and the shaft can be turned. Further, a notch for rotating the shaft may be separately provided on the shaft.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between the shaft and the lock body when the rear portion of the shaft is fixed to the lock body.

  FIG. 55 (a) is a view showing a state in which a shaft having a large diameter portion is inserted into a shaft hole penetrating the lock body. FIG. 55 (b) is a view showing a state where a shaft having a flange and a large-diameter portion is inserted into a shaft hole penetrating the lock body. FIG. 55 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft having the flange and the large-diameter portion is inserted into the shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body.

  The large diameter portion of the shaft is a bulge having an outer diameter larger than the diameter of the lock body side shaft hole. The shape may be spherical or elliptical, or other shapes.

  55 (a), 55 (b) and 55 (c), the shaft has a large-diameter portion 304a. The large diameter portion 304a is inserted into the lock body while the notch portion 304b is narrowed. The lock body has a space in which the large-diameter portion 304 is accommodated. When the large diameter portion 304a is inserted into the space, the large diameter portion 304a returns to its original shape by the restoring force of the rear end portion where the notch portion 304b exists. Further, the large diameter portion 304a cannot move right beyond the space. That is, the shaft is not pulled out to the right.

  In FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the shaft hole of the lock body penetrates, so that the shaft can be pushed out from the right side to the left side. 55 (b) and 55 (c), the shaft further has a flange 303, and the shaft can be extracted to the left side using the flange as described above.

  FIG. 55 (d) is a diagram showing a state where the shaft is inserted into the lock body having the elastic body in the shaft hole.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the lock body has two elastic bodies 390 so as to face each other in the shaft hole. Further, the shaft has a recess 390 a having a shape corresponding to the elastic body 390 and a flange 303. In FIG. 55 (d), when the shaft is inserted into the lock body, the elastic body 390 is expanded by the shaft, and finally, when the shaft recess 390a comes to the position of the elastic body 390, the elastic body 390 is By restoring the original shape, the shaft fits into the recess 390a of the shaft, the shaft is fixed to the lock body, and the shaft is not pulled out from the right side of the lock body by the hook 303.

  Also, if the shaft head of the shaft is pushed in the direction opposite to the shaft insertion direction or if the hook 303 is pinched and pulled, the elastic body 390 deforms in the same way as when the shaft is inserted, and the shaft It is extracted from the lock body.

  In FIG. 55 (d), the lock body has two elastic bodies 390. However, the number of elastic bodies for fixing the shaft may be one, or three or more. If the shaft is fixed to the lock body, there is no problem.

  FIG. 55 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the shaft is inserted into the lock body in which the diameter of a part of the shaft hole is small.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (e), the lock body has a convex portion 391a that reduces the inner diameter in part of the shaft hole. Further, the shaft has a recess 391b to be fixed by the convex portion 391a. In FIG. 55 (e), when the shaft is inserted into the lock body, the shaft is inserted so as to shrink the shaft-side groove into which a locking member such as a band is inserted. Finally, due to the elasticity of the shaft, The protrusion 391a and the recess 391b are fixed to the lock body at a position where they fit.

  Further, when the collar at the rear of the shaft is pulled, the shaft-side groove is deformed in the same manner as when the shaft is inserted, and the shaft is extracted from the lock body.

  Further, the shaft side groove in FIG. 55 (e) is drawn in the same direction as the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft with respect to the lock body, but as shown in FIGS. 58 (f) to 58 (i) described later, the shaft side groove is a shaft. It may be formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction with respect to the lock body.

  In this way, the shaft does not have a large diameter part, but has a portion smaller than the diameter of the shaft in the shaft hole of the lock body, and either side of the lock body or the shaft is deformably deformed so that it can be attached and detached. The shaft can be incorporated into the lock body as possible.

  In the lock body shown in FIGS. 53 (c), 55 (c) and 55 (e) described above, when the shaft is inserted into a shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body, the hook provided on the shaft is removed. It was used and extracted in the direction opposite to the insertion direction. However, a hole for pushing out the shaft may be provided in the lock body.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a case where the shaft and the lock body shown in FIG. 53 (c) are added with the shaft bar removed, and a hole for pushing out the shaft is provided in the lock body.

  As shown in FIG. 56 (a), even if the shaft has no wrinkles and the shaft is inserted into a shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body, an extrusion hole 305 is provided on the shaft insertion direction side of the lock body. Thus, the shaft can be pushed out in the direction opposite to the insertion direction. An extrusion rod 306 for extruding may be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the extrusion hole 305 may be provided at a position that is inclined with respect to the insertion direction of the shaft.

  Further, even when the shaft has the flange 303, the extrusion hole 305 may be provided in parallel with the insertion direction of the shaft as shown in FIG. 56 (c), and the extrusion hole as shown in FIG. 56 (d). You may provide 305 in the position which becomes diagonal with respect to the insertion direction of an axis | shaft.

  When the frictional force between the shaft and the lock body is large and the shaft cannot be pulled out using the collar 303, if the push hole 305 is provided in the lock body, the shaft can be pushed out by the push rod 306 or the like. it can.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a case where the shaft and the lock body shown in FIG. 55 (c) are added with the shafts removed, and a hole for pushing the shaft is provided in the lock body.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), even if the shaft has no wrinkles and the shaft is inserted into a shaft hole that does not penetrate the lock body, an extrusion hole 305 is provided on the shaft insertion direction side of the lock body. Thus, the shaft having the large diameter portion 304a can be pushed out in the direction opposite to the insertion direction.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the extrusion hole 305 may be provided at a position that is oblique to the insertion direction of the shaft.

  Further, even when the shaft having the large diameter portion 304a further has the flange 303, as shown in FIG. 57 (c), the extrusion hole 305 may be provided in parallel with the insertion direction of the shaft. The extrusion hole 305 may be provided at a position that is inclined with respect to the shaft insertion direction as shown in FIG.

  As described above, the shaft can be fixed to the lock body by making the shaft tapered, providing a thread on the shaft, or providing a large diameter portion on the shaft. Furthermore, it can be made impossible for the shaft to be extracted in the same direction as the insertion direction. The relationship between the lock body, the shaft, and the locking member is as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (m), FIG. 59, and FIG. 60, and the shaft is inserted from the lock body during locking. It is impossible to extract in the direction opposite to the direction. That is, the locking device can be disassembled only when unlocking.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to separately use parts for preventing the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body. In addition, since the shaft is fixed to the lock body using the frictional force, the screw principle, or the like, disassembly and assembly can be repeated.

  Assuming the case where the band is locked while the locking object such as an umbrella is loosely tightened by the band, the locking device using the shaft having the thread shown in FIG. Except the shaft is not pulled out. On the other hand, in the locking device using the tapered shaft shown in FIGS. 53 and 55 and the shaft having the large-diameter portion at the rear portion of the shaft, there is a possibility that the shaft is pulled out in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the shaft. . However, when the band is locked in a state where the locking object is properly tightened, the shaft is not pulled out. Here, the above-mentioned specific case is a case where the band passes through the shaft spirally in the shaft having a thread, and the period of the twist and the pitch of the thread are synchronized. is there. In that case, there is a possibility that the shaft is pulled out while turning. However, it is possible to make it impossible to extract the shaft by designing the twist cycle and the thread pitch not to synchronize with each other.

  Further, the locking device of the present invention is in a state where the band is loosely tightened in the relationship between the shaft and the lock body shown in FIGS. 53 and 55 to 57 except that the shaft having the above-described screw thread is used. However, by devising the (passing) path of the band, a structure in which the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body can be obtained.

  An example of a structure of a dial lock in which the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body even when a locking member such as a band is loosely tightened will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, each figure is a related figure which shows the positional relationship of locking members, such as a band, an axis | shaft, and a lock main body. Illustration of other elements such as a dial ring is omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a difference in a path of a locking member such as a band and a shaft with respect to a shaft and a lock body viewed from a direction in which a notch portion of the dial ring is present at the time of unlocking. Is described as a band. In addition, each figure of Fig.58 (a)-FIG.58 (m) is a top view of a dial lock, and the line segment which has the arrow in a figure at a front-end | tip represents a band. A region sandwiched between two thin dotted lines penetrating the three dial rings represents an axis, and a thick dotted line portion within the axis, that is, a portion where a band is present, an axial groove or There is a shaft side hole. Specifically, a shaft-side groove exists in a thick dotted line portion that passes through three dial rings, and a shaft-side groove or a shaft-side hole exists in the other thick dotted line portion. The same applies to FIG. 59 described later.

  In these locking forms, for example, at least a part of the lock main body 120, the band 400, the three lock dial rings 200, and the shaft-side groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft with respect to the lock main body. It can be implemented by a locking device constituted by a shaft, for example, a shaft 380 which will be described later with reference to FIG. In this case, in the lock main body 120, the main body side groove is present at a position where one passage is formed by the main body side groove and the shaft side groove of the shaft 380.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which a band passes through the shaft in parallel with the axial direction. For example, the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 1 is of this type.

  58 (b) to 58 (e) are diagrams showing the dial lock in which the band penetrates the boundary between the lock body and the shaft. In the type shown in FIG. 58 (b), the band passes once through the lock body in the vicinity of the rear portion of the shaft. In the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (c), the band passes once through the lock body near the shaft head. In the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (d), the band passes through the lock body twice in the vicinity of the rear part of the shaft and the vicinity of the head part of the shaft. In the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (e), the band passes through the lock body twice in the vicinity of the rear part of the shaft and the vicinity of the head part of the shaft. Further, the band protrudes on the opposite side of the shaft from the side where the band is inserted.

  Here, in each of the dial locks shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (e), the band exists so as to cross the boundary between the shaft and the lock body at least at one place. In this state, even if the band is loosely tightened, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body if the band is locked.

  Furthermore, even when unlocking, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body in the state where the band exists over the entire range of the shaft side groove. However, in each of the dial locks shown in FIGS. 58 (b), 58 (d), and 58 (e), the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body if the band is not completely detached from the shaft. .

  58 (f) to 58 (i) are types in which the band does not cross the boundary between the shaft and the lock body, the band can move from end to end (over the entire length), and there is a path that can be penetrated. It is a figure which shows the dial lock.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (f) has a curved portion near the rear axis of the band passage, and the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (g) has a curved portion near the axial head of the band passage. In addition, the type shown in FIG. 58 (h) has curved portions near the axial head and the axial rear of the band passage. In the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (i), the band passage is a straight line oblique to the axial direction.

  Here, the direction in which the shaft can be extracted is the direction of the shaft hole of the lock body, and is parallel to the major axis direction of the shaft in each figure. However, in each figure of FIG.58 (f)-FIG.58 (i), the axial side groove | channel which is a groove | channel through which the band of an axis | shaft passes has a part which is not parallel to an axial direction.

  Therefore, when the shaft is pulled out from the lock body while the band is locked, the shaft moves the band body in a portion not parallel to the axial direction in the shaft side groove, and the lock in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. It needs to be extracted while moving in the front or rear direction of the main body. However, the lock body has a body-side groove that is a groove through which the band of the lock body passes so as to face the shaft-side groove (see, for example, FIG. 5). That is, each lock body has a body side groove at the upper part of the shaft along the dotted line representing the band in each figure.

  Therefore, even if the band body is moved in the front-rear direction of the lock body, the band body cannot move in the front-rear direction of the lock body because the side having the uneven portion of the band body exists in the body-side groove. . Also, the shaft-side groove must be formed in the vicinity of the dial ring so that the dial ring cannot rotate when the concave portion of the band main body protrudes from the groove, so that the concave portion does not protrude from the groove. If the shaft side groove portion is formed in a direction different from the direction in which the shaft is inserted into and removed from the lock body, the bottom of the shaft side groove is in the same plane and is naturally not twisted. The groove becomes shallow, and the concave portion of the uneven portion of the band main body protrudes from the groove. In other words, unless using a band that warps or warps the lower surface of the band, which is the side opposite to the side having the uneven portion of the band body, and the shaft side groove is a twisted shape with a certain depth, the locking member is Even a portion that is not a convex portion is protruded from the shaft-side groove, and a portion that is not a convex portion of the locking member exists across the shaft-side groove and the main body-side groove.

  Therefore, in each of the dial locks shown in FIGS. 58 (f) to 58 (i), when the band is locked, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body even if the band is loosely tightened.

  Further, even when unlocked, in the state where the band exists over the entire range of the shaft side groove, there is a side having the uneven portion of the band body in a portion that is not parallel to the axial direction of the body side groove. .

  Therefore, even when unlocking, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body in the state where the band exists over the entire range of the shaft side groove. However, in FIGS. 58 (f), 58 (h), and 58 (i), the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body if the band is not completely removed from the shaft.

  As described above, regardless of the shape of the shaft, the passage of the band through the shaft and the lock body, that is, the shape of the groove or hole through which the band of the shaft and the lock body passes, allows the shaft to be moved only when unlocked. It is possible to produce a locking device that can be extracted. Moreover, it is not necessary to separately use parts for preventing the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body.

  For example, in the locking device of the present invention, even when a shaft as shown in FIG. 81 described later is cylindrical and a shaft that can be inserted and removed from either side of the lock body is used, FIG. By creating a band passage as shown in 58 (i), it can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  58 (b) and 58 (d), and FIG. 58 (f) and FIG. 58 (h), the band and the shaft or the lock body when locking the umbrella with a band or the like. 58 (e) and 58 (i), the band is inserted into the lock body in a state where the curve of the band is gentle compared to FIG. 58 (a). It can be dispersed, that is, the service life of the band can be extended as in the case of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG.

  58 (j) and 58 (k) show a type of dial in which another shaft side groove (hereinafter referred to as "sub shaft side groove") exists in addition to the shaft side groove for locking the band by the dial ring. It is a figure which shows a lock | rock. Note that the two shaft-side grooves present in each dial lock are present at positions that do not cross each other.

  As described above, the shaft side groove for locking the band by the dial ring is a groove that exists in the thick line portion in the shaft that passes through the three dial rings, and the other thick line in the shaft. The auxiliary shaft side groove exists in the portion. Here, the portion where the band other than the shaft side groove for locking the band by the dial ring is inserted may be a hole instead of the groove. In this case, for example, in FIG. 58 (j), the shaft has shaft side grooves that pass through the three dial rings and shaft side holes that do not pass through the three dial rings.

  The shaft side groove that does not penetrate the three dial rings, that is, the auxiliary shaft side groove and the shaft side hole are the same in the effect that the shaft cannot be pulled out from the lock body by inserting the locking member. Hereinafter, the thick dotted line portion in the shaft that does not pass through the three dial rings in the figure is described as a groove, that is, a secondary shaft side groove, but the effect is the same even if it is a shaft side hole.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (j), the locking member passes through the shaft twice at the twisted position. Further, as in the case of the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (k), the auxiliary shaft side groove is present on the shaft instead of the position of the shaft side groove and torsion for locking the band by the dial ring, and the locking member crosses the shaft. It is also possible.

  58 (j) and 58 (k) are both formed in a direction different from the shaft insertion / removal direction of the shaft with respect to the lock body. Therefore, the passage of the band is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft with respect to the lock body, and the shaft is locked to the lock body by the band when the band is present in the auxiliary shaft side groove.

  FIG. 58 (l) is a diagram showing a type of dial lock in which a band penetrates in a straight line with respect to a curved shaft.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (l), the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft with respect to the lock body exists on a curve along the curvature of the shaft. In contrast, the band passes straight through the axis. That is, the passage of the band of the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (l) is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft with respect to the lock body. Therefore, the shaft is locked by the band.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 58 (b) to FIG. 58 (e) and FIG. 58 (j) to FIG. 58 (l), the locking member passageway locks the boundary between the lock body and the shaft at the position of the shaft side surface. When the locking member is present in a portion that crosses the boundary in a direction different from the direction in which the shaft is inserted into and removed from the main body, the shaft cannot be pulled out of the lock body regardless of the presence or absence of the main body side groove.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (f) to 58 (i) and 58 (m), even when the locking member passage does not cross the boundary between the lock body and the shaft at the position of the shaft side surface, Is formed in a direction different from the shaft insertion / removal direction by forming a part of the hole or hole formed by the shaft side groove and the body side groove in a direction different from the shaft insertion / removal direction with respect to the lock body. The locking member that exists in the shaft-side groove portion exists over the body-side groove portion, or the shaft-side groove portion that is formed in a direction different from the shaft insertion / extraction direction exists in the shaft-side groove portion on the shaft extraction side. Since the engaging member that extends over the main body side groove exists, the shaft cannot be pulled out from the lock main body.

  FIG. 58 (m) is a diagram showing a type of dial lock in which a part of the band is bent and penetrates the shaft.

  That is, in the dial lock shown in FIG. 58 (m), a part of the passage of the band is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft with respect to the lock body. Even in this case, when the band exists in the bent part across the shaft side groove and the main body side groove, the shaft is locked by the band.

  Further, if a groove or hole through which the locking member passes is present on the shaft side as shown in FIG. 58 (j), FIG. 58 (k), or FIG. 59 (g) described later, the shaft member is provided in the lock body. Since it can lock so that it may not rotate, the directionality of the locking member with respect to the lock body can be determined by the shaft-side groove. Further, the locking of the concavo-convex portion of the locking member is by a dial ring, and the lock body is not directly involved. Therefore, it can be said that the main body side groove is not necessarily an element necessary for the structure of the dial lock.

  Also, if there is no main body side groove and there is a part different from the shaft member extraction direction in the range where there are a plurality of dial rings on the shaft side groove, for example, the engagement member is locked with the dial ring. Without the deformability of the stop member, the shaft member cannot be extracted from the lock body.

  Therefore, a locking device that can be disassembled and assembled only when unlocking can be realized by the shape of the shaft-side groove or shaft-side hole, which is the smallest element forming the passage of the locking member.

  Specifically, at least a part of the shaft-side groove or shaft-side hole forming the passage of the locking member is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, and the passage of the locking member is formed on the shaft side surface. By crossing the shaft member at the position, even if the shaft side groove penetrates the shaft member, when the locking member is locked by the dial ring, the shaft member of the dial ring is locked to the lock body. Further, when the locking of the locking member by the dial ring is released and the locking member is removed from the shaft side groove or the shaft side hole, the lock of the shaft member with respect to the lock body can be released.

  Further, when the main body side groove exists, at least a part of the hole or hole formed by the shaft side groove and the main body side groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, and the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member The locking member that exists in the shaft-side groove portion that is formed in a direction different from that of the shaft-side member exists across the body-side groove, or the shaft-side groove portion that is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member. Since the locking member present in the shaft-side groove portion on the extraction side extends over the body-side groove, the shaft member cannot be extracted. That is, with a simple mechanism called a main body side groove, a safe locking device that cannot be disassembled during locking can be configured even if the passage of the locking member does not cross the shaft member at the position of the shaft side surface.

  Further, in the locking device, as in the case of the dial lock shown in FIG. 26A, a portion (hereinafter referred to as “locking portion”) that is locked to a locking dial ring of a locking member such as a band is a shaft. Or it can also be set as the form which does not penetrate a lock | rock main body.

  Therefore, a structure that allows disassembly only when unlocked in a locking device in which the locking portion of the locking member does not penetrate the shaft or the lock body will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a difference in the path of the band with respect to the shaft and the lock body of the dial lock in which the locking portion of the locking member does not penetrate the shaft or the lock body. Each of FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (h) is a top view of the dial lock, and is a view as seen from the direction in which the notch portion of the dial ring is present when unlocked. The dotted line present in FIG. 4 represents the locking portion of the locking member.

  The dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b) exists at one location so that the locking portion crosses the boundary between the shaft and the lock body. In the type shown in FIG. 59A, the locking portion does not penetrate the shaft, and in the type shown in FIG. The type shown in FIG. 59 (c) exists in two places so that the locking part crosses the boundary between the shaft and the lock body. Moreover, the latching | locking part has penetrated the axis | shaft.

  In addition, the site | part of the lock body in which the head of the latching | locking part of a latching member is inserted after penetrating a shaft is called insertion part. Moreover, the insertion part exists in the position following the edge part of the shaft side groove | channel on the periphery of an axis | shaft.

  In the dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (c), as in the type shown in FIG. 58 (b) and the like, the locking portion crosses the boundary between the shaft and the lock body at least at one place. Exist. That is, the locking part exists over the shaft side groove and the insertion part that follows. Therefore, the shaft cannot be removed from the lock body during locking. Even when unlocked, the shaft cannot be removed from the lock body if the locking portion is not completely removed from the shaft.

  In the dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (d) and 59 (e), there is no portion where the locking portion exists only in the lock body, and the locking portion exists in the shaft side groove and the body side groove. In the type shown in FIG. 59 (d), the locking portion does not pass through the shaft, and in the type shown in FIG. 59 (e), the shaft-side groove passes through the shaft.

  These dial locks shown in FIGS. 59 (d) and 59 (e) are similar to the type shown in FIG. 58 (f) and the like, and the axial groove and the main body groove are not parallel to the axial direction, and the locking member is Since there exists a portion that extends across the shaft side groove and the main body side groove, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body during locking. Even when unlocked, the shaft cannot be removed from the lock body if the locking portion is not completely removed from the shaft.

  As described above, even in a locking device in which the locking portion does not penetrate the shaft or the lock body, a structure that allows disassembly only when unlocking can be provided. That is, the locking device that locks the locking member at a specific position, not the locking device that locks the locking member at an arbitrary position, like the dial lock 1 of the first embodiment and the dial lock 2 of the second embodiment. Also, by adopting the structure of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (e), disassembly / assembly can be made possible only at the time of unlocking.

  In addition, a locking device that can be disassembled and assembled only when unlocked even when the locking portion of the locking member is not a straight line as in the case of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (e). Can be realized.

  FIG. 59 (f) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which the locking member passage is curved. Specifically, the shaft-side groove for the locking member that is locked at a specific position is curved, the locking portion of the locking member is inserted into the shaft-side groove in a curved state, and the tip of the locking portion is the lock body. Is plugged into the plug.

  FIG. 59 (g) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which the locking portion of the locking member does not penetrate the shaft, and the other portion of the locking member penetrates the shaft.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 59 (h) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which a locking portion of the locking member does not penetrate the shaft and a part of the passage is bent.

  That is, in the dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (f) to 59 (h), at least a part of the shaft side groove or the shaft side hole forming the passage of the locking member is different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body. Is formed in the direction. Therefore, the dial lock shown in FIGS. 59 (f) to 59 (h) also has a structure in which the lock of the shaft member with respect to the lock body can be released by removing the locking member from the shaft side groove or shaft side hole. .

  In addition, each type of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (m) and FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (h) described above has a locking portion in the shaft, and a part or all of the dial lock is a shaft. The direction is not parallel to the direction. As a result, the shaft cannot be removed from the lock body even when there is no dedicated member for restricting the movement of the shaft when the shaft is extracted, and the locking device can be disassembled only when unlocked. Moreover, it is not necessary to separately use parts for preventing the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body, and reassembly after disassembly is easy.

  However, even if the locking device has a structure in which the locking portion exists in the shaft in parallel with the shaft, it can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking.

  FIG. 60 shows a lock body and a shaft that can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocking without using a retainer or a pin, even if the locking portion is a dial lock in the shaft parallel to the shaft. It is a figure which shows the relationship of a latching | locking part. The dial lock shown in FIGS. 60A to 60C is a type in which the locking portion does not penetrate the shaft. In these types of dial locks, since the locking portion does not penetrate the shaft, when the shaft is pulled out in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the locking portion, the locking portion is always moved. However, at the time of locking, that is, when the locking portion is locked to the dial ring, the locking portion cannot move and the shaft is not pulled out in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the locking portion.

  FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which the shaft hole of the lock body passes through the lock body. In this case, it is possible to prevent the shaft from being pulled out in the insertion direction of the locking portion by forming the shaft in a tapered shape and the shaft hole of the lock body in a corresponding shape.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram showing a dial lock in which the shaft hole of the lock body does not penetrate the lock body. Since the shaft hole does not penetrate the lock body, the shaft is not pulled out in the insertion direction of the locking portion. Moreover, by attaching a hook to the shaft, the shaft can be easily pulled out at the time of unlocking.

  FIG.60 (c) is a figure which shows the dial lock in which the hole for pushing out a axis | shaft was provided in the lock | rock main body shown in FIG.60 (b). At the time of unlocking, the shaft can be pushed out from this hole with a stick or the like. Further, except for this hole, it has the same structure as the dial lock shown in FIG. 60 (b), and the shaft cannot be pulled out during locking.

  The dial lock shown in FIGS. 60 (d) to 60 (f) is a type in which the locking portion penetrates the shaft. In these types of dial locks, since the locking portion penetrates the shaft, when the shaft is pulled out in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the locking portion, the locking portion is not moved. That is, even if the locking portion is locked to the dial ring, the shaft may be extracted from the lock body.

  FIG. 60 (d) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which a shaft hole penetrates the lock body and a hook for preventing the shaft from being pulled out is provided in the locking portion. In this case, it is possible to prevent the shaft from being pulled out in the insertion direction of the locking portion by forming the shaft in a tapered shape and the shaft hole of the lock body in a corresponding shape. Further, when the locking portion is locked to the dial ring by the hook provided in the locking portion, the shaft cannot be extracted in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the locking portion.

  FIG. 60 (e) is a diagram showing a dial lock in which a shaft hole does not penetrate the lock body and a hook for preventing the shaft from being pulled out is provided at the locking portion. Since the shaft hole does not penetrate the lock body, the shaft is not pulled out in the insertion direction of the locking portion. Further, when the locking portion is locked to the dial ring by the hook provided in the locking portion, the shaft cannot be extracted in the direction opposite to the insertion direction of the locking portion. When the locking of the locking portion is released, that is, when unlocking, the shaft can be extracted from the lock body using the hook provided on the shaft.

  Fig. 60 (f) is a view showing a type in which a hole for pushing out the shaft is provided in the lock body shown in Fig. 60 (e). The shaft can be pushed out from this hole with a stick or the like when unlocked. Moreover, except that there are no wrinkles in the hole and the shaft, the structure is the same as that of the dial lock shown in FIG. 60 (e), and the shaft cannot be pulled out during locking.

  As described above, the locking device can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking, even if the locking portion is in the shaft in parallel with the shaft. Further, it is not necessary to separately use parts for preventing the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body, and reassembly is easy.

  In addition, when the dial lock is viewed from above, even when the locking member such as a band is parallel to the axial direction, a form that is not parallel to the axial direction when the dial lock is viewed from the front is also conceivable.

  For example, when the shaft-side groove of the shaft is inclined downward with respect to the shaft insertion direction or when the shaft-side groove is shaped to move away from the axial direction from the middle, the band is loosely tightened and locked. There is a possibility that the shaft may be pulled out from the body, but in the case of a dial lock where the locking portion is locked at a fixed position, the structure shown in FIG. Can be. In addition to the case of a band type dial lock that can be locked at an arbitrary position, a structure that can be disassembled and reassembled only at the time of unlocking by using a shaft retaining member other than a retainer or a pin as shown in FIGS. 114 to 117 described later. can do.

  It is also possible to use a dial ring or the like in the locking device of the present invention and to make the dial lock have a structure without a shaft. For example, the shaft 300 can be eliminated from the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. The band 400 is locked in the dial lock 1 because the convex portion 401 of the band 400 abuts the side surface perpendicular to the rotation axis of the locking dial ring 200.

  When the shaft is removed from the dial lock 1, for example, a member that rotatably supports the lock dial ring 200 so that the lock dial ring 200 does not come off the lock body 100 even when the band 400 is not inserted. May be provided in the lock body 100.

  Further, in order to make it easier to rotate the lock dial ring 200 around the band main body of the band 400, a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the band main body of the band 400 has a locking portion 532 shown in FIG. It may be rounded like a cross section.

  FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of a dial lock that eliminates the shaft from the dial lock 1 and enables disassembly and reassembly only when unlocked. FIG. 61A (a) is a diagram showing the structure and assembly procedure of the dial lock, and FIG. 61A (b) is a diagram showing a side surface and an upper surface of the dial lock after assembly. FIG. 61A (c) is a diagram showing the structure of the dial lock when the band main body does not penetrate the lock main body in the dial lock that has no shaft and can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked. In addition, the dotted line in each figure is a line for showing the internal structure of each member.

  As shown in FIG. 61A (a), the dial lock is assembled by a lock body 920, three lock dial rings 231 and a sub member 921. The lock body 920 has one storage portion that is a space for storing a plurality of dial rings. Further, in the three lock dial rings 231, as in the lock dial ring shown in FIG. 14, the thickness near the center is thinner than the thickness on the peripheral side. 61A (a) is a side view of the locking dial ring 231, and a portion near the center where dots are present is located behind the surrounding portion.

  The sub member 921 has a thread, and on the left side of the lock body 920, there is a space that fits the shape of the sub member 921 and a screw groove into which the sub member 921 is screwed.

  First, (1) three lock dial rings 231 are inserted from the left side of the lock body 920. (2) Screw the sub-member 921 from the left side of the lock body 920 while rotating it. The dial lock is assembled by the above procedure.

  FIG. 61A (b) is a diagram showing an outline of the dial lock completed by the above procedure, and is a left side view, a top view, and a right side view from the left.

  As shown in the top view, irregularities for locking the band are formed inside the three lock dial rings 231. Further, although there is no shaft, each of the three lock dial rings 231 is supported by the lock body 920 so as to be rotatable around the periphery thereof.

  In this state, when the band main body passes through the sub member 921, the sub member 921 cannot rotate with respect to the lock main body 920. Therefore, the sub member 921 cannot be removed from the lock body 920. The sub member 921 serves as a lid for preventing the three lock dial rings 231 from being taken out from the lock body 920. Therefore, the lock dial ring 231 cannot be removed from the lock body.

  Therefore, the dial lock shown in FIG. 61A (b) is a dial lock that can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked.

  The lock main body may have a structure in which the band main body does not penetrate the lock main body as in the lock main body 920a of FIG. 61A (c). In FIG. 61A (c), the insertion hole 920b is a hole inside the lock body 920a, and the band head is inserted into this hole. Further, the insertion hole 920b does not reach the right side of the lock body 920a. The dial lock having such a structure can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked.

  A member such as the sub member 921 that is screwed so that the dial ring does not come off and that is turned around the lock body can be made of a type that does not have a dial ring shaft, and the shaft is integrated with the lock body. It is also possible to make a type that is a type or a type in which a shaft is incorporated into the lock body.

  That is, the shaft is inserted into the lock body from the same direction as the direction in which the dial ring is inserted into the lock body, and only a part of the shaft is inserted into the shaft insertion hole or the shaft insertion in the relationship shown in FIGS. If the shaft is inserted into the hole and fixed, the shaft cannot pass to the left side of the lock body, so after inserting the shaft into the lock body, pass the dial ring through the shaft to lock the lid member. As shown in Fig. 61A, which has no shaft, it can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked by locking the dial ring with the locking member passing through the lid member, as shown in Fig. 61A. It becomes. Further, it can be applied to a biaxial type dial lock such as the dial lock 2, and if the recessed portion into which the shaft is fitted is formed inside the screw-type lid member, the shaft can be further stabilized. Get better.

  Also, in the dial lock 2, by using a member that supports the ring constituting the dial lock 2 so as to be rotatable around the ring in the lock body, or by supporting the ring rotatably around the ring, It is possible to eliminate the axis.

  FIG. 61B is a diagram showing another example of a dial lock that eliminates the shaft from the dial lock 1 and allows disassembly and reassembly only when unlocked.

  FIG. 61B (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock that includes a screw-type sub member and has a curved band passage.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 61B (a) includes a sub member 921 as in the case of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 61A (a) and 61A (b). However, unlike the dial lock shown in FIGS. 61A (a) and 61A (b), the auxiliary member 921 has a secondary hole 921a that penetrates the band. The through hole 920c through which the band of the lock body 920 passes is also curved.

  Further, the sub hole 921a and the through hole 920c are curved through the respective holes so that the dial ring cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, as described with reference to FIGS. 13D to 13G, the notch that is a part for unlocking the dial ring is provided through the sub hole 921a and the through hole 920c that are the passages of the band. I cannot peek at the position of the part. Thereby, unauthorized unlocking can be prevented.

  In the dial lock shown in FIGS. 61A (a) to 61A (c) and 61B (a), the sub member has a thread and the lock body has a thread groove. However, the sub member may have a thread groove, and the lock body may have a thread. This is not limited to the relationship between the sub member and the lock body, and is the same for the shaft and the lock body in the dial lock shown in FIGS. 46B (a) to 46B (d), for example. That is, in order for two members to be coupled in a threaded manner, one has a thread and the other has a thread groove having a shape corresponding to the thread.

  FIG. 61B (b) is a diagram illustrating an outline of a configuration of a locking device including a plug-in type sub member instead of a screw type. The left view of FIG. 61B (b) is a left side view of the lock body 922. FIG. The dot portion is a portion including a through hole 922a that is visible in the back when the lock body is viewed from the left.

  The sub member 923 is inserted into the lock body 922 from the front surface of the lock body 922 as shown by the arrows in the figure. The lock body 922 has an engagement groove or an engagement projection for inserting the sub member 923, and the sub member 923 has an engagement portion corresponding to the engagement groove or the engagement projection. Yes.

  FIG. 61B (c) is a diagram showing an outline of the shape of the sub member 923. The dot part in the right figure represents a surface located deeper as it is denser.

  Further, the sub member 923 has a sub hole that allows the locking member to pass therethrough, and the locking member inserted from the sub hole passes through a dial ring (not shown), and passes through the through hole 922a of the lock main body 922, thereby locking the lock body. Come out of the outside. Further, the locking member is locked to the dial ring at an arbitrary position.

  In this state, the sub member 923 cannot be removed from the lock body. That is, the direction in which the sub member 923 is inserted into the lock body 922 is different from the insertion / extraction direction of the locking member with respect to the lock body 923.

  As described above, the sub member 923 cannot be removed at the time of locking, but the sub member 923 can be removed at the time of unlocking, and the dial ring can also be taken out from the lock body 922.

  In this way, it is possible to realize a locking device that can be disassembled and assembled only at the time of unlocking, even if it is not a screw-type sub member but a plug-in type sub member.

  Further, even when a plug-in type sub member is used, the band passage is curved so that the dial ring cannot be visually recognized through the passage as in the case of the dial lock of FIG. 61B (a). Thus, an effect of preventing unauthorized unlocking can be provided.

  FIG. 61B (d) is a diagram showing an outline of another configuration of a dial lock including a plug-in type sub member. As shown in FIG. 61B (d), the sub-hole 923a of the sub-member 923 and the through-hole 922b of the lock body are curved, and the dial ring notch is formed via the sub-hole 923a or the through-hole 922b. You can't peek into.

  FIG. 61C is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock that includes a plug-in type sub member and that is locked at a specific position.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 61C (a) includes a lock body 924, a locking member 925, three lock dial rings 231 and a plug-in type sub member 926.

  The dial lock is assembled by (1) loading three lock dial rings 231 into the lock body 924 and (2) inserting the sub member 926 into the lock body 924.

  FIG. 61C (b) is a left side view of the lock body 924, and shows that the denser the dots in the figure are, the deeper the surface is located. FIG. 61C (c) is a diagram illustrating an outline of the shape of the sub member 926, and the dots in the right diagram indicate that the denser the surface is, the deeper the surface is located. As shown in FIG. 61C (c), the sub member 926 has a sub hole through which the locking member passes.

  Similarly to the lock body 922 and the sub member 923 shown in FIG. 61B (b), the lock body 924 and the sub member 926 are detachably coupled by an engagement groove or the like. The insertion direction when attaching the sub member 926 to the lock body 924 is different from the insertion / extraction direction of the locking member 925 with respect to the lock body 924. Thereby, when the locking member 925 passes through the sub member 926 inserted into the lock body 924, the sub member 926 cannot be removed from the lock body 924. Further, the locking member 925 has a hook at the rear end, and when locking, the auxiliary hole of the auxiliary member 926 is covered with the hook, so that the unlocking by looking into the notch portion of the dial ring from the auxiliary hole is unlocked. Can be prevented.

  The sub member 926 serves to cover the lock body so that the lock dial ring 231 does not move to the outside of the lock body 924. Therefore, the dial lock shown in FIG. 61C (a) is a locking device that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 61C (e) includes a lock body 924, a shaft 927, a locking member 929, three locking dial rings 231 and a plug-in type sub member 928. That is, unlike the dial lock shown in FIG. 61C (a), the shaft 927 which is the rotation shaft of the lock dial ring 231 is provided.

  In this dial lock, (1) the shaft 927 is inserted into a portion for attaching the shaft 927 of the lock body, and (2) three lock dial rings 231 are loaded into the lock body 924 while passing through the shaft 927. The Further, (3) the auxiliary member 928 is assembled by being inserted into the lock body 924.

  FIG. 61C (f) is a diagram showing an outline of the shape of the sub member 928, and the dots in the right diagram indicate that the denser the surface is, the deeper the surface is located. As shown in FIG. 61C (f), the sub member 928 has a sub hole through which the locking member passes. The shaft 927 has a shaft-side groove into which the locking member 929 is inserted and does not penetrate the shaft.

  Further, the lock main body 924 and the sub member 928 are detachably coupled by an engagement groove or the like, like the dial lock shown in FIG. 61C (a). Further, the insertion direction when attaching the sub member 928 to the lock body 924 is different from the insertion / extraction direction of the locking member 929 with respect to the lock body 924. Thus, when the locking member 929 passes through the sub member 928 inserted into the lock body 924, the sub member 928 cannot be removed from the lock body 924.

  The sub member 928 serves to cover the lock body so that the lock dial ring 231 does not move to the outside of the lock body 924. Therefore, the dial lock shown in FIG. 61C (e) is also a locking device that can be disassembled only when unlocked. Further, the locking member 929 has a hook at the rear end, and when locked, the auxiliary hole of the auxiliary member 928 is covered by the hook, so that the unauthorized opening when looking at the notch of the dial ring from the auxiliary hole is unlocked. Can be prevented.

  FIG. 61C (g) is a diagram showing a shaft 927 having a screw thread on the shaft head. In this way, when the shaft 927 has a thread, if the portion for attaching the shaft 927 of the lock body has a thread groove having a shape corresponding to the thread, the shaft 927 is screwed to the lock body 924. Can be combined. As a result, the shaft 927 is firmly fixed to the lock body 924, and the locking dial ring 231 can be rotated more stably. Furthermore, if the shaft 927 and the lock body 924 are formed with a groove and a hole through which the locking member can pass, it becomes a dial lock capable of locking a long locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position. . Also in this case, by sufficiently bending or bending the locking member passage, it is possible to prevent unauthorized unlocking by looking into the notch portion of the dial ring from the end of the passage and to be disassembled only when unlocking. It becomes.

  In FIG. 61C (e), the shaft 927 and the lock body 924 are separate members, but the lock body may have a shaft, and the locking member 929 has a hook at the rear end. At the time of locking, since the auxiliary hole of the auxiliary member 928 is covered and covered with the hook, unauthorized unlocking by looking into the notch of the dial ring from the auxiliary hole can be prevented. Furthermore, if the groove | channel and hole which a locking member can penetrate are made in a lock main body with a shaft, it will become a dial lock which can lock the elongate locking member which can be locked in arbitrary positions. Also in this case, by sufficiently bending or bending the locking member passage, it is possible to prevent unauthorized unlocking by looking into the notch portion of the dial ring from the end of the passage and to be disassembled only when unlocking. It becomes.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the dial lock 2 when the shaft is removed from the dial lock 2. FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing when the dial lock 2 is unlocked without a shaft, and FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing when the dial lock 2 without a shaft is locked. As the locking member, for example, a band 600 shown in FIG. 31 or a band 650 shown in FIG. 41 can be used. The peripheral locking ring 270 with gear and the locking dial ring 295 with gear are rotatably supported by a storage portion provided for storing the dial ring of the lock body 930.

  For convenience of illustration, the lock body 930 is illustrated apart from the lock body 930, but the lock body rear part 745 is a part of the lock body 930, and a locking member is provided between the lock body rear part 745 and the lock body 930. Will pass.

  Thus, by eliminating the shaft from the dial lock, it is possible to reduce the number of parts constituting the dial lock, and to reduce the cost and labor required for assembling the dial lock.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which equips a shaft with a latching | locking part and a shaft is locked by a dial ring. In this case, it is good also as a structure where the axis | shaft locked by the dial ring locks locking members, such as a band.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock using a shaft provided with a locking portion. 63, 67 (a), 67 (b), 68 (a), 68 (b), 69 (a), 69 (b), and 70 (70) referred to in the following description. 70 (a) and 70 (b) are diagrams for explaining the internal structure of the dial lock, and each lock body is illustrated so that a locking member such as a shaft or a band can be seen.

  FIG. 63A is a diagram of the structure of a dial lock using a shaft provided with a locking portion (hereinafter referred to as “shaft with locking portion”) as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the shaft 360 with a locking portion inserted into the lock main body 940 includes three convex portions as locking portions and is locked by three locking dial rings.

  FIG. 63B is a diagram showing an overview of the shaft 360 with a locking portion. The locking portion-equipped shaft 360 includes a large-diameter portion 304a. The large diameter portion 304a is inserted into the lock body 940 while the notch portion 304b is narrowed. The upper view of FIG. 63B is a rear view of the shaft 360 with a locking portion, and the right view of FIG. 63B is a view when the large diameter portion 304a is viewed from the right. As shown in the rear view, a hole through which the band passes is provided in the rear portion of the shaft 360 with the locking portion. This hole is shaped to lock the band. Hereinafter, a hole for locking a locking member such as a band provided on the shaft is referred to as a “locking hole”.

  FIG. 63 (c) is a diagram showing a procedure for setting the dial lock to the locked state. First, (1) the band main body is passed through the locking hole of the shaft 360 with the locking portion, and the band head is pulled to an appropriate position. (2) The locking part-attached shaft 360 is pushed into the lock body 940, the locking dial ring is turned, and the locking part-attached shaft 360 is locked. For example, a band having a convex portion such as the band 400 shown in FIG. Further, as the lock dial ring, for example, a lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5 may be used.

  Further, a spring 941 may be provided in the shaft hole of the lock body 940. In this way, when the dial lock is in the unlocked state, the locking hole is brought out of the lock body 940 by the repulsive force of the spring 941, which is convenient when the band body is inserted and removed from the locking hole.

  FIG. 63D is a diagram showing the structure of the dial lock in the locked state. In this state, the band body cannot be extracted from the locking hole. Further, in the unlocked state, the band main body can be extracted from the locking hole, and the shaft 360 with the locking portion can be locked by pinching the rear portion of the shaft 360 with the locking portion and narrowing the notch 304b. It can be extracted from the body 940. That is, the dial lock can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the shape of the lock body 940. FIG. 64A is a top view and a right view of the lock body 940. 64B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the lock main body 940, and FIG. 64C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of the lock main body 940. As shown in the A-A cross-sectional view, the lock body 940 has a shaft hole into which the shaft portion of the shaft 360 with the locking portion is inserted, and the convex portion of the shaft 360 with the locking portion passes above the shaft hole. And a groove is provided. Further, as shown in the B-B cross-sectional view, the lock main body 940 is provided with a space for accommodating the large-diameter portion 304a of the locking portion-equipped shaft 360.

  FIG. 65 is a view showing the shape of the shaft 360 with a locking portion. FIG. 65A is a top view of the locking portion-equipped shaft 360. FIG. 65B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C-C of the shaft 360 with a locking part, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view along the line DD of the shaft 360 with a locking part. The DD cross-sectional view is a cross-sectional view of a portion where the large-diameter portion 304a and the cutout portion 304b exist, and accommodates the large-diameter portion 304a shown by the BB cross-sectional view of the lock body 940 in FIG. 64 (c). It is a shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of the space.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a procedure for assembling a dial lock using the shaft provided with the above-described locking portion. As shown in FIG. 66, (1) the lock dial ring is inserted into each of the spaces for providing the dial ring of the lock body 940, and (2) the shaft 360 with the locking portion is inserted into the lock body 940. With this procedure, the dial lock is completed, and with the procedure for locking shown in FIG. 63 (c), an article such as an umbrella can be locked while being tightened with a band.

  Further, the above-mentioned shaft 360 with a locking portion has a function as a shaft for rotatably supporting the lock dial ring and a function locked by the lock dial ring. This member may be provided.

  FIG. 67 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a dial lock that includes a shaft that rotatably supports the locking dial ring and a locking plate that includes a locking hole for locking the band. In this case, the band used together with the locking plate serves as a main locking member in the locking device of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), the shaft 370 has a groove for inserting the locking plate 740. The locking plate 740 has a convex portion. The locking plate 740 is inserted into the shaft 370 and the band body is passed through the locking hole. The locking plate 740 is locked by turning the locking dial ring in a state where the band main body is passed through the locking hole. FIG. 67 (b) shows the internal structure of the dial lock shown in FIG. 67 (a).

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 67 (a) may have a structure in which the band main body penetrates the shaft and the locking plate.

  FIG. 68 (a) is a diagram showing a procedure in which the band main body locks the dial lock having a structure penetrating the shaft and the locking plate. The shaft 371 is longer than the shaft 370 shown in FIG. In addition, a band through-hole that is a hole through which the band main body passes in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction is provided in the rear portion of the shaft 371.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), (1) the locking plate 740 is inserted into the shaft 371. (2) The band body is passed through the band through-hole of the shaft 371 and the locking hole of the locking plate 740, and the locking dial ring is turned to lock the locking plate 740.

  FIG. 68 (b) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the dial lock that is locked by the procedure shown in FIG. 68 (a). In this locked state, the band main body cannot be extracted from the locking hole of the locking plate 740, and the shaft 371 cannot be extracted from the lock main body 940.

  In the case of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), a part of the band main body is pulled to the left by the locking hole of the locking plate 740 during locking. In this case, it is conceivable that the dial lock shown in FIG. 67 (b) jumps up in a direction opposite to the direction in which the upper and lower portions of the locking hole are pulled by the locking hole. If this state is repeated many times, the band body will be damaged. However, since the dial lock shown in FIG. 68B penetrates the locking hole in the middle of passing through the shaft 371, the band body does not jump up. That is, the useful life of the band can be extended without damaging the band.

  In the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 1, the band main body of the band 400 penetrates the shaft 300 and the lock main body 100 in the axial direction. However, the dial lock may have a structure in which the band main body passes through the shaft and the lock main body perpendicularly to the axial direction. As shown in FIG. 68 (b), at the time of locking, since the band penetrates the shaft 371, the portion locked by the locking hole of the locking plate 740 of the band main body is pulled to the left side.

  FIG. 69 (a) is a diagram showing a procedure in which the band main body puts the dial lock having a structure penetrating the shaft and the lock main body perpendicularly to the axial direction into a locked state. The basic structure of the dial lock shown in FIG. 69 (a) is the same as that of the dial lock shown in FIG. 63 (a), except that the band body penetrates the lock body. The lock body 946 is provided with a band through hole 946a that is a hole through which the band passes. The shaft 361 with the locking part has a longer rear end than the shaft 360 with the locking part.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a), (1) the band body is passed through the band through-hole 946a of the lock body and the shaft 361 with the locking portion. (2) The locking part-attached shaft 361 is pushed into the lock body 946 side, the locking dial ring is turned, and the locking part-attached shaft 361 is locked.

  FIG. 69 (b) is a diagram showing the internal structure of the dial lock that is locked by the procedure shown in FIG. 69 (a). In this locked state, the band main body cannot be extracted from the locking hole of the locking part-equipped shaft 361, and the locking part-attached shaft 361 cannot be extracted from the locking body 946.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 68 (a) may have a structure in which the band main body passes through the lock main body, the shaft, and the locking plate perpendicular to the axial direction.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a diagram illustrating a procedure in which the band main body locks the dial lock having a structure penetrating the lock main body, the shaft, and the locking plate perpendicular to the axial direction. The basic structure of the dial lock shown in FIG. 70 (a) is the same as that of the dial lock shown in FIG. 68 (a), except that the band main body penetrates the lock main body. Further, the lock body 947 is provided with a band through hole which is a hole through which the band passes. The locking plate 741 has a rear end that is longer than the locking plate 740.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a), the band main body is passed through the band through hole of the lock main body and the locking hole of the locking plate 741. (2) The locking plate 741 is pushed into the lock body 947 side, the locking dial ring is turned, and the locking plate 741 is locked.

  FIG.70 (b) is a figure which shows the internal structure of the dial lock locked in the procedure shown to Fig.70 (a). In this locked state, the band main body cannot be extracted from the locking hole of the locking plate 741, and the locking plate 741 is locked by the locking dial ring, so that the shaft 372 is extracted from the locking body 947. I can't.

  As described above, in the locking device of the present invention, the shaft with the locking portion or the locking plate is locked to the locking dial ring, and the band as the locking member is locked by the locked shaft with the locking portion or the locking plate. It may be a form. Even these types of locking devices can be disassembled only when unlocked, and reassembly can be repeated.

  Further, the locking portion-attached shaft 360 and the locking portion-attached shaft 361 itself may be disassembled.

  FIG. 71A is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the separable shaft 360 with a locking portion, and FIG. 71B is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of the separable shaft 361 with a locking portion. is there. The shaft with the locking portion has a convex portion for serving as a locking portion. There is a high possibility that the convex portion will be damaged by deformation, cracking, etc., by repeatedly engaging the locking dial ring. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), by disassembling the part having the convex part of the shaft with the locking part and the other part, the convex part is damaged. When received, the portion having the convex portion can be exchanged. Furthermore, since the large diameter portion is divided and can be inserted into the lock body separately, it is easy to insert into the lock body. This is because if the large-diameter portion is not separable, even if the shaft rear part with the large-diameter portion is deformed to reduce the diameter near the large-diameter portion, the inner diameter of the shaft hole of the lock body or the insertion hole of the shaft hole On the other hand, it is assumed that it is not sufficiently small and the large diameter part is difficult to pass through the insertion hole, but if the large diameter part can be divided, the divided large diameter part passes separately through the insertion hole. Because you can.

  Further, the locking portion-equipped shaft 360 and the locking portion-equipped shaft 361 have a locking hole for locking a convex portion such as the band 400. However, the band of another band can be locked by changing the shape of the locking hole.

  FIG. 72 (a) is a top view of a shaft 362 with a locking portion for locking a locking member other than a band having a clear convex portion. Fig. 72 (b) is an enlarged view of the rear portion of the shaft 362 with the locking portion shown in Fig. 72 (a) when viewed from the front. FIG. 72 (c) is an enlarged view when seen from above the rear part of the shaft 362 with the locking part shown in FIG. 72 (a). As shown in FIGS. 72 (b) and 72 (c), a protrusion 363 made up of a plurality of fine protrusions is provided on the periphery of the locking hole in the rear portion of the shaft 362 with the locking portion.

  The locking part-equipped shaft 362 can lock, for example, a locking member having fine irregularities by the protrusion 363.

  FIG. 73A is a diagram illustrating an example of a band corresponding to the locking portion-equipped shaft 362. A band 760 shown in FIG. 73A has a net-like surface. That is, the uneven part by the mesh is formed on the surface. The uneven portion has a shape corresponding to the protrusion 363, and the band 760 is locked by the protrusion 363.

  73 (b), 73 (c), 73 (d), and 73 (e) are respectively a cross-sectional view along AA, a cross-sectional view along BB, and a cross-sectional view along C1-C1 (C2-C2). And DD sectional view. As each sectional view shows, the band 760 has a cylindrical shape as a whole.

  FIG. 73 (f) is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the protrusion 363 of the locking portion-equipped shaft 362 and the cross section of the band 760. Note that the cross section of the band 760 shown in FIG. 73 (f) is a hatched portion in a locking hole provided with a protrusion 363 on the periphery. The shaded area represents a cross-sectional view taken along C1-C1 (C2-C2).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (f), the locking hole of the locking portion-equipped shaft 362 has an elliptical shape, and has a protrusion 363 on the periphery thereof. Therefore, the mesh on the surface of the band 760 having a circular cross section is firmly locked by the protrusion 363. Further, the band 760 can be locked at substantially any position. That is, in the locking device using the locking portion-equipped shaft 362 and the band 760, the band 760 can be locked more precisely at a position desired by the user.

  Moreover, the band of another shape can be latched by changing the shape of the latching hole of the shaft 362 with the latching portion.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing another example of a band corresponding to the one in which the shape of the locking hole of the locking portion-equipped shaft 362 is changed. A band 761 shown in FIG. 74A has a net-like surface like the band 760.

  74 (b), 74 (c), 74 (d) and 74 (e) are respectively a cross-sectional view along AA, a cross-sectional view along BB, and a cross-sectional view along C1-C1 (C2-C2). And DD sectional view. As each cross-sectional view shows, the band 761 has a rectangular cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, like the band 400 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 74 (f) is a diagram showing the shape of a locking hole for locking the band 761. As shown in FIG. 74 (f), the band 761 is firmly locked by making the locking hole rectangular and disposing the protrusion 363 on one side of the rectangle.

  Further, the protrusion 363 may not be provided in the locking hole of the locking portion-equipped shaft 362, and the locking member may be locked using the unevenness of the locking member such as a band.

  Further, as a locking member locked to the locking portion-equipped shaft 362, a member other than the locking member having a mesh-like surface such as a band 760 shown in FIG. 73 (a) may be used. . For example, in the case of a locking member having elasticity such as rubber, the locking member can be locked by engaging the locking hole or the protrusion 363 of the locking hole into the surface of the locking member.

  FIG. 75A is a top view of the locking portion-equipped shaft 364 that does not have the protruding portion 363 in the locking hole.

  FIG. 75 (b) is an enlarged front view of the rear portion of the shaft 364 with the locking portion shown in FIG. 75 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), the locking hole of the locking part-equipped shaft 364 has an elliptical system similar to the locking hole of the locking part-attached shaft 362, but is provided with a protrusion 363. Absent.

  FIG. 76A shows an example of a band corresponding to the locking portion-equipped shaft 364. A band 762 shown in FIG. 76A has a shape in which two types of cylinders 762b and 762c having different outer diameters are repeated. Moreover, it has the stopper 762a and the coupling member 762d.

  FIG. 76B is a diagram showing the configuration of the band 762. As shown in FIG. 76 (b), the band 762 includes a core member 762e that penetrates the plurality of cylinders 762b and 762c and is coupled to the stopper 762a by the coupling member 762d as a constituent element.

  As shown in the portion surrounded by the dotted line in FIG. 76B, the stopper 762a has a thread groove, and the coupling member 762d has a thread corresponding to the thread groove. The coupling member 762d has a claw 762f for biting into and holding the core material 762e. The core material 762e in which the cylinder 762b and the cylinder 762c are alternately passed is further passed through the hole of the mounting member 762d. When the coupling member 762d is screwed into the stopper 762a in this state, the inner diameter of the hole of the coupling member 762d is reduced, and the claw 762f bites into the core member 762e. Thus, the coupling member 762d can couple the core material 762e and the stopper 762a, and the band 762 is assembled.

  For example, the band 762 can be used in place of the band 400 in the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. FIG. 76C is a side view of the lock body 100 corresponding to the band 762 and a side view of the lock dial ring 200.

  76 (c), the lock body side band groove 104 of the lock body and the shaft side band groove 302 of the shaft 300 form a cylinder through which the band body of the band 762 can pass. Change the shape. Also, the ring-side band groove 202 of the locking dial ring 200 is changed to an arc according to the shape of the band main body of the band 762. By doing so, the band 762 can be used for the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. Further, the dial lock 1 can lock an article such as an umbrella.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 69 (a), the lock body 946 is provided with a band through hole 946a through which the band penetrates the lock body 946 perpendicular to the axial direction. However, a groove may be provided in the lock body 946 instead of a hole for the band to penetrate the lock body 946.

  FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the dial lock shown in FIG. 69 (a). FIG. 77 (b) is a right side view of the dial lock shown in FIG. 77 (a). As shown in FIG. 77 (a), when the dial lock is viewed from the front, the band head outlet of the band through-hole 946a can be seen. As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the band through-hole 946a is a “hole” from the rear to the front of the lock main body 946, and therefore its presence cannot be recognized from the right side.

  FIG. 77 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of the dial lock shown in FIG. 77 (a). As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the band through-hole 946a exists perpendicularly to the axial direction from the rear to the front of the lock body 946.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of a dial lock using a lock body provided with a band through groove 946b instead of the band through hole 946a. As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the dial lock is viewed from the front, the band head outlet of the band penetration groove 946b can be seen. Further, unlike the band through-hole 946a, the outlet is not closed but has an opening.

  FIG. 78 (b) is a right side view of the dial lock shown in FIG. 78 (a). As shown in FIG. 78 (b), the existence of the band through groove 946b can be recognized from the right side.

  Fig. 78 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA of the dial lock shown in Fig. 78 (a). As shown in FIG. 78 (c), the band through groove 946b exists perpendicularly to the axial direction from the rear to the front of the lock body 946.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) to 78 (c), the band through groove 946b is a “groove”. However, the band through groove 946b is formed so that the band used for the dial lock does not come off the band through groove 946b. What is necessary is just to determine the width | variety of an opening part.

  As described above, the band may be a groove instead of a hole for the band to penetrate the lock body. Thereby, for example, the manufacturer can select the hole or the groove according to the manufacturing cost when manufacturing the lock body.

  69 (a), 70 (a), and 78 (c), the band is configured to penetrate the shaft and the lock body perpendicular to the axial direction, but the path through which the lock body portion of the band penetrates. May be curved or inclined to reduce the load on the band. That is, the path in the lock body does not have to be straight as long as the path near the axis is a structure that is nearly perpendicular to the axial direction.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 69A and the like, the band is not directly locked by the locking dial ring but is locked by a member locked by the locking dial ring.

  However, the member for locking the band may be other than the dial ring. For example, another locking device may be provided in the lock body, and the locking device may lock a member that locks the band.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating an example of a locking device having a structure in which a locking device other than the dial lock locks a member that locks the band.

  The lock body 948 a includes a cylinder lock 1100. The band locking member 365, which is a member that locks the band, has a locking hole 365a, and is locked by the cylinder lock 1100 by inserting a projection of the cylinder lock 1100 into the locking hole 365a. The The band is locked by a band locking member 365. A vertically long rectangle on the upper surface of the cylinder lock is a key hole of the cylinder lock 1100.

  The lock main body 948b includes a cylinder lock 1100 as in the case of the lock main body 948a, but the installed angle is different from the cylinder lock of the lock main body 948a. In the case of the lock body 948b, the keyhole of the cylinder lock 1100 exists on the left side surface of the lock body 948b.

  The lock body 948 c includes a card lock 1101. The band locking member 365 is locked by the card lock 1101. The band is locked by a band locking member 365. A horizontally long rectangle of the card lock 1101 is a card insertion hole of the card lock 1101.

  The lock body 948d includes a band locking member 1102 having a function as a cylinder lock. The lock body has a locking hole 948e. The lock body 948d locks the band locking member 1102 by inserting the protrusion of the band locking member 1102 into the locking hole 948e.

  Moreover, you may improve crime prevention performance, for example using a dial ring and a cylinder lock for a locking device.

  The lock body 948f includes a cylinder lock shaft 367 and three dial rings which are shafts having a cylinder lock function. The cylinder lock shaft 367 is locked by a dial ring, and is locked to the lock body 948f by inserting the protrusion of the cylinder lock shaft 367 into the lock hole 948g of the lock body 948f.

  As described above, the locking device other than the dial lock can lock the band locking member. The locking device for locking the band locking member may be a locking device other than the above-described cylinder lock and card lock.

  In Embodiments 1 and 2, the lock body has a space for attaching a dial ring as many as the number of dial rings to be attached. For example, the lock main body 100 of the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 5 has three dial attachment portions 105, and a lock dial ring 200 is attached to each of them by a shaft 300. However, one space may be used without dividing each space.

  FIG. 80 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lock body having one space for attaching a plurality of dial rings. As shown in FIG. 80A, a plurality of locking dial rings 235 can be brought into contact with each other and attached to the lock body 950. Therefore, when the width (x2) of the lock dial ring 235 is the same as that of the lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5, for example, the width (x1) of the lock body 950 is changed to the axial direction of the lock body 100 shown in FIG. It becomes possible to make it shorter than the length of. In this case, the inner width of the locking dial ring 235 (the width corresponding to W1 shown in FIG. 14C) is made shorter than the outer width (the width corresponding to W2 shown in FIG. 14C). Furthermore, the unevenness interval of the band to be used may be matched with the unevenness interval inside the lock dial ring 235 formed when a plurality of the lock dial rings 235 are arranged. By doing so, for example, a more compact dial lock can be provided.

  Fig. 80 (b) is a diagram showing another example of the lock body having one space for attaching a plurality of dial rings. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), when the width (x3) of the lock body 951 is the same as the axial length of the lock body 100 shown in FIG. 5, for example, the width (x4) of the lock dial ring 236 that can be used. ) Can be made longer than the width of the lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG.

  By increasing the width of the dial ring, it becomes easy to perform marking, printing, etc. on the surface.

  In addition, as described above, in the case of a lock body that can be mounted by contacting a plurality of dial rings, a dial ring with various widths and a band in which the unevenness of the band body is changed to fit the dial ring. By providing the dial lock, the user of the dial lock can freely change the dial ring to 2, 3, 4, etc. without changing the lock body and the shaft.

  Further, even if the lock body has only one space for attaching the dial ring, the positional relationship between the band, the shaft and the lock body shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (k) and 58 (m). Thus, it is possible to configure a dial lock in which the shaft cannot be removed from the lock body even when the band is loosely tightened.

  FIG. 81 (a) is a diagram showing an overview of the lock body 951 and the shaft 380 that have only one space for attaching the dial ring. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the lock body 951 is provided with a guide 951a for fixing the position of the shaft in the circumferential direction. The shaft 380 has a cylindrical shape as a whole, and a guide groove 380a corresponding to the guide 951a exists in the axial direction. For simplification of illustration, the illustration of the lock-side band grooves of the lock body 951 and the shaft 380 is omitted.

  Since the guide groove 380a of the shaft 380 exists over the entire width in the axial direction, the guide groove 380a can be inserted and extracted from either the left or right side of the lock body 951. This is the same even if the space for attaching the dial ring is divided into a plurality of spaces. However, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), when the shaft side band groove 380b and the lock body side band groove 951b are provided in the shaft 380 and the lock body 951 so as not to be parallel to the axial direction, When the band path shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (i) is taken, as described above, even when the band is loosely tightened during locking, the shaft is positioned on either the left or right side of the lock body. Can not be extracted. Furthermore, even when unlocked, if the band is not completely removed from the shaft 380, the shaft cannot be pulled out to the left or right of the lock body.

  As described above, even when using a lock body with only one space for attaching the dial ring, it is not necessary to use a separate part to prevent the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body. It is possible to configure a locking device that can only be disassembled and can be repeatedly reassembled.

  Also, in the case of a lock body with only one space for attaching the dial ring, a part of the lock body with a shaft, which forms a shaft, can be disassembled only when unlocked and can be repeatedly reassembled. It is possible to produce a simple dial lock.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock that can be disassembled and assembled using a lock body with a shaft. As shown in FIG. 82, three lock dial rings are inserted into the shaft-lock main body 952, and the auxiliary member 953 is inserted into the shaft-lock main body 952 so as to cover the left side surface of the shaft. As a result, a dial lock including three lock dial rings is completed.

  When this dial lock is locked through the band main body, the band main body passes through the sub member 953 and the shaft continuously, so the sub member 953 cannot be pulled forward, so it cannot move to the left side. It cannot be removed from the lock body. That is, even if it is loosely tightened and locked, the structure cannot be disassembled.

  That is, the dial lock shown in FIG. 82 can be disassembled only when unlocked, and can be reassembled repeatedly.

  Here, even when the lock main body and the shaft are independent as in the structure of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 5 and 80 (a), the lock as in the structure of the dial lock shown in FIG. Even when a part of the main body forms a shaft, it is important that a locking member such as a band penetrates the shaft because it can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking.

  The importance of the locking member penetrating the shaft will be described separately for the case where the lock body and the shaft are independent and the case where a part of the lock body forms the shaft. .

(I) When the lock body and the shaft are independent The lock body can be loaded with a dial ring from the direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the rotary shaft of the dial ring at the dial ring loading portion of the lock body. . In addition, when some dial rings (see FIG. 5) or all dial rings (see FIG. 80 (a)) are loaded in the loading site, the loaded dial ring can be used without a shaft or a locking member. The movement in the direction perpendicular to the loading direction (that is, the axial direction when the shaft is present) is limited by the support portion of the shaft of the lock body as a wall.

  When using a lock body that satisfies the above conditions, it is possible to disassemble and assemble the dial part only at the time of unlocking by making the locking member locked at an arbitrary position penetrate the rotating shaft of the dial ring. Is an important structural requirement.

  That is, when the lock body and the shaft are independent, disassembly and assembly can be performed only at the time of unlocking without requiring additional members such as pins and retainers for stopping the shaft as described above. This is for the following reason.

  When the relationship between the lock body and the shaft is the relationship shown in FIGS. 53, 55 to 57 and 81, the locking member moves the shaft and the lock body along the paths shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (i). Once penetrated, the shaft cannot move axially within the lock body independently of the locking member. If the dial ring is rotated and locked in this state, the locking member is locked to the lock body and the shaft is locked to the lock body.

  As a result, a member for stopping the shaft in the lock body can be eliminated, and the dial ring portion can be formed by the minimum components of the lock body, the shaft and the dial ring.

  Further, in the case where the relationship between the lock body and the shaft is the relationship shown in FIG. 54, the locking member is connected to the shaft shown in FIG. 58 (a) as well as the route shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (i). Even if the lock body is penetrated, if the locking member is locked to the lock body by rotating the dial ring, the shaft cannot be rotated relative to the lock body, so the shaft is also locked to the lock body. .

  Further, in the relationship between the shaft and the lock body shown in FIGS. 53 and 55 to 57, when the locking member penetrates the shaft and the lock body through the path shown in FIG. 58 (a), the shaft can be extracted from the lock body. In order to eliminate it, it is necessary to tighten and lock the band without slacking at the time of locking, but in actual locking, it is not slackened and locked so that the shaft is pulled out, which is not a real problem. Further, the relationship between the shaft and the lock body shown in FIGS. 53 and 55 to 57 is established, and each band route in the relationship between the shaft and the lock body other than the band route shown in FIG. Even if the band is locked in a loose state, the shaft is not pulled out from the lock body.

  As a result, the reduction in the number of constituent members makes it possible to reduce manufacturing costs, reduce the time and time required for disassembly and assembly, and reduce the risk of member loss. In addition, the lock body, shaft and dial ring can be disassembled and assembled only when unlocked.

  In this way, the lock body, dial ring, and rotary shaft of the dial ring can be disassembled and assembled only when unlocked without using any members other than the lock body, shaft, dial ring, and locking member in the structure of the lock. Is possible.

  In addition, when the locking part is inserted into the dial lock body and locked at a fixed position, the locking part is used as a shaft when viewed from the direction in which the dial ring notch exists when unlocking as shown in FIG. Being inserted and locked diagonally is a structural feature that allows the lock body, dial ring, and shaft to be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked without a retainer or pin. Of course, it is considered that the same effect can be obtained even if it is not diagonal but parallel to the axial direction, for example, a curved shape such as an arc shape, so that the locking part crosses the boundary between the shaft and the locking body. If inserted, the structure becomes difficult to disassemble during locking.

  Moreover, like the band 400 shown in FIG. 5, the shape of the rear part of the locking member is made larger than the main body part, and a through hole or a groove for mounting the locking member is formed in the lock body itself. This makes it impossible to pull out the tip of the locking member from the through-hole or groove when the locking member main body is locked. The member cannot be disassembled from the lock body. The through holes and grooves will be described later with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97.

  In this way, it is possible to establish a connection between the lock body and the locking member with the minimum constituent members of the lock body and the locking member. By reducing the number of components, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs, reduce the time and time required for disassembly and assembly, and reduce the risk of component loss. In addition, the lock body and the locking member can be detachable only when unlocked.

  In order to prevent the locking member from dropping off from the lock body at the time of unlocking, it is possible that the locking member or the lock body has a structure to be described later with reference to FIG. However, there is no problem even if the rear portion of the locking member is simply locked in the through hole or the groove as long as it is not left unlocked.

  Of course, it is possible to have a structure in which the locking member can be attached to and detached from the lock only when unlocked even if the accessory member, not the lock body itself, forms a through hole or groove.

(Ii) When a part of the lock body forms an axis When a part of the lock body forms an axis like the lock body shown in FIG. 82, a band type dial lock that can be locked at an arbitrary position Then, even if a member for keeping the dial ring such as a pin or a retainer on the shaft is used, it is impossible to prevent the member from being always removed by covering the member with the band. This is because the band is flexible and is locked at an arbitrary position, so that the positional relationship between the band main body and the dial lock is not constant.

  Therefore, it is an important structural requirement that the band penetrates the shaft when disassembling and assembling the dial part only when unlocking. In other words, when the lock body and the shaft are integrated, only one member for keeping the dial ring on the shaft can be disassembled and assembled only at the time of unlocking, as in the auxiliary member 953 shown in FIG. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 82, after inserting the sub member 953 into the lock body, the band is passed through the shaft. In this case, even if it is loosely tightened and locked, it cannot be disassembled, and the sub member 953 cannot be removed from the lock main body 952 with a shaft. As a result, it is possible to produce a band-type dial lock that can be disassembled and assembled and can be replaced only when unlocking, with a minimum number of members. The structure that enables the locking member to be attached to and detached from the lock body may be the same as the structure described in the above description of the case where the lock body and the shaft are independent.

  In addition, when locking the umbrella using a dial lock, a donut-shaped disk-shaped auxiliary tool can be used to create a knob-like bulge in a part of the closed umbrella. However, the auxiliary tool does not have to be disk-shaped.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a plurality of examples of assisting tools. Each of the following auxiliary tools is an example of a large diameter portion forming member in the locking device of the present invention.

  83. Auxiliary tools 50 to 55 shown in FIG. 83 are attached to a portion between the lower lokuro of the middle bar of the umbrella and the bump so that the middle bar enters the center of the auxiliary tool. Thereby, a knob-like bulge can be formed between the lower lokuro of the closed umbrella and the stone protrusion. As a result, it is possible to create a portion where the outer diameter of the cross section perpendicular to the middle bar is narrower than the upper and lower sides between the lower lokuro of the umbrella and the stone bump in the closed state. By locking the thinned part with a band lock with a dial lock, the dial lock cannot be pulled out in the vertical direction of the umbrella. In addition, if the outer diameter of the cross section perpendicular to the center rod of the lower lokuro part is not so large compared to other parts, even if the band is easy to come off even if the band is tightened and locked, use multiple auxiliary tools, It is also possible to lock the band by tightening the band on the narrow part of the umbrella between the attached auxiliary tools.

  The auxiliary tool 50 has a shape in which a donut-shaped object has a notch for attaching to the middle rod of the umbrella. The assisting tool 51 has a shape in which a notch is provided in the assisting tool 50 so that the assisting tool 51 can be easily attached to the middle rod of the umbrella.

  The auxiliary tool 52 has a shape in which a cylindrical object having a bulge has a notch for attaching to the middle rod of the umbrella. The auxiliary tool 53 has a shape in which a cutout portion is provided in the auxiliary tool 52 so that the auxiliary tool 53 can be easily attached to the middle rod of the umbrella. Further, the number of the bulging portions of the auxiliary tool 52 and the auxiliary tool 53 is not limited to one, and there may be two places above and below. In that case, the band can be tightened and locked from above the umbrella between the two bulges.

  The above-described auxiliary tools 50 to 53 are circular as a whole when viewed from above. However, when viewed from above, the auxiliary tool may have a shape constituted by a straight line such as a polygon.

  The auxiliary tool 54 has a hexagonal shape when viewed from above, and the auxiliary tool 55 has a shape in which a cutout portion is provided in the auxiliary tool 54 so that the auxiliary tool 54 can be easily attached to the middle rod of the umbrella.

  Moreover, the shape which forms the center part of an auxiliary tool does not need to be comprised by the curve, and should just be a shape in which a center rod enters the center part of an auxiliary tool.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing another plurality of examples of the auxiliary tool. The auxiliary tool 56 and the auxiliary tool 57 shown in FIG. 84 are each a view when viewed from above. As for the auxiliary tool 56, the center part of the auxiliary tool is comprised by the straight line. In addition, the notch has a shape that is open to the outside, making it easy to attach to the middle rod of the umbrella. The auxiliary tool 57 has the same shape as the auxiliary tool 56 at the center, but the outer shape is a straight line.

  The auxiliary tool 60 is a spiral-shaped auxiliary tool made of an elastic material, for example, plastic, and can insert an umbrella's inner rod or the like from the end into the center of the spiral. Moreover, the magnitude | size of an outer diameter can be adjusted by cutting off at an appropriate place. The auxiliary tool 61 has hooks of hook-and-loop fasteners on the surface, and can be combined with a belt member 61a having loops of hook-and-loop fasteners. In FIG. 84, the shaded portion on the surface of the auxiliary tool 61 is a hook, and the dot portion of the band member 61a is a loop. Also, the hook and loop may be reversed. The band member 61a has a hook on the back surface.

  By winding the belt member 61a around the auxiliary tool 61, the auxiliary tool 62 is formed. Moreover, since the hook of the back surface of the band member 61a appears on the surface when the band member 61a is wound, the band member 61a can be further wound. The auxiliary tool 63 is an auxiliary tool in a state where the two band members 61a are wound in an overlapping manner. Thus, the magnitude | size of an outer diameter can be adjusted by superimposing the belt | band | zone member 61a in multiple numbers.

  The auxiliary tool 64 is an auxiliary tool having a shape having a plurality of depressions in the periphery. When the umbrella is closed in a state where the middle rod of the umbrella is inserted into the inner hole from the cut portion 64a of the auxiliary tool 64, even if the auxiliary tool 64 is located on the stone bump side, the plurality of main bones of the umbrella are the plurality of depressions. Therefore, the burden that the auxiliary tool 64 hangs on the skeleton of the umbrella becomes small. That is, the auxiliary tool 64 can make a large diameter portion on the umbrella without placing a burden on the umbrella.

  Further, in the middle stick of the umbrella, if the attachment position of the auxiliary tool 64 is too close to the stone bump, even if there is a depression, if the umbrella is closed, a burden is placed on the parent bone. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable to attach a spring to the auxiliary tool 64.

  The auxiliary tool 65 is obtained by attaching a spring 64b to a part of the auxiliary tool 64 that comes in the stone bump direction. By adjusting the length of the spring, it is possible to install the auxiliary tool 64 so as not to place a burden on the umbrella and to be positioned at an optimal position for locking. Further, when the umbrella is opened, the lower lokuro approaches the stone bump, but the spring 64b is contracted, so that the umbrella can be prevented from being fully opened.

  The auxiliary tool 66 is an auxiliary tool having one spherical body 66a, and the auxiliary tool 67 is an auxiliary tool having two spherical bodies 67a. Each has a ring with cuts on both sides. The two rings can be attached to the umbrella by placing the middle stick, the main bone, or the rib of the umbrella.

  When the auxiliary tool 66 is used, one large diameter part can be formed on the umbrella by one sphere 66a, and when the auxiliary tool 67 is used, two large diameter parts are formed on the umbrella by two spheres 67a. Can be made. Therefore, when the auxiliary tool 67 is used, the outer diameter of the cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the umbrella in the closed state is smaller than the upper and lower parts in the longitudinal direction by the auxiliary tool. The existing part exists on the auxiliary tool 67. That is, when the auxiliary tool 67 is used, the position where the locking member such as a band is wound is above the auxiliary tool 67 with the umbrella cloth interposed therebetween.

  Since the auxiliary tool 67 has the two spheres 67a, the large diameter portion can be formed without fail.

  The large-diameter portion forming member may not be a ring-shaped object having a notch or a notch, such as the auxiliary tools 50 to 57, but may be a spring-shaped object such as the auxiliary tool 58. If the material is rubber, elastic metal or the like, it can be attached to the middle rod of the umbrella.

  Moreover, you may attach an auxiliary tool to a main bone instead of a center stick. When the umbrella is closed, a significant large diameter portion can be formed by attaching it to a portion of the umbrella skeleton located between the lower loft and the stone bump. Further, if an auxiliary tool is attached between the joint of the parent bone and the stone bump, the auxiliary tool cannot be taken out from the umbrella when the umbrella is closed. In particular, when two bulges exist in one assisting tool, the assisting tool becomes longer in the axial direction of the center rod, and when attached to the center rod, there is a possibility that it will interfere with the opening and closing of the umbrella. If attached, it will not be a problem.

  Moreover, you may attach an auxiliary tool not to the inner bone or the main bone of an umbrella but to a receiving bone. In short, it may be attached anywhere as long as it is inside the umbrella cloth in a closed state, cannot be taken out to the outside at the time of locking, and can form a large diameter portion on the umbrella. Moreover, when attaching to a center stick etc., the space | intervals, such as a hole for that, should just be a magnitude | size or a shape which can let a center stick etc. pass inside.

  Moreover, the auxiliary | assistant tool does not need to have the space for attaching to the umbrella's center stick, if a bulge can be formed in the umbrella in the closed state. The auxiliary tool 59 is a spherical object, and may be any size as long as it can be inserted into a portion between the lower lokuro of the umbrella and the stone bump to close the umbrella.

  Further, it is convenient that the auxiliary tool is not lost by connecting the auxiliary tool with the dial lock 1 and a wire, for example.

  FIG. 84 shows a diagram in which the auxiliary tool 59 is connected to the dial lock 1 by a wire, but this figure does not show the ratio of the size of the dial lock 1 to the size of the auxiliary tool 59. Absent.

  As described above, the auxiliary tool that is an example of the large-diameter portion forming member in the locking device of the present invention has a size that allows the umbrella to be closed when attached to the umbrella, and is a part of the closed umbrella. As long as it can create a bulge, the shape is not limited and design is possible.

  Further, the auxiliary tool can exert its effect even in combination with a locking device such as a cylinder lock or a card-type lock other than the dial lock. Any locking device may be used as long as the umbrella can be locked from the outside.

  Moreover, it is easy to produce an umbrella in which auxiliary tools such as the auxiliary tool 64 and the auxiliary tool 65 are previously incorporated, and it is easy to give the parent bone a knob-like shape such as the auxiliary tool 66 and the auxiliary tool 67. . Of course, if the joint portion of the parent bone and the receiving bone is made sufficiently large, it is possible to create a large diameter portion effective for locking.

  Moreover, the hole which penetrates the band main body of another dial lock may be provided in a dial lock, and an article may be locked by two dial locks.

  FIG. 85A (a) is an example of a dial lock using a lock body provided with a hole through which the band body of another dial lock is passed.

  As shown in FIG. 85A (a), the lock body 960 has a coupling hole 961. The coupling hole 961 is a hole for coupling with another dial lock by penetrating the band body of another dial lock.

  FIG. 85A (b) is a diagram showing a method of locking an article using two dial locks shown in FIG. 85A (a). The band main body of the dial lock B penetrates the coupling hole of the dial lock A, and the band main body of the dial lock A penetrates the coupling hole of the dial lock B. The binding method as shown in FIG. 85A (b) can also be performed using a binding band or the like. That is, it is possible to tie as shown in FIG. 85A (b) by providing a hole through which the band part can pass through two binding bands and another coupling hole through which a band part such as another binding band can pass. . That is, a method of fastening an object as shown in FIG. 85A (b) with two tools having a hole capable of locking its own band or string and a coupling hole through which another band or string is passed, This is considered to be a method in which the tightened portion is less likely to loosen after binding and binding objects such as newspapers and magazines that tend to fall inside.

  Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a function that allows the band portion to pass (move) only in one direction to the coupling hole other than the hole through which the band portion passes. In this state, as shown in FIG. 85A (b), if the object to be bound is hard and the band part does not bite because the binding hole part can only move in one direction if tied tightly without loosening, the uneven shape of the object is formed. Considering this, it can be considered that this method is useful if it is bound so that the movement stops at the convex portion even if the other band portion moves at the coupling hole portion.

  As shown in FIG. 85A (b), the two dial lock bands can lock the article so as to be tightened from the front, back, left, and right. For example, it is possible to lock personal diaries, books, files that you do not want people to touch.

  85A (a) and 85A (b), the coupling hole is provided in the lock body so as to penetrate perpendicularly to the axial direction of the lock body. However, the coupling hole only needs to be provided in the lock body so as to penetrate at an angle other than parallel to the axial direction of the lock body. What is necessary is just to determine according to the magnitude | size, shape, etc. of a locking target object.

  Further, the band body of another dial lock may be locked in the coupling hole. For example, in FIG. 85A (b), the dial lock A is a two-shaft structure lock according to the second embodiment, and the peripheral lock ring with the gear of the dial lock A is inserted into the band body of the dial lock B. Keep it open. Further, a coupling hole is provided at a position where the circumference of the peripheral locking ring with gear of the dial lock A reaches the coupling hole. By doing so, the circumference of the peripheral lock ring with the gear of the dial lock A is inserted into the hole of the band main body of the dial lock B, and the band main body of the dial lock B is locked by the dial lock A. Furthermore, by making both the dial lock A and the dial lock B have a biaxial structure, it is possible to lock each other's band with the coupling hole.

  Moreover, in order to couple | bond with another locking device, you may have a coupling groove instead of a coupling hole.

  FIG. 85A (c1) is a diagram illustrating an example of a lock body having a coupling groove, and FIG. 85A (c2) is a diagram illustrating another example of a lock body having a coupling groove.

  The lock body 960 shown in FIG. 85A (c1) has a shape in which a groove 961a extending from the outer surface to the coupling hole 961 is provided in the lock body 960 shown in FIG. 85A (a). That is, a coupling groove for coupling another locking device is formed by the coupling hole 961 and the groove 961a. Similarly, in the lock body 960 shown in FIG. 85A (c2), a coupling groove for coupling another locking device is formed by the coupling hole 961 and the groove 961b.

  In the lock main body 960 shown in FIG. 85A (c1), a locking member such as a band of another locking device is inserted into the coupling groove from the rear surface of the lock main body. 85A (c2) has a locking body 960 in which a locking member such as a band of another locking device is inserted into the coupling groove from the side surface of the locking body.

  That is, the locking device having the lock body of FIG. 85A (c1) or FIG. 85A (c2) can lock the band or the like of the other locking device even when the other locking device locks the article. The member can be passed through the coupling groove. In other words, it is not necessary to connect the two locking devices in a cross shape in advance, and after temporarily locking with one locking device, the locking device having the connecting groove is connected and locked, and each locking device is locked. Since it can be properly retightened and locked, it is possible to change the procedure for locking in a cross shape.

  In addition, the method of locking the article in a cross shape can be applied to a method of binding the article in a cross shape by using two binding tools for binding the article, for example.

  Conventionally, for a binding tool, for example, a technique for improving the strength of the binding tool is also disclosed (for example, Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 6-61999). However, when a conventional binding tool is used, one binding tool can only bind articles in one direction. Therefore, in order to tightly bind a certain article, when using two binding tools and performing a cross-shaped binding as shown in FIG. 85A (b), after binding with one binding tool, It will be united. In this case, at least the binding tool that bundles the articles afterwards is not subject to movement restrictions from the binding tool that first binds the articles. Thereby, for example, when the binding tool bundled later is in a slightly loosened state, the binding tool bundled later can be easily detached from the article. That is, a sufficient bundling effect cannot be obtained.

  Therefore, simple and effective binding can be performed by applying the above-described method of locking an article in a cross shape. Moreover, the binding tool for simple and effective binding can be produced by applying the structure of the locking device for locking the article in a cross shape to the binding tool.

  That is, this invention can also aim at providing the binding tool used for the simple and effective binding method and its binding method by applying the method of locking articles | goods in the above-mentioned cross shape.

  The binding tool is composed of a long locking member and a locking mechanism portion for locking the locking member.

  FIG. 85B is a diagram showing an example of a binding tool for binding articles in a cross shape and its component parts.

  FIG. 85B (a) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a binding band 463 for binding articles in a cross shape, and FIG. 85B (b) is a bottom view of the binding band 463. A binding band uses a band as a locking member.

  85B (a) and 85B (b), the binding band 463 includes a coupling hole 463c for coupling with another binding tool, a plurality of convex portions 463a, and a claw 463b that meshes with the convex portions 463a. And have. The nail | claw 463b exists in the inner surface of the hole for penetrating a band part. A portion where the hole having the claw 463 b on the inner surface is a locking mechanism portion in the binding band 463.

  When the binding band 463 is inserted into the hole having the claw 463b on the inner surface and the convex portion 463a and the claw 463b are engaged with each other, the band portion cannot be extracted from the hole having the engagement portion 463b on the inner surface.

  FIG. 85B (c) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a binding belt 464 for binding articles in a cross shape. The binding belt uses a belt as a locking member. As shown in FIG. 85B (c), the bundling belt 464 has a coupling hole 464c for coupling to another bundling tool, a plurality of holes 464a, and a belt portion including the hole 464a by being inserted into the hole 464a. It has the latching | locking part 464b which is a site | part to stop. That is, in addition to the structure similar to the belt used for clothes, the structure has the coupling hole 464c. Further, the buckle portion provided with the locking portion 464b is a locking mechanism portion in the binding belt 464.

  FIG. 85B (d) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a binding belt 465 for binding articles in a cross shape. As shown in FIG. 85B (d), the bundling belt 465 includes a coupling hole 465b for coupling to another bundling tool, and a locking portion 465a for sandwiching and locking the belt portion. The binding belt 465 also has a structure having a coupling hole 465b in addition to the same structure as the belt used for clothes. Further, the buckle portion including the locking portion 465a is a locking mechanism portion in the binding belt 465.

  FIG. 85B (e) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure when a plurality of coupling holes are provided in the binding belt 465 shown in FIG. 85B (d). Actually, the belt portion may be longer. The binding belt 465 shown in FIG. 85B (e) has two coupling holes 465c. The direction of the coupling hole in the binding tool such as the binding belt shown in FIG. 85B (d) is approximately perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the binding tool and perpendicular to the plane including the ring formed by the binding tool at the time of binding. In contrast, the direction of the coupling hole 465c is approximately perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the binding tool and parallel to the plane including the ring formed by the binding tool during binding. Here, in the binding tool, the belt part, the above-described band part, the binding band, and the like have sufficient flexibility to bind the articles. Therefore, even if the coupling hole 465c is formed in such a direction, the article can be bound in a cross shape together with other binding tools. In short, the direction of the coupling hole or the coupling groove may not be parallel to the longitudinal direction of the locking member in the binding tool.

  Further, in the binding belt, the belt portion that is the locking member and the buckle that includes the locking portion that is the locking mechanism portion may not be integrated, and the buckle may be detachably attached to the belt portion. .

  Each of FIGS. 85B (f) to 85B (h) is an example of a buckle for a binding belt that locks an article in a cross shape.

  The buckles shown in FIGS. 85B (f) and 85B (g) are the same type as the buckles of the binding belt 465 shown in FIGS. 85B (d) and 85B (e), and sandwich the belt portion. It is a buckle that is locked by a locking portion 465a. In addition, both have an attachment portion 465d for attachment to the belt portion. The buckle of FIG. 85B (f) is attached to the belt portion by the rear end of the attachment portion 465d biting into the belt portion. Also, the buckle of FIG. 85B (g) is attached to the belt portion by the tip of the attachment portion 465d biting into the belt portion.

  85B (f), like the binding belt 465 shown in FIG. 85B (e), is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the binding tool and has a plane including a ring formed by the binding tool at the time of binding. It has a coupling hole 465c formed in a parallel direction.

  The buckle shown in FIG. 85B (g) has not a coupling hole but a coupling groove 465e. By having the coupling groove 465e, as described with reference to FIG. 85A (c1) and FIG. 85A (c2), after the article is bound by another binding tool, it can be combined with the binding tool. The article can be bundled into a shape.

  The buckle shown in FIG. 85B (h) is the same type of buckle as the binding belt 464 shown in FIG. 85B (c), and the belt portion is locked by inserting the locking portion 464b into the hole of the belt portion. be able to. Moreover, it has the attaching part 464d for attaching to a belt part, and the through-hole 464e formed in the same direction as the coupling hole 465c of FIG. 85B (f). The buckle of FIG. 85B (h) is attached to the belt portion by the rear end of the attachment portion 464d biting into the belt portion.

  Thus, in a binding belt for binding articles in a cross shape, the buckle may be detachably attached to the belt portion. Thereby, for example, when the band or the belt is damaged, it can be replaced. The same applies when the buckle is damaged.

  In addition, the coupling hole or coupling groove for coupling to another binding tool may be present in the belt or the band part instead of the locking mechanism part such as a buckle. In short, the binding tool only needs to have a hole or a groove for coupling with another binding tool.

  Moreover, the binding tool and its parts for binding articles in a cross shape may have structures other than those shown in FIGS. 85B (a) to 85B (h).

  FIG. 85C is a diagram showing another example of a binding tool and its parts for binding articles in a cross shape.

  FIG. 85C (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a binding chain fastener that binds articles using a chain. The binding chain uses a chain as a locking member, and the fastener is a locking mechanism portion in the binding chain.

  As shown in FIG. 85C (a), the fastener 466 includes one coupling hole 466b for coupling to another binding tool and two locking portions 466a for locking the chain.

  One of the two locking portions 466a is used for attaching the chain before binding, and the other is used for locking the chain when binding.

  As shown in the drawing, the locking portion 466a has a closed hole, and a sliding type opening / closing portion exists in a part of the periphery of the hole. Moreover, the opening / closing part is normally closed by the force of a spring. When attaching and locking the chain, the opening / closing portion is opened, and the peripheral portion of the locking portion 466a is made to penetrate through one of the plurality of annular members constituting the chain. The opening / closing part is closed by the force of the spring.

  FIG. 85C (b) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a binding chain. The binding chain shown in FIG. 85C (b) includes a fastener 467 and a chain 468.

  The fastener 467 has the same function as the fastener 466 shown in FIG. 85C (a), although the shape is different. That is, one coupling hole 467b and two locking portions 467a for locking the chain are provided.

  The chain 468 is formed by connecting a plurality of annular members. One end is attached to one locking portion 467 a of the fastener 467. When the articles are bound using this binding chain, any annular member other than the annular member used for attachment to the fastener 467 is locked to the other locking portion 467a.

  As the material of the annular member, a material having sufficient strength for bundling articles such as metal, plastic and rubber is used. Further, since the plurality of annular members are formed by joining, the flexibility of the individual annular members is not required.

  85A (a), 85B (c), 85B (d), 85B (f), 85B (h), 85C (a), 85C (b) and the like described above. An opening / closing function such as 466a may be provided.

  When binding an article in a cross shape using two binding tools such as a binding band, a binding belt, and a binding chain, for example, the following procedure is performed. In addition, let each of two binding tools be the binding tool A and the binding tool B.

  (1) The locking member of the binding tool A is passed through the binding hole or the binding groove of the binding tool B. (2) The locking member of the binding tool B is passed through the coupling hole or the coupling groove of the binding tool A. (3) An article is placed between the binding tool A and the binding tool B. (4) The locking member of the binding tool A is passed through the locking mechanism portion of the binding tool A. (5) The locking member of the binding tool B is passed through the locking mechanism portion of the binding tool B. (6) The article is fastened in different directions by the locking member of the binding tool A and the locking member of the binding tool B. (7) The locking member of the binding tool A is locked so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism portion of the binding tool A. (8) The locking member of the binding tool B is locked so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism portion of the binding tool B.

  By the above procedure, the articles can be bound in a cross shape using two binding tools.

  In addition, the said procedure is an example and the order may not be according to the said procedure. For example, as described above, when the binding tool has a coupling groove, after the other binding tool binds the article, it can be combined with the binding tool to bind the article.

  Further, the locking mechanism portion may be a locking portion having a function of locking the locking member so as to be unlocked, instead of simply locking the locking member, like a binding band or a binding belt. For example, the dial lock shown in FIG. 85A (a) can be used as a binding tool.

  In addition, two different types of binding bands may be used for binding, and an article may be bound in a cross shape with a binding band and a binding chain.

  In addition, when the locking method of locking the article while tightening the article in a cross shape with two locking devices or the binding method of binding the article in a cross shape with two binding tools, the through-hole or the through groove is penetrated. The locking member is movable in the penetrating direction and the reverse direction with respect to the through hole or the through groove. Therefore, when an excessive force is applied, the closed annular portion formed by passing each locking member through the locking mechanism portion of each binding tool rotates and slides on the article while maintaining the size, and If each of the coupling holes or the coupling grooves slides on the article while facing the article, the coupling hole or the coupling groove may be displaced from the article and may be detached from the article. That is, when the binding tool rotates or slides with respect to the article, the binding tool may be detached from the article. Therefore, in order to lock or bind more reliably, it is also conceivable to provide unevenness or a suction cup on the surface of the locking member that contacts the article. It is also conceivable to bring the locking member into close contact with the article. By doing so, it becomes difficult for the binding tool to rotate or slide with respect to the article.

  FIG. 85C (c) is a diagram showing a case where the binding band 463 shown in FIG. 85B (a) includes a convex portion 463d on the surface that contacts the binding target article. When the article is bundled, the protrusion 463d bites into the article or engages with the angular portion of the article, so that it is difficult to cause a deviation from the article. Moreover, it becomes difficult to slip even in a through hole or a through groove that penetrates.

  FIG. 85C (d) is a diagram showing a caterpillar belt that can be used as a locking member for a binding belt. The belt 469 shown in FIG. 85C (d) is similar to the locking member shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c), in which plate-like members are joined together in a band shape so as to be able to be bent. It has a plurality of holes 469a to be locked to the buckle as a part. In addition, any buckle of FIG. 85B (f)-FIG. 85B (h) may be attached, and it can be used as a locking belt.

  Moreover, since each plate-shaped member does not need to have flexibility, it may be made of metal, for example. Even when it is made of metal, it can be bent, so that it can secure a sufficient degree of adhesion to an article to be firmly bound.

  FIG. 85C (e) is a diagram showing a belt that can be used as a locking member for a binding belt and has a suction cup 472b on the surface that contacts the article. The suction cup 472b included in the band 472 illustrated in FIG. 85C (e) is less likely to be displaced from the article by sucking the article when the article is bound. Further, since the suction cup 472 itself has a function as a convex portion, even if the article has a surface on which the suction cup cannot suck, it is difficult to cause a deviation between the article and the through hole or the through groove. effective.

  Also, like the band 469 shown in FIG. 85C (d), it has a plurality of holes 472a to be locked, and any of the buckles in FIGS. 85B (f) to 85B (h) may be attached. It can be used as a stop belt.

  The structures of the band and belt irregularities, suction cups, and the like shown in FIGS. 85C (c) to 85C (e) are naturally applicable to locking members in the locking device.

  Further, the band and the belt may have shapes other than those described above. In short, it is only necessary to have sufficient size, flexibility and strength to bind the articles.

  As described above, an article can be locked or bound in a cross shape by using two locking devices or binding tools. This locking device or binding device for cross-like locking or binding is not required to add a special other member for locking or binding into a cross-like shape, and can be combined with other locking devices or binding devices. This is realized by a coupling hole or a coupling groove.

  Further, the coupling hole and the coupling groove may have a locking function in the same manner as the above-described dial lock. For example, the coupling hole 463c in FIG. 85B (a) may include the claw 463b. In this case, the size of the coupling hole 463c may be adjusted to have the same shape as the locking mechanism. By doing so, as in the case of the locking device described above, the joint hole portion can only move in one direction, so if the object to be bound is hard and the band or belt part does not bite, the uneven shape of the object is considered. Then, even if the other band part moves in the coupling hole part, it is considered that it is a method that is useful if it is bound so that the movement stops at the convex part.

  In addition, since the binding belt 465 in FIG. 85B (e) has two coupling holes 465c, it can be bound together with the other two binding tools while tightening the periphery of the article from three directions. That is, the binding tool may have two or more plural coupling holes or coupling grooves.

  FIG. 85D (a) is a schematic view when binding is performed using three binding tools. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85D (a), a binding method for binding articles using three binding tools, the binding tool comprising a long locking member and the engagement member. A locking mechanism that penetrates the locking member and locks at an arbitrary position, and two or more coupling holes or coupling grooves for coupling with other binding tools, each of the three binding tools Each coupling hole or each coupling groove is not parallel to the longitudinal direction of the locking member in each binding tool, and only one other binding tool can be connected, and the binding method includes the three binding tools. Two each of the coupling holes or coupling grooves are used so that each of the three binding tools does not intersect other than the coupling hole or the coupling groove, and the locking member of the first binding tool is set to the second The step of passing through the coupling hole or coupling groove on the opposite side of the binding mechanism from the binding mechanism side. Passing the locking member of the first binding tool through the coupling hole or the coupling groove near the locking mechanism portion of the third binding tool, and the locking member of the second binding tool with the locking member of the second binding tool A step of passing through a coupling hole or a coupling groove on the opposite side of the locking mechanism portion side of the third binding tool, and a locking mechanism portion of the first binding tool with the locking member of the second binding tool Penetrating through the coupling hole or coupling groove closer to the side, and penetrating the locking member of the third binding tool into the coupling hole or coupling groove closer to the side opposite to the locking mechanism part side of the first binding tool A step of allowing the locking member of the third binding tool to pass through a coupling hole or a coupling groove closer to the locking mechanism portion of the second binding tool, the first binding tool, and the first binding tool. Disposing the article between the second binding tool and the third binding tool; and Passing the locking member through the locking mechanism of the first binding tool; passing the locking member of the second binding tool through the locking mechanism of the second binding tool; and A step of penetrating the locking member of the third binding tool through the locking mechanism of the third binding tool, a locking member of the first binding tool, and a locking of the second binding tool A step of fastening the article in different directions by a member and a locking member of the third binding tool, and a locking member of the first binding tool from the locking mechanism portion of the first binding tool A step of locking so that it cannot be inserted and removed, a step of locking the locking member of the second binding tool so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism of the second binding tool, A step for locking the locking member so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism of the third tying member. The articles may be bound using a binding method including In addition, the said procedure is an example and the order may not be according to the said procedure. Further, the locking mechanism portion may have a locking function.

  FIG. 85D (b) is a schematic view when binding is performed using four binding tools. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85D (b), a binding method for binding articles using four binding tools, the binding tool comprising a long locking member and the engagement member. A locking mechanism for penetrating the locking member and locking at any position, and two or more coupling holes or coupling grooves for coupling with other binding tools, each of the four binding tools Each coupling hole or each coupling groove is not parallel to the longitudinal direction of the locking member in each binding tool, and only one other binding tool can be connected, and the binding method includes the four binding tools. A step of passing the locking member of the first binding tool through the coupling hole or the coupling groove of the third binding tool so that each of the first binding tool does not intersect other than the binding hole or the coupling groove; Passing the locking member through the coupling hole or coupling groove of the fourth binding tool; Passing the locking member of the second binding tool through the coupling hole or the coupling groove of the third binding tool, and engaging the locking member of the second binding tool with the coupling hole or the coupling groove of the fourth binding tool. Passing the locking member of the third binding tool through the coupling hole or the coupling groove of the first binding tool, and passing the locking member of the third binding tool to the second binding. A step of penetrating through the coupling hole or coupling groove of the tool, a step of penetrating the locking member of the fourth binding tool through the coupling hole or the coupling groove of the first binding tool, and an engagement of the fourth binding tool. A step of passing a stop member through the coupling hole or coupling groove of the second binding tool, the first binding tool, the second binding tool, the third binding tool, and the fourth binding. A step of placing the article between a tool and a locking member of the first binding tool, A step of penetrating the locking mechanism of the first binding tool, a step of passing the locking member of the second binding tool through the locking mechanism of the second binding tool, and the third A step of penetrating the locking member of the third binding tool through the locking mechanism portion of the third binding tool, and a passage of the locking member of the fourth binding tool through the locking mechanism portion of the fourth binding tool A locking member of the first binding tool, a locking member of the second binding tool, a locking member of the fourth binding tool, and a locking member of the fourth binding tool. The step of tightening the article, the step of locking the locking member of the first binding tool so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism part of the first binding tool, and the second binding tool A step of locking the locking member so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism of the second binding tool; and the third binding A step of locking the locking member of the bundle tool so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the locking mechanism portion of the third binding tool; and a locking mechanism of the fourth binding tool for locking the locking member of the fourth binding tool. The article may be bundled using a bundling method including a step of locking so that it cannot be inserted and removed from the part. In addition, the said procedure is an example and the order may not be according to the said procedure. In addition, when the article has a raised portion, in the above bundling method, when the raised portion is positioned and tied up in a quadrilateral that has four coupling holes or coupling grooves as apexes and four different binding tools as sides, Since the slide of the binding tool is stopped by the raised portion on the article, the binding cannot be detached from the article. Furthermore, if the article does not have a raised portion, a plate-like auxiliary member having a raised portion near the center can be used to securely bind books and the like, and the locking mechanism has a locking function. Can be securely locked.

  Moreover, it is good also as a binder which can attach locking members, such as a band, to the binder which binds documents etc., and can be locked by a dial lock.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a binder that can be locked by a dial lock. A binder 750 shown in FIG. 86 includes bands on both doors. Further, as shown in FIG. 19A, the dial lock 1 of the first embodiment can lock the bands inserted from both sides. Therefore, it is possible to lock the binder 750 by inserting two bands of the binder 750 from both sides of the dial lock 1. As shown in FIG. 36, Embodiment 2 can also lock the band inserted from both sides, and can lock the binder 750.

  FIG. 87 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a binder having a dial lock. In the binder 751 shown in FIG. 87 (a), a lock body including a shaft and a lock dial ring is attached to the tip of one door, and a band is attached to the other door. With this configuration, the binder is locked as shown in the right figure of FIG.

  FIG. 87 (b) is a view showing another example of a binder having a dial lock. A binder 752 shown in FIG. 87 (b) has a lock body including a shaft and a dial ring for locking, and a band attached to the other door so that the insertion opening of the band comes to the tip of one door of the binder. ing. With this configuration, the binder is locked as shown in the right figure of FIG.

  FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a binder to which the dial lock can be detachably attached. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), the binder 753 has an attachment portion 754 for attaching the lock body of the dial lock to the door on one side, and the attachment portion 966 included in the lock body 965 is inserted into the attachment portion 754. Thus, the lock body 965 can be attached to the binder 753.

  FIG. 88 (b) is a view showing the structure of the door on the side where the band of the binder 753 is attached. As shown in FIG. 88 (b), the binder 753 has an attachment portion 755, and for example, the band 400 can be attached to the binder 753. Similarly, the bands shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 (a) can also be made detachable.

  Moreover, the site | part for attaching a lock | rock main body with which a binder is provided may not be a groove shape like the attaching part 754, and a hole or a hole may be sufficient as it.

  FIG. 88 (c) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of the attachment portion 756 having a hole for attaching the lock body. As shown in the drawing, the mounting portion 756 has a through-hole, and the lock body 965 has a mounting portion 967 having a shape corresponding to the hole. By inserting the attachment portion 967 of the lock body 965 into the hole of the attachment portion 756 of the binder, the lock body 965 is detachably attached to the binder.

  FIG. 88 (d) is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of the attachment portion 757 having a hole for attaching the lock body. As shown in the figure, the attachment portion 757 has a hole that does not penetrate. The lock body has the same shape as the attachment portion 967 shown in FIG. 88 (c), and can be attached to the attachment portion 757 if it has an attachment portion having a size corresponding to the size of the hole of the attachment portion 757. it can.

  In addition, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 98, the band tail or the band mounting part has a deformation / restoration ability due to elasticity, so that the band can be prevented from dropping from the binder mounting part at the time of unlocking. .

  Thus, the binder 753 can be locked by the configuration shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (d).

  When the number of documents bound to the binder changes greatly, a dial lock using a band having a certain length is useful because it can be locked at an arbitrary position. In addition, when the number of documents to be bound is substantially constant and the width of the binder hardly changes, the length of the band may be a length corresponding to the width of the binder. Further, instead of a band, a member that does not change shape with high rigidity, or a member in which a locking portion is attached to the tip of a wire may be used. That is, the length and shape of the locking member used for the dial lock may be changed according to the number of documents to be closed in the binder.

  Further, FIG. 24 (b) describes a state in which the band formed by the lock body 10 and the stopper 505 with a passage hole is locked. In this case, the passage hole 504 included in the stopper 505 with passage hole has a structure for locking the unevenness of the band 510. However, a band having a hole instead of a band having unevenness may be locked by the locking portion and the lock body.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a double-headed band having a plurality of holes. A band 770 illustrated in FIG. 89 includes a plurality of elliptical holes. Further, it is a double-headed band that does not have a stopper such as the stopper 403 in the band 400.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a dial lock that locks an umbrella or the like using a band 770 and a locking procedure. The dial lock shown in FIG. 90 has a lock body including three lock dial rings and a locking portion 771 connected by a wire. Further, the locking portion 771 has a band holding portion 772 with a hook at the rear. Using this dial lock, an umbrella or the like can be locked by the following procedure.

  (1) The object to be locked is tightened by the band 770, and the band holding portion 772 is inserted into the hole in which the band 770 is overlapped. (2) Insert the locking portion 771 passed through the hole of the band 770 into the lock body, and turn the lock dial ring to lock it.

  When locking is performed according to the above procedure, the band 770 is not loosened because the band holding portion 772 has wrinkles.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 90 can lock the bicycle with a wire connecting the lock body and the locking portion 771, for example. That is, by using this dial lock and the band 770, for example, a bicycle and an umbrella can be locked simultaneously.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cap attached to the locking portion 771. A cap 773 shown in FIG. 91 has a tapered tip, and by attaching to the locking portion 771, the locking portion 771 can be easily passed through the hole of the band 770.

  Further, the shape of the band holding portion 772 may not be the shape shown in FIG. Any shape can be used as long as the band 770 cannot be loosened during locking.

  FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of another shape of the band holding unit 772. A band holding portion 774 shown in FIG. 92 is a cylindrical member having a diameter of the same size as a ridge as shown by a dotted line portion. The band holding portion 774 has a size that cannot be inserted into the hole of the band 770, but is a size that does not allow the band 770 to be loosened when locked, and plays the role of a ridge that the band holding portion 772 has. In some cases, the band holding portion 774 can be inserted into the hole of the band 770 without loosening, and the wire extending to the lock body can be inserted into the hole of the band 770 without loosening so that the band 770 does not loosen during locking. It becomes possible.

  The band holding part may be included in the lock body.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a dial lock including a lock body having a band holding portion and a locking procedure.

  As shown in FIG. 93, the configuration of the dial lock is substantially the same as that of the dial lock shown in FIG. However, a hook 775 is provided at the rear part of the locking part 771, and a band holding part 776 is provided in the lock body. Using this dial lock, an umbrella or the like can be locked by the following procedure.

  (1) The object to be locked is tightened by the band 770, and the band holding part 776 provided in the lock body is inserted into the hole in which the band 770 is overlapped. (2) Insert the locking portion 771 into the lock body and turn the lock dial ring to lock it.

  When locking is performed according to the above procedure, the band 770 is not loosened because the hook 775 exists at the rear portion of the locking portion 771.

  Also, the dial lock shown in FIG. 93 can simultaneously lock a bicycle and an umbrella, for example.

  Further, a band other than the band 770 may be used for the dial lock shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 94 is a diagram showing two examples of bands that can be used for the dial lock shown in FIG.

  The band 770a has the same hole as the band 770 and a slit through which the band main body of the band 770a can pass. Using the band 770a, the band head is passed through the slit so as to tighten an article such as an umbrella. The band holding portion 772 is passed through the hole of the band 770a in this state, and the locking portion 771 is inserted into the lock body. After insertion, turn the lock dial ring to lock.

  Further, the band 770c is passed through the hole of the band 770b in which an article such as an umbrella is fastened, so that the band 770b is not loosened as shown in FIG. The band 770 c has a plurality of holes having the same shape as the hole of the band 770. The band holding portion 772 is passed through the hole of the band 770c in this state, and the locking portion 771 is inserted into the lock body. After insertion, turn the lock dial ring to lock.

  Although FIG. 94 shows the case where the dial lock shown in FIG. 90 is used, even the dial lock shown in FIG. 93 can use the bands 770a, 770b, and 770c.

  Moreover, you may lock an umbrella etc. using the band which has a hole, without letting the latching | locking part 771 pass to the hole of a band.

  FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a dial lock that can lock an umbrella or the like without passing the locking portion through the hole of the band.

  As shown in FIG. 95, pins 771a are provided on both sides of the locking portion 771. An insertion hole 778 into which the pin 771a can be inserted is formed by the lock body and the shaft of the lock body so as to correspond to the two pins 771a. The band 777 also has a plurality of holes corresponding to the two pins 771a. Using this dial lock, an umbrella or the like can be locked by the following procedure.

  (1) The locked object is tightened by the band 777, and the pins 771a provided on both sides of the locking portion 771 are inserted into the holes of the band 777. (2) Insert the locking portion 771 into the lock body and turn the lock dial ring to lock it. By the above procedure, an article such as an umbrella can be locked.

  As described above, an article such as an umbrella can be locked using a locking portion connected to the lock body and a band having a plurality of holes. Further, since the lock body and the locking portion are connected by a wire, for example, a bicycle or the like can be locked. Thereby, for example, a bicycle and an umbrella can be locked simultaneously.

  The band 770, the band 770a, and the band 770b and the band 770c described above can also be used as a chain lock, a wire lock or the like for locking a conventional bicycle. That is, the bicycle can be locked with the chain lock, and the umbrella can be simultaneously locked with the band 770. Similarly, the band can be used for a horseshoe lock widely used as a bicycle locking device. The horseshoe lock is a locking device of a type that prevents rotation of the wheel by causing the arc-shaped metal housed in the arc-shaped hollow body to come out of the hollow body during locking. .

  Further, like the band mounting hole 101 in the lock body 100 shown in FIG. 5, the lock body has a hole through which the band stopper cannot be passed, so that the band can be locked in such a way that it can be pulled out only in one direction. . However, as long as the band can be locked in such a manner that it can be extracted only in one direction, it may not be a “hole” but may be a “groove”.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing an overview of the lock body 120 and the band 400 shown in FIG. 12 (a). As shown in FIG. 96 (a), the lock body has a band attachment hole 101.

  FIG. 96B is a right side view of the lock body 120 and a right side view of the lock body 120 with the band 400 attached. FIG. 96 (c) is a rear view of the lock body 120 and a rear view of the lock body 120 with the band 400 attached.

  FIG. 97A is a right side view of the lock body 120 having the band attachment groove 107 that is a groove for attaching the band, and a right side view of the lock body 120 in a state where the band 400 is attached. 97 (b) is a rear view of the lock body 120 shown in FIG. 97 (a) and a rear view of the lock body 120 with the band 400 attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the band mounting groove 107 is shaped so that the band is not removed from the band mounting groove 107 during locking. By doing so, it can play the same role as the band mounting hole.

  In addition, even if it is a band attachment hole or a band attachment groove, when the dial lock is unlocked and the band body is extracted from the lock part of the lock body, the band will be There is a possibility of falling out of the mounting hole or band mounting groove. Therefore, the structure may be such that the stopper portion of the band prevents natural fall. Further, the band mounting hole and the band mounting groove may have a structure for preventing the band from dropping naturally.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a plurality of examples of band stoppers having a natural fall prevention function. In FIG. 98, the lock body 120 is shown by extracting only the band attachment hole, which is a part related to the band stopper. Further, in order to explain the natural fall prevention function, the band attachment hole portion is shown as a sectional view.

  Each of the stoppers 780 to 782 shown in FIG. 98 has convex portions on both sides of the stopper, and the band mounting hole of the lock body 120 has concave portions corresponding to the convex portions.

  The stopper 780 is provided with holes on both sides, and elastic projections 780a are formed on both sides of the stopper 780 by the respective holes. Moreover, the holes on both sides may be connected to form one hole.

  The stopper 781 is formed with convex portions 781a on both sides that can be inclined when passing through the narrow portion of the band attachment hole.

  A sectional view of the stopper 782 is shown. As shown in the cross-sectional view, the stopper 782 is embedded with elastic members on both sides, and a convex portion 782a is formed by the members.

  Since each of the convex portions of the stopper 780 to the stopper 782 has elasticity, it can be shrunk or inclined so as to narrow the lateral width of the stopper when inserted into the band attachment hole. After being inserted, it returns to its original shape inside the band mounting hole due to restoring force. Thereby, the band which has these stoppers does not fall naturally from a band attachment hole.

  The stopper 785 shown in the middle right of FIG. 98 has convex portions 785a on both sides, and a notch 785c is formed between the convex portions 785a on both sides. When the stopper 785 is inserted into the band mounting hole, the notch 785c is narrowed so as to narrow the lateral width of the stopper, and the width of the stopper 785 is also narrowed. After being inserted, it returns to its original shape inside the band mounting hole due to the restoring force of the stopper. As a result, the band having the stopper 785 does not naturally fall out of the band mounting hole.

  The lock body 120 shown at the lower left of FIG. 98 has an elastic convex portion 120a inside the band attaching portion. The two convex portions 120 a are present at positions on both sides of the stopper 783. For this reason, the stopper 783 can be inserted into the band mounting hole, and does not naturally fall out of the band mounting hole.

  In the lock body shown at the lower right of FIG. 98, a part of the elastic member is embedded in the wall surface of the band attachment hole. By this member, convex portions 120b are formed at positions on both sides of the stopper 784 inside the band mounting hole. For this reason, the stopper 784 can be inserted into the band mounting hole and does not naturally fall out of the band mounting hole.

  98, the case where the band stopper is inserted into the band mounting hole has been described. However, even in the case of the band mounting groove, the above-described function of preventing the spontaneous fall of the band is effective as in the case of the band mounting hole.

  That is, even if it is a band attachment hole or a band attachment groove, the band can be detachably attached to the lock body. Specifically, if a narrowed portion having elasticity narrower than the stopper, which is the tail of the band, is formed on a part of the band attachment hole or the inlet side of the band attachment groove, the band can be removed by elastic deformation / restoration ability. It can be easily attached and detached, and can be locked to prevent dropping.

  Even if the band mounting hole or the band mounting groove does not have the elastic narrowed portion as described above, the band stopper has elasticity, and the inner shape of the band mounting hole or the band mounting groove. If it corresponds to the shape of the stopper, the band can be easily attached and detached and can be locked so as to prevent dropping.

  Further, as described in the description of the lockable binder shown in FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (d), the inside of the attachment portion for attaching the locking member such as a band of the binder or the locking member By giving the above-mentioned elasticity to the tail portion of the cover, the locking member can be easily attached to and detached from the binder, and the locking member can be prevented from dropping from the binder.

  11 (a) and 11 (b) and the like, it has been shown that the lock body can have various shapes, but by attaching an adapter to the lock body, The shape may be changed.

  FIG. 99 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a lock body to which an adapter can be attached. FIG. 99 (a) is a top view of the lock body 970. FIG. 99 and 101, the side surface to which the adapter is attached is the rear surface, and the opposite side surface, that is, the side where the dial ring exists is the front surface. The left and right sides are based on the front view.

  FIG. 99B is a right side view of the lock body 970 having the adapter mounting hole 971. As shown in FIG. 99 (b), there is an adapter mounting hole 971 that penetrates from the upper part to the lower part of the lock body 970. The adapter mounting hole 971 can also serve as the coupling hole 961 in the dial lock shown in FIG. 85A (a).

  FIG. 99 (c) is a right side view of the lock body 970 having the adapter mounting groove 972. FIG. As shown in FIG. 99 (c), unlike the adapter mounting hole 971, the adapter mounting groove 972 does not penetrate the lock body 970.

  99 (d) is a rear view of the lock body 970 shown in FIG. 99 (b), and FIG. 99 (e) is a rear view of the lock body 970 shown in FIG. 99 (c). 99 (a) to 99 (c) are views showing a state where a dial ring is attached to the lock body 970. FIG. In FIG. 99D and FIG. 99E, the dial ring is not shown.

  FIG. 100 (a) is a top view of the adapter 980 that can be attached to the lock body 970 shown in FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (e). Note that the curved surface is the rear surface of the adapter, and the opposite side of the rear surface is the front surface. The left and right sides are based on the front view. 100 (b) is a right side view of the adapter 980, and FIG. 100 (c) is a rear view of the adapter 980. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the adapter 980 has a return portion 981 for attaching the adapter 980 to the lock body 970. The return portion 981 is positioned above and below the adapter 980 and has a shape that fits into the adapter mounting hole 971 and the adapter mounting groove 972 of the lock body 970.

  FIG. 101A is a top view of the lock body 970 to which the adapter 980 is attached. FIG. 101 (b) is a right side view of the lock body 970 having the adapter mounting hole 971 to which the adapter 980 is mounted. FIG. 101 (c) is a right side view of the lock body 970 having the adapter mounting groove 972 to which the adapter 980 is mounted. As shown in FIG. 101 (a), a lock body 970 having a flat rear surface is fitted with an adapter 980, so that the rear surface is curved.

  FIG. 101 (d) is a top view of the lock body 970 to which an adapter 980 having a locking hole for locking one end of the band is mounted. As shown in FIG. 101 (d), the adapter 980 has a locking hole 980a for locking the band, and a band having a tail that cannot pass through the locking hole 980a can be used. . The lock main body 970 has a main body side hole 970a, and the main body side hole 970a exists at a position where a single passage is formed by the main body side hole 970a and the locking hole 980a.

  When the band is inserted from the locking hole 980a, the head located at the position facing the tail of the band passes through the main body side hole 970a and goes out of the lock main body 970. Further, the band head is inserted into a position of the lock body 970 for locking the band, and the band is locked by the dial ring.

  In this way, when the band passes through the adapter 980 and the lock body 970, the band tail cannot pass through the adapter 980, and the band is locked without loosening, the adapter 980 is locked into the lock body 970. Regardless of the direction of removal from the lock body 970, the lock body 970 will not come off. Even if the band is loose, at least the adapter 980 is not lost.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 100B, the adapter 980 is attached to the lock body so that the upper and lower turning portions 981 sandwich the upper and lower sides of the rear surface of the lock body. However, the adapter may be mounted so as to be inserted into the lock body.

  Fig.102 (a) is a figure which shows the right side surface of the lock | rock main body which has the insertion port of an adapter in the rear surface. FIG. 102 (b) is a view showing the rear surface of the lock body of FIG. 102 (a).

  The lock main body 990 shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 102 (b) has an adapter insertion hole 991 on the rear surface, and can be fitted with an adapter. As shown in FIGS. 102 (a) and 102 (b), the rear surface is a plane. FIG. 102 (a) is a side view showing a state in which a dial ring is attached to the lock body 990. FIG. In FIG. 102 (b), the dial ring is not shown.

  FIG. 103 (a) is a top view of an adapter 992 that can be attached to the lock body 990. As shown in FIG. 103 (a), the adapter 992 is an adapter for changing the rear surface of the lock body into a curved surface. The adapter 992 is attached to the lock body 990 by having the return part 993 and inserting the return part 993 into the adapter insertion hole 991 of the lock body 990.

  FIG. 103 (b) is a right side view of the adapter 992. FIG. 103 (c) is a rear view of the adapter 992. As shown in FIGS. 103 (b) and 103 (c), the return portion 993 exists above and below the central portion of the adapter 992.

  FIG. 103 (d) is a diagram showing the appearance of only the part constituted by the return part 993 and the knob part 994. In FIG. 103 (d), the right figure is the figure which looked at the part enclosed by the ellipse of the left figure from diagonally back.

  The adapter 992 is attached to the lock body 990 in the following procedure. First, the upper and lower turn-up portions 993 are inserted into the adapter insertion holes 991 of the lock body 990 while the knob portion 994 is pinched and the interval between the upper and lower turn-up portions 993 is narrowed. When the knob portion 994 is released after being inserted, the adapter 992 is fixed to the lock main body 990 by returning to the original position with a restoring force.

  FIG. 104 is a top view of the lock body 990 to which the adapter 992 is attached. The rear surface of the lock body, which is a flat surface, is a curved surface when the adapter is attached.

  The adapter 980 and the adapter 992 described above are members that are attached to a lock body with a flat rear surface and change the rear surface into a curved surface. However, as in the case of the lock body 100 shown in FIG. 5, it is possible to produce an adapter that is attached to a lock body having a curved rear surface and changes the rear surface to a flat surface.

  Since the rear surface of the lock body is a surface in contact with the object to be locked, it is useful for the user of the dial lock that the rear surface of the lock body can be changed in accordance with the shape of the lock object without replacing the lock body.

  For example, a dial lock is usually used to lock a diary with a flat surface, but when locking an umbrella, an adapter with a curved surface is attached to the lock body to make the lock body more It can be locked by being brought into close contact with an umbrella.

  Further, the surface of the lock body that comes into contact with the article to be locked may be uneven, or a non-slip material such as rubber may be affixed. Non-slip materials such as irregularities and rubber may be present on the rear surface of the lock body. It may exist on the rear surface of the adapter.

  By doing so, it becomes difficult to remove the dial lock from the locked article, and the antitheft effect can be improved.

  Further, when the dial lock of Embodiments 1 and 2 is used to lock an article while tightening the band, it is necessary to hold the band at the tightened position and turn the dial ring to a position other than the unlocked position.

  However, for example, a structure in which an elastic body such as a spring is used and the band does not return even if the hand is released from the pulled band may be applied to the dial lock.

  FIG. 105 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the dial lock having a structure in which the band does not return. In order to describe the members inside the dial lock, the lock body 946 is shown in FIG. 105 (a) so that the internal structure can be seen.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 105 (a) includes a lock body 946, a shaft 368 with a locking portion, a spring 941, a band 763, and three lock dial rings. For example, a lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5 is used as the lock dial ring.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 105 (a) is in a locked state, and the spring 941 is in a compressed state. The locking portion-equipped shaft 368 receives a force that pushes it back to the right side by the repulsive force of the spring 941. The shaft 368 has a large-diameter portion 368a and has the same shape as the shaft 360 with a locking portion shown in FIG. 63, but the structure of the locking hole in the rear portion of the shaft is different.

  The shaft 368 has an inclined tapered portion 368c on the side surface in the axial head direction of the locking hole 368b. The band 763 has a plurality of return preventing portions 763 a and is passed through the band through hole 946 a and the locking hole 368 b of the lock body 946. The taper portion 368 c of the shaft 368 is a portion in contact with a plurality of return prevention portions 763 a provided in the band 763.

  FIG. 105B is a view for explaining the shape of the shaft rear portion of the locking portion-equipped shaft 368 and the return preventing portion 763 a of the band 763.

  In FIG. 105 (b), the upper view is a view of the shaft rear portion of the locking portion-equipped shaft 368 as viewed from the rear surface side of the lock body. The middle figure is the figure which looked at the axial rear part of the axis | shaft 368 with a latching | locking part from the upper surface side of the lock main body. The lower figure is a view of the rear part of the locking part-equipped shaft 368 as seen from the front side of the lock body.

  For the purpose of explaining the shape of each member, the return preventing portion 763a is located near the center of the locking hole 368b. However, in actuality, the return preventing portion 763a is located at a position where the side surface is in contact with the tapered portion 368c. come.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (b), the side surface of the return preventing portion 763a has a downward conical shape. Further, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), a spring 941 exists at the shaft head of the shaft 368 with the locking portion. Therefore, when the return preventing portion 763a tries to move from the top to the bottom of the locking hole 368b, the side surface of the return preventing portion 763a and the taper portion 368c come into contact with each other, so that the force to push the locking portion-attached shaft 368 back to the left side. work. That is, the return preventing portion 763a can exceed the tapered portion 368c while pushing the tapered portion 368c to the left side.

  After the return preventing portion 763a exceeds the taper portion 368c, the shaft with locking portion 368 is pushed back to the right side by the repulsive force of the spring 941. In this state, when the return preventing portion 763a attempts to return from the bottom to the top of the locking hole 368b, the surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the band 763 of the return preventing portion 763a is the shaft 368 with the locking portion below the tapered portion 368c. It will be in parallel with the surface. Therefore, the return preventing portion 763a cannot return from the bottom to the top of the locking hole 368b.

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the movement of each member when the dial lock shown in FIG. 105 (a) is in the locked state.

  First, (1) when the band head of the band 763 is pulled downward, the return preventing portion 763a and the tapered portion 368c come into contact with each other, and (2) the shaft 368 with the locking portion receives a force in the left direction, Start moving to the left. (3) When the band head of the band 763 is further pulled downward, (4) the shaft with locking portion 368 further moves to the left.

  After the above operation, when the return preventing portion 763a comes out below the tapered portion 368c, the shaft 368 with the locking portion is pushed back to the right by the repulsive force of the spring 941, and returns to the state shown in FIG. When unlocking, the band main body of the band 763 may be loosened or pulled out from the lock main body 946 while pushing the locking portion-equipped shaft 368 to the left.

  In this way, the dial lock can be provided with a structure that prevents the band main body from being returned backward once the member that locks the band main body is exceeded by using the repulsive force of the spring.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 105 (a) uses the repulsive force of the spring. However, the dial lock has the same structure as that of the dial lock shown in FIG. 105 (a) and uses the spring pulling force. You can also.

  FIG. 107 (a) is a diagram showing another example of the internal structure of the dial lock having a structure in which the band does not return. For the purpose of explaining the members inside the dial lock, the lock body 946 is shown in FIG. 107 (a) so that the internal structure can be seen.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 107 (a) includes a lock body 946, a shaft 369 with a locking portion, a spring 941a, a band 763, and three lock dial rings. For example, a lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5 is used as the lock dial ring.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 107 (a) is in a locked state, and the spring 941 is in an extended state. The locking portion-equipped shaft 369 receives a force that is pulled back to the left side by the pulling force of the spring 941. Unlike the shaft 368 with the locking portion shown in FIG. 105 (a), the shaft 369 with the locking portion has a tapered portion 369c that is inclined on the side surface in the axial rear portion direction of the locking hole 369b.

  FIG. 107B is a view for explaining the shape of the shaft rear portion of the locking portion-equipped shaft 369 and the return preventing portion 763a of the band 763.

  In FIG. 107 (b), the upper figure is the figure which looked at the axial rear part of the axis | shaft 369 with a latching | locking part from the rear surface side of the lock main body. The middle figure is the figure which looked at the axial rear part of the axis | shaft 369 with a latching | locking part from the upper surface side of the lock main body. The lower figure is the figure which looked at the axial rear part of the axis | shaft 369 with a latching | locking part from the front side of the lock main body.

  For the purpose of explaining the shape of each member, the return preventing portion 763a is located near the center of the locking hole 368b. However, in actuality, the return preventing portion 763a is located at a position where the side surface is in contact with the tapered portion 369c. come.

  When the return preventing portion 763a attempts to move from the top to the bottom of the locking hole 368b, the side surface of the return preventing portion 763a and the tapered portion 369c are in contact with each other, thereby pushing the shaft 368 with the locking portion to the right and moving it. Work. That is, the return preventing portion 763a can exceed the tapered portion 369c while pushing the tapered portion 368c to the right.

  After the return preventing portion 763a exceeds the taper portion 369c, the shaft with locking portion 369 is pulled back to the left side by the pulling force of the spring 941a. In this state, when the return preventing portion 763a attempts to return from the bottom to the top of the locking hole 369b, the surface perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the band 763 of the return preventing portion 763a is the shaft 369 with the locking portion below the tapered portion 369c. It will be in parallel with the surface. Therefore, the return preventing portion 763a cannot return from the bottom to the top of the locking hole 369b.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the movement of each member when the dial lock shown in FIG. 107 (a) is in a locked state.

  First, (1) when the band head of the band 763 is pulled downward, the return preventing portion 763a and the tapered portion 369c come into contact with each other, and (2) the shaft 369 with the locking portion receives a force in the right direction. Start moving to the right. (3) When the band head of the band 763 is further pulled down, (4) the shaft 369 with the locking portion moves further to the right.

  After the above operation, when the return preventing portion 763a comes out below the tapered portion 369c, the shaft 369 with the locking portion is pulled back to the left by the pulling of the spring 941a and returns to the state shown in FIG. 107 (a). When unlocking, the band body of the band 763 may be loosened or pulled out from the lock body 946 while pulling the locking part-equipped shaft 369 to the right.

  As described above, the dial lock can be provided with a structure that prevents the band body from being returned after the member that locks the band body is temporarily exceeded by using the pulling force of the spring.

  In addition, both the dial lock shown in FIG. 105 (a) and the dial lock shown in FIG. 107 (a) cannot be pulled out of the lock body when locked. However, at the time of unlocking, the shaft can be extracted from the lock body. That is, these dial locks can be disassembled only when unlocked, and can be reassembled repeatedly.

  Further, a dial lock having two shafts, like the dial lock 2 of the second embodiment, can be disassembled only when unlocked and can be reassembled.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a structure and an assembling procedure of a dial lock having two shafts that can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking and have a structure that can be reassembled.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 109 has two shafts that hold the dial ring rotatably. The shafts are integrated with the lock body to form a lock-equipped lock body 954. Further, the sub member 955 can be attached to the lock main body 954 with the shaft after the dial ring is passed through each shaft.

  In addition, although three dial rings are attached to each shaft, a locking member such as a band is attached to one of the shafts as in the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. 30 (a) or FIG. 34 (a). What is necessary is just to provide the dial ring for latching. Moreover, you may provide the dial ring for latching a band to both shafts like the dial lock 2 shown in FIG. Further, in FIG. 109, illustration of a hole or groove through which a locking member such as a band passes through the shaft-locked main body 954 and the sub member 955, and illustration of the band attachment hole are omitted.

  110 (a) is a right side view of the sub member 955, and FIG. 110 (b) is a left side view of the lock main body 954 with a shaft. In FIGS. 110 (a) and 110 (b), the surface without dots is the frontmost surface, and the surface with dense dots is the innermost surface. The surface with the rough dots is the surface existing between them.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the procedure for assembling the dial lock is as follows: (1) Pass three dial rings on each shaft, and (2) press the sub member 955 against the left side of the shaft from left to right. From the front, the left side surface of the shaft-equipped locking body 954 is slid from the front to the rear. By this operation, the convex portion 955a of the sub member 955 is inserted into the concave 954a in the left rear portion of the shaft-locking main body 954. At the same time, two concave portions 954b near the tip of the shaft and two convex portions 955b of the sub member 955 are fitted. The assembly is completed by the above procedure.

  In this dial lock, for example, even if it is a locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position or a locking member that can be locked at a specific fixed position, the locking member is at least one of the sub member 955 and the locking member. When penetrating the boundary with the shaft, the sub member 955 cannot be slid forward. That is, even in the unlocked state, the sub member 955 cannot be removed from the shaft-equipped locking body 954, and the dial lock cannot be disassembled. If the locking portion is locked with the dial ring in this state, the sub member 955 can be locked to the lock main body 954 with the shaft.

  However, in the unlocked state, the sub member 955 can be detached from the shaft-locked main body 954 by extracting the locking member such as a band from the sub-member 955 and the shaft-locked main body 954. That is, the dial lock shown in FIG. 109 is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked and can be reassembled.

  In addition, you may apply the method of attaching a submember to a lock main body with a shaft, sliding to a dial lock with one axis | shaft.

  FIG. 111 is the same as FIG. 82 in that the shaft has a single dial lock and can be attached while sliding the sub member onto the shaft-equipped lock body. It is a lock | rock made into the structure fitted more firmly than the shown lock | rock, and is a figure which shows an example of the structure and an assembly procedure.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 111 includes a shaft-equipped lock body 956 having one shaft, a sub member 957, and three dial rings. As the three dial rings, for example, a lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5 may be used. In FIG. 111, illustration of a hole or groove through which a locking member such as a band passes through the shaft-locked main body 956 and the auxiliary member 957, and illustration of the band attachment hole are omitted.

  112 (a) is a right side view of the sub member 957, and FIG. 112 (b) is a left side view of the lock main body 956 with a shaft. In FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), the surface without dots is the front surface, and the surface with dense dots is the innermost surface. The surface with the rough dots is the surface existing between them.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the procedure for assembling the dial lock is as follows: (1) pass three dial rings through the shaft, and (2) press the secondary member 957 from left to right against the left side surface of the shaft. Slide from the front to the back of the left side surface of the lockable main body 956 with a shaft. By this operation, the convex portion 957a of the sub member 957 is inserted into the concave 956a in the left rear portion of the shaft-locking main body 956. At the same time, the recess 956b near the tip of the shaft and the projection 957b of the sub member 957 are fitted. The assembly is completed by the above procedure.

  Similarly to the dial lock shown in FIG. 109, the dial lock shown in FIG. 111 is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked and can be reassembled.

  82, 109 and 111, in the case of a dial lock composed of a shaft-locked main body and a sub member, the sub-member cannot be removed from the shaft-locked main body due to the structure of the band mounting hole. can do. The following description will be made with reference to FIG. 113, but the same applies to the case of the biaxial structure.

  FIG. 113 (a) is a diagram showing the structure of a dial lock having a band attachment hole in the right rear portion of the lock body. This structure is employed, for example, in the dial lock 1 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 113A, by passing the band main body through the dial ring, the band main body penetrates the auxiliary member 957 and the shaft-locked main body 956 at the same time. Thereby, the sub member 957 cannot be removed from the lock main body 956 with a shaft.

  In contrast to the above structure, FIG. 113 (b) shows a structure in which the auxiliary member cannot be removed from the shaft-locked main body even when the band main body does not pass through the ring.

  FIG. 113 (b) is a diagram showing a structure of a dial lock in which a band attachment hole is provided so as to penetrate the boundary between the shaft-locked main body and the sub member. As shown in FIG. 113 (b), a band is inserted from a location near the auxiliary member 957 at the rear of the shaft-locked main body 956, and the band is extended from the left side surface of the auxiliary member 957. In this case, the band stopper is locked by a band mounting hole formed across the shaft-equipped locking body 956 and the sub member 957. Thereby, the sub member 957 cannot be slid forward, and the sub member 957 cannot be removed from the lock main body 956 with a shaft.

  Further, by providing the band attachment hole only in the sub member, it is possible to prevent the band from falling off the lock body even when unlocking.

  FIG. 113 (c) is a diagram showing a structure of a dial lock in which a band attachment hole is provided only in the sub member. As shown in FIG. 113 (c), a band attachment hole exists in the sub member 957. The band is inserted into the band mounting hole from the right side surface of the sub member 957 until the band stopper is locked by the band mounting hole. The sub member 957 in this state is attached to the lock main body 956 with a shaft.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (c), the rear end of the band does not fall out of the band mounting hole of the sub member 957. Further, the sub member 957 cannot be removed from the shaft-equipped locking body 956 by passing through the band body dial ring and being locked by the dial ring.

  The above-described locking member used for the dial lock having the structure shown in FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (c) may not be a band that can be locked at an arbitrary position. The locking member may be locked only at a specific position. Moreover, even if the dial lock has any structure, it can be disassembled only when unlocked and can be reassembled.

  111-axis dial lock and 2-axis dial lock can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked based on the structure in which the shaft is integrated with the lock body. I have explained that. However, the shaft is inserted into the lock body from the same direction as the dial ring is inserted into the shaft, and only a part of the shaft is inserted into the shaft insertion hole or shaft insertion hole in the relationship shown in FIGS. If the shaft is inserted and fixed, the shaft cannot pass to the left side of the lock body. After inserting the shaft into the lock body, pass the dial ring through the shaft, and then move the secondary member outside the lock body. Furthermore, by pressing the shaft and dial ring in the axial direction and then assembling it by inserting it into the lock body, it can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked, similar to the structure in which the shaft is integrated with the lock body. Become.

  In other words, after the assembly of the dial ring portion is completed, the locking portion is locked to the dial ring in a state where the locking member exists through the boundary between the sub member and the shaft. Then, the sub member, dial ring, and shaft cannot be disassembled from the lock body. However, if the lock member is unlocked and the locking member is not hung on the boundary between the sub member and the shaft, the sub member, the dial ring, and the shaft can be disassembled from the lock body, and can be reassembled after disassembly. In this way, the shaft and the lock main body are not integrated, and the member can be made into a simple shape by enabling assembly and disassembly, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, even a dial lock that separately uses a part for preventing the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body can be disassembled only when unlocked and can be reassembled.

  When parts for preventing the shaft from being pulled out from the lock body (hereinafter referred to as “shaft retaining member”) are used, the shaft retaining member may not be removed from the lock body or the shaft itself during locking. is necessary. Therefore, as one method, it is conceivable to cover the shaft retaining member at the time of locking.

  However, when a band locked at an arbitrary position is used for the lock body, the locked position is not constant. Therefore, for example, it is conceivable that the shaft retaining member is exposed to the outside depending on the position where the band is locked.

  Therefore, an effective method is to provide the shaft retaining member with a hole, hole or groove into which a locking member such as a band is inserted so that the shaft retaining member cannot be removed from the lock body during locking. Conceivable.

  FIG. 114 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the structure and assembly procedure of a dial lock using a shaft retaining member. As shown in FIG. 114 (a), this dial lock includes a lock body 958, a shaft 381, a shaft retaining member 959, and three dial rings.

  As the dial ring, for example, a lock dial ring 200 shown in FIG. 5 may be used.

  The procedure for assembling this dial lock is as follows. (1) Insert the three dial rings into the dial ring mounting portion of the lock body 958. (2) Insert the shaft 381 from the left side. (3) Insert the shaft retaining member 959 into the lock body 958. In the figure, the portion of the lock body 958 into which the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted is a hole that does not penetrate the lock body 958, but may be a hole that penetrates the lock body 958.

  FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram showing the shape of the shaft 381. The view on the left of the top view of the shaft 381 is a left view of the shaft 381, and the view below the top view is a front view of the shaft 381. As shown in FIG. 114 (b), the shaft 381 has a shaft retaining groove 381a which is a groove into which the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted, in addition to the shaft side groove which is a groove through which the band passes. In the lock body 958, the shaft 381 cannot be removed from the lock body by inserting the shaft retaining member 959 into the shaft retaining groove 381a.

  FIG. 114 (c) is a left side view of the shaft retaining member 959. FIG. As shown in FIG. 114 (c), when the shaft retaining member 959 is pulled out from the lock body, the locking hole 959a, which is a hole through which the band penetrates, restrains the shaft retaining member to the lock body, and the shaft retaining member 959. And a groove 959b for hooking a nail or the like.

  Since the band main body is passed through the locking hole 959 a in the lock main body 958, the shaft retaining member 959 cannot be extracted from the lock main body 958.

  FIG. 114 (d) is a left side view of the lock body 958 with the shaft 381 and the shaft retaining member 959 inserted therein. As shown in FIG. 114 (d), the band main body inserted from the left side surface of the lock main body 958 passes through the locking hole 959 a of the shaft retaining member 959. In this state, the shaft retaining member 959 cannot be extracted from the lock body 958. The shaft retaining member 959 exists across the shaft 381 and the lock body 958 and restrains the shaft 381 to the lock body 958. Accordingly, the shaft 381 cannot be extracted from the lock body 958 unless the shaft retaining member 959 can be extracted from the lock body 958.

  Therefore, the dial lock shown in FIG. 114 (a) can be disassembled only when unlocked, and can be reassembled repeatedly.

  Further, instead of the shaft retaining member 959 having the locking hole 959a, a shaft retaining member having a locking groove which is a groove through which a band penetrates and restrains the shaft retaining member to the lock body may be used.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a view showing an example of an axial member having a groove through which a band passes. The shaft retaining member 995 shown in FIG. 115 (a) has a locking groove 995a that is a groove through which the band passes.

  FIG. 115 (b) is a left side view of the lock body 958 with the shaft retaining member 995 inserted therein. In this state, when the band main body is inserted from the left side surface of the lock main body 958, the band main body penetrates the locking groove 995a of the shaft retaining member 995. Therefore, the shaft retaining member 995 cannot be extracted from the lock body 958. As a result, the shaft 381 cannot be extracted from the lock body 958.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted from the front surface of the lock body 958. However, the direction in which the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted into the lock body 958 is not limited to the front surface.

  FIG. 116 is a view showing a state in which the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted from the upper surface of the lock body 958. As shown in FIG. 116, even when the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted from the upper surface of the lock main body 958, the shaft retaining member 959 cannot be pulled out from the lock main body 958 at the time of locking. There is no change that the lock body 958 cannot be extracted.

  FIG. 117 is a view showing a state where the shaft retaining member is inserted from the rear surface of the lock body 958. The shaft retaining member 996 shown in FIG. 117 requires a length for penetrating the shaft from the rear surface of the lock body 958, and is longer than the shaft retaining member 959. Note that the shaft retaining member 996 also penetrates the shaft 381, similarly to the shaft retaining member 959. Further, similarly to the locking hole 959a in the shaft retaining member 959 and the locking groove 995a in the shaft retaining member 995, there are holes and grooves through which the band main body passes. Therefore, at the time of locking, the shaft retaining member 996 cannot be extracted from the lock body 958, and accordingly, the shaft 381 cannot be extracted from the lock body 958.

  FIG. 118 (a) is a top view of a dial lock in which the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted from the front surface. The same figure is obtained when the shaft retaining member 995 is used.

  118 (b) is a top view of a dial lock in which the shaft retaining member 959 is inserted from above, and FIG. 118 (c) is a top view of the dial lock in which the shaft retaining member 996 is inserted from the rear surface. is there.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 118 (c), the band attachment hole is provided in the lock body 958 so as to cross the shaft retaining member 996. That is, the band penetrates the shaft retaining member 996 twice.

  In this way, the locking member 996 can be removed from the locking body 958 as long as the band is not completely pulled out from the location that exists across the boundary between the locking body and the locking member 996 even during unlocking. It becomes impossible to extract. Accordingly, the dial lock cannot be disassembled unless the band is completely extracted from the place where the band exists across the boundary between the lock body and the shaft retaining member 996.

  In any form of the dial lock shown in FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (c), the locking member cannot be extracted from the lock body during locking. The shaft retaining member passes through the shaft, and if the shaft retaining member cannot be extracted from the lock body, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body.

  In other words, any type of dial lock can be disassembled only when unlocked, and can be repeatedly reassembled.

  This shaft retaining member is a dial lock in which the locking portion is locked at a specific fixed position, and can also be applied to a type in which the rotation shaft of the dial ring is present and the locking portion is locked in the dial ring.

  That is, the locking member is engaged with a part of the rotary shaft of the dial ring in the lock body, and the locking portion locked by the dial ring is different from the insertion / removal direction of the locking member in the lock body. If the structure is such that the shaft retaining member is fitted, the dial ring is fixed to the lock body with the shaft, the shaft retaining member is inserted from the outside of the lock body, and the locking portion is locked after being fitted to the shaft. When the locking part is inserted into the main body and the shaft and the locking portion is locked with the dial ring, the shaft retaining member, the shaft and the dial ring cannot be disassembled from the lock body, and can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked.

  The shaft may have a shaft retaining hole or a shaft retaining hole instead of a groove (for example, the shaft retaining groove 381a in FIG. 114 (b)) into which the shaft retaining member is inserted. In short, at least a part of the shaft retaining hole, shaft retaining hole or shaft retaining groove into which the shaft retaining member is inserted is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body. In the state in which the shaft retaining member is inserted into the shaft, the shaft cannot be extracted from the lock body.

  Further, the shaft retaining member is not a hole (for example, the locking hole 959a in FIG. 114 (c)) or a groove (for example, the locking groove 995a in FIG. 115 (a)) into which the locking member is inserted. You may have. For example, in the shaft, the shaft side groove into which the locking member is inserted does not penetrate the shaft, and there is a shaft retaining groove, a shaft retaining hole or a shaft retaining hole in which the shaft retaining member is inserted near the terminal end of the shaft side groove. In this case, if the shaft retaining member has a hole into which the head of the locking member is present at the time of locking, the head of the locking member is inserted into the hole of the shaft retaining member at the time of locking. Will be.

  Therefore, at least a part of the hole, hole or groove into which the locking member is inserted is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft fixing member with respect to the lock body. In a state where the locking member is inserted, the shaft retaining member cannot be extracted from the shaft.

  Further, when an adapter as shown in FIGS. 100 and 103 is attached to the dial lock, the adapter may be prevented from being removed from the lock body during locking by passing the locking member through the adapter.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of an adapter that can be attached and detached by sliding up and down and a shape of a lock body corresponding to the adapter. FIG. 119 (a) is a top view of the lock body 975 and the adapter 976, and three dial rings are attached to the lock body 975. FIG.

  In addition, in the lock body shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to 120 (b), the surface to which the adapter is attached is the rear surface, and the opposite surface, that is, the side where the dial ring exists is the front surface. The left and right sides are based on the front view.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (a), the lock body 975 is provided with grooves corresponding to the two protrusions of the adapter 976. Moreover, the dotted line in a figure represents the hole used as the band attachment hole for attaching a band. That is, in a state where the adapter 976 is attached to the lock body 975, one band attachment hole is formed so as to penetrate the boundary between the lock body 975 and the adapter 976.

  FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of how to attach the adapter 976 to the lock body 975. As shown in FIG. 119 (b), the adapter 976 is attached to the lock body 975 while sliding the lock body 975 from below to above. Similarly, the lock body 975 can be attached while being slid from the upper side to the lower side.

  FIG. 119 (c) is a top view of the lock body 975 with the adapter 976 attached. As described above, one band attachment hole is formed so as to penetrate the boundary between the lock body 975 and the adapter 976. In the state where the band is inserted into the band mounting hole and the band passes through the band mounting hole, unless the band is completely pulled out from the place where the band exists across the boundary between the lock body 975 and the adapter 976, The adapter 976 cannot be slid up and down with respect to the lock body 975.

  Of course, if the band attachment hole, which is the passage of the band, is the same as the direction of attaching and removing the adapter to the lock body, and the band is not locked by the dial ring, the adapter is pulled away from the lock body together with the band. Is possible.

  However, as described above, the adapter is attached to and detached from the lock body in the vertical direction with respect to the lock body, and the direction of the band passage is approximately in the longitudinal direction with respect to the lock body.

  That is, the passage of the band is formed in a direction different from the direction in which the adapter is attached to and detached from the lock body. Thus, as described above, the adapter cannot be slid up and down with respect to the lock body unless the band is completely extracted from the place where the band exists across the boundary between the lock body and the adapter. That is, the adapter cannot be removed from the lock body.

  Therefore, in the case of the lock body 975 and the adapter 976 shown in FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (c), the band is not limited to the boundary between the lock body 975 and the adapter 976, even when unlocked. The adapter 976 cannot be removed from the lock body 975 unless it is completely withdrawn from where it exists across.

  The passage through which the band passes through the lock body 975 and the adapter 976 may not be a hole but may be a groove. In other words, the band may have a structure in which a part of the portion existing in the lock body 975 and the adapter 976 can be seen from outside the lock body 975 and the adapter 976. In short, any shape may be used as long as the band cannot be taken out from the hole other than the hole or the entrance of the groove.

  Further, the passage through which the band penetrates the lock body 975 and the adapter 976 may be other than the place shown in FIG. 119 (c), for example, the position shown in FIG. 119 (d) or 119 (e).

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 119 (d), a band as a locking member is connected in advance to the lock body 975. The adapter 976 has a hole through which the band passes at the end of the curved surface portion, and when the article is locked, almost the entire curved surface portion of the adapter 976 can be in close contact with the article.

  Further, the hole in the lock body 975 at the position continuing from the hole of the adapter 976 is positioned so as to be connected to the inside of the dial ring as it is, and the head of the band inserted from the outside into the hole of the adapter 976 is It enters the hole of the main body 975, passes through the three dial rings, and comes out of the lock main body 975.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 119 (e) is similar to the dial lock shown in FIG. 119 (d) so that the hole at the position continuing from the hole of the adapter 976 in the lock body 975 is directly connected to the inside of the dial ring. positioned. Further, the lock body 975 further has a hole for attaching a band, and the adapter 976 has a hole at a position following the hole. That is, in this figure, the band inserted from the hole on the left side surface of the lock body 975 passes through the lock body 975 and the adapter 976 and once comes out. Then, it is inserted into the hole on the right side of the adapter 976 so as to wind the article to be locked, and passes through the lock body 975 and the three dial rings and comes out.

  Note that also in the dial lock shown in FIG. 119 (e), the two holes through which the band existing in the adapter 976 passes are open at both ends of the curved surface portion of the adapter 976. Therefore, when the article is locked, almost the entire curved surface portion can be in close contact with the article.

  Thus, if the passage through which the band penetrates the lock body and the adapter is formed in a direction different from the direction in which the adapter is attached to and detached from the lock body, the effect of locking the adapter to the lock body by the band is produced. Can be made. In addition, this passage can be changed according to the locking form, the design, etc., as long as the conditions in the above direction are satisfied, and even if it is changed, the above effect is not lost.

  In FIG. 119 (d), when the locking member is locked at a specific position, the locking member needs to penetrate the adapter 976, but does not need to penetrate the lock body 975. Even in the form, the adapter 976 cannot be disassembled from the lock body 975 at the time of locking.

  The adapter 976 has a shape that converts the rear surface of the lock body from a flat surface to a curved surface, but may have a shape that converts the rear surface of the lock body from a curved surface to a flat surface. Moreover, even if it is an adapter of such a shape, you may form one band attachment hole with a lock main body as mentioned above.

  FIG. 120 (a) is an adapter that is detachable by sliding up and down, and shows an example of the adapter for converting the rear surface of the lock body from a curved surface to a flat surface and the shape of the lock body corresponding to the adapter. is there. FIG. 120 (a) is a top view of the lock body 977 and the adapter 978, and three dial rings are attached to the lock body 977. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), the rear surface of the lock body 977 is a curved surface, and is provided with two grooves to which the adapter 978 can be attached. Moreover, the rear surface of the adapter is a flat surface.

  Similarly to the case shown in FIG. 119 (a), when the adapter 978 is attached to the lock body 977, one band attachment hole is formed so as to penetrate the boundary between the lock body 977 and the adapter 978.

  The adapter 978 is attached to the lock body 977 while being slid from below to the lock body 977 in the same manner as the adapter 976 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is attached to the lock body 975. In addition, it can also be attached to the lock body 977 while sliding upward from below.

  FIG. 120C is a top view of the lock body 977 with the adapter 978 attached. As described above, one band attachment hole is formed so as to penetrate the boundary between the lock body 977 and the adapter 978.

  That is, even in a dial lock having the lock body 977 and the adapter 978 as components, the adapter 978 is locked unless the band is completely extracted from the place where the band exists across the boundary between the lock body 977 and the adapter 978. The main body 977 cannot be slid. In other words, as long as the lock is not locked, and the lock is unlocked as long as the band is not completely pulled out from the existing location across the boundary between the lock body 977 and the adapter 978. It cannot be removed from 977.

  In this way, it is possible to make it impossible to remove the adapter from the lock body by allowing the band to cross the boundary between the adapter and the lock body.

  Specifically, as described in the description of the dial lock in FIG. 119 (c), the passage through which the band penetrates the lock body and the adapter is formed in a direction different from the direction in which the adapter is attached to and detached from the lock body. If so, remove the adapter from the lock body as long as it is not completely pulled out of the existing location across the boundary between the lock body and the adapter, not to mention when locking I can't.

  In addition, the adapter is attached to the lock body in such a way that it is slid from the bottom to the top or from the top to the bottom. By changing it, it can be attached by sliding from the left or right, or it can be attached by sliding in an oblique direction. If the adapter and lock body can be assembled, either side has a protrusion or a groove. I do not care. If the locking member is present across the boundary between the adapter and the lock body and the direction is different from the attaching / detaching direction of the adapter and the lock body, the adapter and the lock body cannot be disassembled during locking.

  In addition, with regard to a structure in which the dial lock can be disassembled only when unlocked, for example, in the dial lock shown in FIG. It was possible. However, it may be possible to disassemble the dial lock only when unlocking with another structure, for example, the shaft member and the lock body are connected so that they cannot be removed only during locking, and the dial ring provided at the rear end of the shaft member A locking device that can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking may be configured by restricting movement of the dial ring in the axial direction by means of a retaining rod and a wall of the lock body.

  FIG. 121 shows that the locking member passage connects the shaft member and the lock body by crossing the boundary between the lock body and the shaft member at a position on the shaft side in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body. And it is a figure which shows the several examples of the structure of the dial lock which restrict | limits the movement of the dial ring to the axial direction with the collar provided in the shaft member, and the wall of a lock main body.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (a) includes a flanged shaft 355, three lock dial rings 200, and a lock body 357. The lock body 357 has a hole through which the flanged shaft 355 passes. By combining these members, a dial lock having a structure as shown on the right side of the arrow in the figure is obtained.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (b) includes a flanged shaft 356, three lock dial rings 200, and a lock body 358. The lock body 358 has a hole into which the flanged shaft 356 is inserted. By combining these members, a dial lock having a structure as shown in the figure on the right side of the arrow in the figure is obtained.

  Each of the dial locks shown in FIG. 121 (a) and FIG. 121 (b) has a lock on the left side surface of the lock body in a state where the shaft member and the lock body are connected so that they cannot be removed during locking. The dial ring 200 cannot move in the right direction, and cannot move in the left direction due to the hook of the hooked shaft. In FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b), illustration of other structures such as shaft side grooves of the flanged shaft 355 and the flanged shaft 356 is omitted. In each dial lock, the hooked shaft is held by the lock body. Each figure shows an outline of the structure of the dial lock when viewed from the direction in which the notch portion of the lock dial ring is present at the time of unlocking.

  121 (c) to 121 (l) show a lock body and a hook shaft for connecting the lock body and the hooked shaft in the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (b) so that they cannot be disassembled when locked. It is a figure which shows the variation of the channel | path for a locking member which crosses the boundary of this in the direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to a lock main body in the position of a shaft side surface. The dial ring provided with three dial locks is a lock dial ring 200. 121 (c) to 121 (j), the locking member is inserted from the locking member mounting groove or the locking member mounting hole of the lock body 358, and the tail of the locking member is the lock body 358. It is latched by the locking member mounting groove or the locking member mounting hole. 121 (k) and 121 (l), the locking member is inserted from the flange portion of the flanged shaft 356, and the tail portion of the locking member is the locking member mounting groove or engagement of the flange portion. It is locked by the stop member mounting hole.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (c) has a passage (hereinafter referred to as “coupling passage”) that penetrates the lock body 358 and a portion of the hooked shaft 356 in the lock body 358. 121 (c) to 121 (j), the coupling passage is a passage that crosses the boundary between the lock body 358 and the portion of the hooked shaft 356 in the lock body 358 at the position of the shaft side surface. It has become. The locking member coming out of the passage is inserted from the flange portion of the flanged shaft 356, and is locked by the three locking dial rings without penetrating the flanged shaft 356. That is, the shaft-side groove that passes through the three locking dial rings (hereinafter referred to as “locking shaft-side groove”) does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356.

  The locking member exists in the coupling passage, and the coupling passage is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 with respect to the lock body 358. Therefore, at least during locking, the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356 cannot be separated. Further, at the time of unlocking, the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356 can be separated by removing the locking member from the portion of the coupling passage that extends over the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356. The dial lock is disassembled. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (d) has substantially the same structure as the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (c), and has a coupling passage having the same position and shape. However, the locking shaft side groove of the flanged shaft 356 passes through the flanged shaft 356, and the lock body has a hole through which the locking member passes at a position following the locking shaft side groove. .

  Also in the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (d), the lock main body 358 and the hooked shaft 356 cannot be separated at least during locking by the coupling passage. Further, at the time of unlocking, the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356 can be separated by removing the locking member from the portion of the coupling passage that extends over the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356. The dial lock is disassembled. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (e) has a locking shaft side groove that does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356, like the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (c). Further, there is a coupling passage having a position and shape different from the shape of the coupling passage of the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (c). However, since this coupling passage is also formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 with respect to the lock body 358, it becomes a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  121 (f), like the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (d), has a locking shaft-side groove that penetrates the flanged shaft 356, and the lock main body is used for the locking. There is a hole through which the locking member penetrates at a position following the shaft side groove. Further, there is a coupling passage having the same position and shape as the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (e). The coupling passage and the passage including the locking shaft side groove are in a twisted position and do not intersect. This coupling passage provides a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (g), the locking member passed through the coupling passage is inserted from the shaft head side of the lock body 358 and inserted into the shaft from the shaft head of the flanged shaft 356. Yes. Further, the locking shaft side groove does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356. As described above, even if the locking member is inserted into the locking shaft side groove from the lock body 358 side, not from the flange portion side of the flanged shaft 356, the locking member can be locked by the locking dial ring. is there. Further, since the coupling passage is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 with respect to the lock body 358, a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked is obtained.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (h) has a coupling passage having the same position and shape as the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (g). Similarly to the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (g), a locking member passed through the coupling passage is inserted from the shaft head side of the lock body 358. Further, the inserted locking member passes through the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356. Even when the locking shaft side groove penetrates the flanged shaft 356 as described above, the locking member engagement by the locking dial ring of the locking member is similar to the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (g). It can be stopped. Further, the coupling passage allows the dial lock to be disassembled only when unlocked.

  In addition, the structure of the locking member mounting groove or the locking member mounting hole in FIG. 121 (d) enables the mounting of the locking member regardless of whether the locking member is inserted from either end. It becomes possible to lock in the same shape as 121 (h). That is, by devising the locking member mounting groove or the locking member mounting hole, the same dial lock can be used to lock in different forms of FIG. 121 (d) and FIG. 121 (h).

  121 (i) is similar to the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (d) in that the locking member passed through the coupling passage extends from the hook portion of the hooked shaft 356 to the locking shaft side groove. It is inserted and penetrates the flanged shaft 356 and the lock body 358. However, both ends of the passage including the locking shaft side groove are curved. As described with reference to FIGS. 13 (d) to 13 (g), the effect of preventing the peeping of the part for unlocking through this passage is exhibited by this curvature. Further, since the coupling passage is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 with respect to the lock body 358, a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked is obtained.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (j), like the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (i), is curved at both ends of the passage including the locking shaft side groove. Can be prevented. Similarly to the dial lock of FIG. 121 (h), the locking member passed through the coupling passage is inserted from the shaft head side of the lock body 358 and penetrates the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356. ing. Also in this form, it becomes a dial lock which can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking by the coupling passage.

  It should be noted that the passages including the coupling passages and the locking shaft side grooves shown in FIG. 121 (i) and FIG. 121 (j) may be completely the same. That is, in the same dial lock, the locking member that has exited the coupling passage can be inserted and locked from the lock body 358 on the shaft head side, or can be locked by being inserted from the hook portion of the hooked shaft 356. Can also be possible.

  Furthermore, even in a lock other than a dial lock, in a locking device using a long locking member that can be locked at an arbitrary position, when the locking member passage penetrates the locking device, The structure can be locked even if the locking member is inserted from either end of the passage. Further, even if the locking member is locked at a specific position, the locking member can be inserted from either end of the passage if both ends of the locking member passage are open on the outer surface of the locking device. The structure can also be locked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (k) is different from the dial lock shown in FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (j), and the locking member is first passed through the hook portion of the hooked shaft 356 to lock the dial lock. The tail of the member is locked at the heel portion. Also, a locking member passage is formed that crosses the boundary between the lock body and the flanged shaft at a position on the side of the shaft in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, and the portion where the locking member crosses the boundary It is locked to the dial ring 200 in a state where it exists over the two. That is, a part of the locking shaft side groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body. Note that the locking shaft side groove does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 121 (k), the locking member passage differs from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 with respect to the lock body 358 at the position of the shaft side surface at the boundary between the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356. If there is a locking member that crosses in the direction and crosses the boundary, the hooked shaft 356 cannot be pulled out of the lock body 358 regardless of the presence or absence of the body side groove.

  Even when the locking member passage does not cross the boundary between the lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356 at the position of the shaft side surface, the body side groove exists and is formed by the locking shaft side groove and the body side groove. By forming a part of the hole in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 with respect to the lock body 358, the locking shaft side groove portion formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356 is formed. The locking member on the extraction side of the shaft member is present from the locking shaft side groove portion that is present in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the flanged shaft 356, or that the existing locking member exists over the main body side groove. Since the locking member present in the side groove portion exists across the main body side groove, the hooked shaft 356 cannot be pulled out from the lock main body 358.

  That is, the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (k) is also a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked. Further, since the end of the passage including the locking shaft side groove on the side of the lock body 358 is curved, it is possible to prevent peeping at the part for unlocking.

  The above-mentioned locking member passage crosses the boundary between the lock body and the shaft member at a position on the shaft side in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, and the locking member crosses the boundary. Even if the locking member passage does not cross the boundary between the lock main body and the shaft member at the position of the shaft side surface, the main body side groove exists, and the locking shaft side groove and the main body side groove By forming a part of the hole to be formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, the hole exists in the locking shaft side groove portion formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member. The locking member exists over the main body side groove, or the locking member exists in the locking shaft side groove portion on the extraction side from the locking shaft side groove portion formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member. Is due to the fact that it exists across the body side groove The results can also be applied to each of the dial locks of FIGS. 121 (c) to 121 (j). In other dial locks having a long locking member, holes and holes into which shaft members are inserted are provided. The present invention can also be applied to all members having the same.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (l) has the same structure as that of the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (k), and a part of the locking shaft side groove is inserted / removed in / from the lock body 358. It is formed in a different direction. Further, the locking shaft side groove penetrates the flanged shaft 356. Further, both ends of the passage including the locking shaft side groove are curved.

  Therefore, similarly to the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (k), it has the effect of preventing peeping at the site for unlocking. In addition, as in the case of the dial lock of FIG. 121 (k), even when the locking member is loose or when unlocked, the locking member is not pulled out from the boundary between the lock body 358 and the shaft member 356. The lock body 358 and the flanged shaft 356 cannot be separated.

  121 (k) and 121 (l) are inserted from the shaft head side, but are inserted from the flange side of the flanged shaft 356, and the locking shaft side groove is the shaft head. Even if it is bent or bent on the side, it becomes a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  121 (c) to 121 (l) are views showing variations of the locking member passages in the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (b), but similar variations are also shown in FIG. 121 (a). Can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  In each of the dial locks shown in FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (l), if three lock dial rings are excluded, the hooked shaft 355 and the lock body 357, or the hooked shaft 356 and the lock body 358 are used. It was supposed to be configured. However, it may be composed of a hook without a shaft and a lock body with a shaft. For example, if the member that locks the tail portion of the locking member is a lock body, the dial lock shown in FIGS. 121 (k) and 121 (l) is provided with a lock body with a shaft and a hook or sub-attachable to the shaft. It can be said that it is composed of members and the like.

  In short, it is only necessary that members for preventing the lock dial ring from falling off from both ends of the shaft are provided at both ends of the shaft, and at least one of the two members at both ends be removable only when unlocked. This structure that can be removed only at the time of unlocking can be realized by the direction of the above-mentioned shaft-side groove and the presence of the coupling passage.

  In addition, in the structure of each dial lock shown in FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (l), in order to obtain a dial lock that can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking, in place of the coupling passage or in addition to the coupling passage. A structure that can be disassembled only when unlocked may be provided.

  FIG. 122 shows a dial lock having a structure in which the movement of the dial ring in the axial direction is restricted by the hook provided on the shaft member and the wall of the lock body, and the shaft and the lock body are coupled in a screw manner. It is a figure which shows a some example.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (a) corresponds to the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (a), and the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (b) corresponds to the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (b).

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (a) is a lock having a flanged shaft 355a having a thread on the shaft head, three locking dial rings, and a thread groove having a shape corresponding to the thread of the flanged shaft 355a. A main body 357a. The lock body 357a has a hole through which the flanged shaft 355a passes, and a thread groove exists on the inner surface of the hole. By combining these members, a dial lock having a structure as shown on the right side of the arrow in the figure is obtained.

  Each dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (b) has a flanged shaft 356a having a thread on the shaft head, three locking dial rings, and a thread groove having a shape corresponding to the thread of the flanged shaft 356a. And a lock body 358a. The lock body 358a has a hole into which the flanged shaft 356a is inserted, and a thread groove exists on the inner surface of the hole. By combining these members, a dial lock having a structure as shown on the right side of the arrow in the figure is obtained.

  Each of the dial locks shown in FIGS. 122 (a) and 122 (b) has a wall on the left side of the lock body, and the lock dial ring cannot move rightward. Cannot move in the direction. In addition, the lock body and the hooked shaft are coupled in a screw manner, and the lock body needs to be rotated in order to separate the lock body and the hooked shaft.

  In the following description, “rotating the lock body” refers to rotating the lock body with respect to the hooked shaft, and relatively rotating only one of the lock body or the hooked shaft. Same thing.

  122 (a) and 122 (b), illustration of other structures such as the shaft side grooves of the flanged shaft 355a and the flanged shaft 356a is omitted. Each figure shows an outline of the structure of the dial lock when viewed from the direction in which the notch portion of the lock dial ring is present at the time of unlocking. In addition, dial locks other than the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (h) do not have a coupling passage.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (c), the locking member mounting groove of the lock body 358a or the locking member protruding from the locking member mounting hole is inserted into the locking shaft side groove from the flange portion of the flanged shaft 356a. The The locking shaft side groove does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356a. When the locking member is locked by the three locking dial rings in this state, the locking main body 358a cannot be rotated because the locking convex portion of the locking member exists in the main body side groove. The main body 358a and the flanged shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (d) has the same structure as the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (c), but the locking shaft side groove penetrates the flanged shaft 356a. When the locking member is locked by the three locking dial rings in this state, the locking body 358a rotates because the locking member passes through the lock body 358a on the passage including the locking shaft side groove. The lock main body 358a and the flanged shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (e), the locking member mounting groove or the locking member protruding from the locking member mounting hole of the lock body 358a further penetrates the lock body 358a and is inserted into the locking shaft side groove. ing. Further, the locking shaft side groove does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356a.

  Even in such a configuration, since the locking member passes through the lock body 358a on the passage including the locking shaft side groove, the lock body 358a cannot be rotated. The attached shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (f) has the same structure as the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (e), but the locking shaft side groove penetrates the flanged shaft 356a. Even in such a form, like the dial lock shown in FIG. 121 (e), the dial lock can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  122 (d) and 122 (f) also have the structure of the locking member mounting groove or the locking member mounting hole, as in the relationship between FIGS. 121 (d) and 122 (h). Regardless of which locking member is inserted from either end, the locking member can be attached, so that the same dial lock can be used to lock in different forms as shown in FIGS. 122 (d) and 122 (f). Become.

  122 (d), the locking member is inserted and locked from the side of the lock body 358a on the shaft head side, and the locking member is inserted from the side of the flanged shaft 356a in FIG. 122 (f). It is easy to lock.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (g) is the same as the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (d), and the locking member protruding from the locking member mounting groove or the locking member mounting hole of the lock body 358a is the hooked shaft 356. It is inserted into the locking shaft side groove from the collar portion of the rod, and penetrates the flanged shaft 356 and the lock body 358a.

  Further, in the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (g), both ends of the passage including the locking shaft side groove are curved. Thereby, as above-mentioned, the peeping of the site | part for unlocking via this channel | path can be prevented. Even in such a configuration, since the locking member passes through the lock body 358a on the passage including the locking shaft side groove, the lock body 358a cannot be rotated, and the lock body 358a is not rotated. And the brazed shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (h) has a passage that is very similar to the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (c), but unlike the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (c), it has a coupling passage. is doing. That is, it has a passage that does not include the locking shaft side groove and penetrates the flanged shaft 356a and the lock body 358a. Due to the presence of the locking member in the coupling passage, the lock body 358a cannot be rotated, and the lock body 358a and the flanged shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIGS. 122 (i) and 122 (j) is similar to the dial lock shown in FIGS. 121 (k) and 121 (l). It has been stopped.

  In the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (i), the locking member that is passed through the collar portion and whose tail is locked penetrates the lock body 358a and is inserted into the locking shaft side groove from the shaft head side. Further, the locking shaft side groove does not penetrate the flanged shaft 356a.

  Even in such a configuration, since the locking member passes through the lock body 358a on the passage including the locking shaft side groove, the lock body 358a cannot be rotated. The attached shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (j) has the same passage as the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (i), and the locking shaft side groove penetrates the flanged shaft 356a.

  Even in such a configuration, since the locking member passes through the lock body 358a on the passage including the locking shaft side groove, the lock body 358a cannot be rotated. The attached shaft 356a cannot be separated. That is, it is a dial lock that can be disassembled only when unlocked.

  In FIG. 122 (j), the locking member is inserted from the lock body on the shaft head side. However, the locking member is not inserted from the lock body on the shaft head side. Even a structure inserted from the side can be disassembled when locked.

  The dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (k) has a structure in which the lock body has a convex portion having a thread and the shaft member has a concave portion having a thread groove.

  That is, in FIG. 122 (b), the lock body has a concave portion having a thread groove, the shaft has a thread on the outer peripheral surface, and the shaft itself forms a convex portion of the screw. The lock body has a convex portion having a thread like the lock body 358b, and the shaft member has a recess having a thread groove like the hooked shaft 356b. If the convex part which has a thread of a main part is screwed in, it can be set as the dial lock of the structure which restrict | limits the movement of an axial direction of a dial ring with the collar provided in the shaft member, and the wall of a lock main body.

  122 (c) to 122 (j) are diagrams showing variations of the locking member passages in the dial lock shown in FIG. 122 (b). FIG. 122 (a) and FIG. 122 (k) The same variation is also conceivable in (1), and can be disassembled only when unlocked, and the lock body and shaft can be disassembled when locked.

  In addition, in the dial lock constituted by the lock body with a shaft having a recess having a thread groove and a hook and a sub-member having a convex portion with a thread without having a rotating shaft of the dial ring as a separate member, By forming a locking member passage similar to that shown in FIGS. 122 (c) to 122 (j), the lock body and the shaft cannot be disassembled during locking.

  In each of the dial locks shown in FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (k), as with the dial locks shown in FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (l), a lock body with a shaft and a shaft lock are attached. You may be comprised with members, such as a possible collar or a submember.

  Thus, even in the case of a dial lock having a structure in which the movement of the dial ring in the axial direction is restricted by the hook provided on the shaft member and the wall of the lock body, the boundary between the lock body and the shaft member is In the position, the passage for the locking member is crossed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body, or a part of the hole formed by the locking shaft side groove and the body side groove is formed on the shaft member with respect to the lock body. A dial lock that can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking can be obtained by forming it in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction, or by connecting members constituting the dial lock in a screw-type manner.

  In addition, although the umbrella, the document, etc. were mentioned as an article | item used as the lock | rock object of a dial lock, other articles | goods may be sufficient as the object locked.

  For example, if there is a portion whose outer diameter is thinner than the top and bottom, it can be locked. For example, a guitar or golf club can be locked, and by attaching the coiled wire 20 shown in FIG. That is, theft can be prevented.

  Further, if the coiled wire 20 is lengthened, for example, at a golf equipment store, a customer can freely pick up and view a golf club as a product, and also has a crime prevention effect against shoplifting and the like. Further, if the dial lock 2 can be changed without opening the dial lock 1 or the lock body described with reference to FIG. 48B, the unlock number can be changed periodically. Yes, the crime prevention effect can be improved. Similarly, by devising the shape of the band or the coiled wire, for example, it is possible to bind the handle of the car and the change lever, the handle of the door, etc., which can be used to prevent theft of the car.

  The first and second embodiments and their application examples, the dial locks of the modified examples, and the members constituting the dial locks may be other usage forms and usage methods. For example, the wire shown in FIG. 8, the auxiliary tool shown in FIGS. 83 and 84, the band having the stopper shown in FIG. 98, and the adapter shown in FIGS. 100 and 103 are dial locks according to the embodiment of the present invention. In addition, even when used with a locking device having other configurations such as a band-type cylinder lock and a card-type lock, the functions and effects of the wire, auxiliary tool, band and adapter are not lost.

  Also, for example, the structural features and locking method of a dial lock for locking a book or the like using two dial locks shown in FIG. 85A (a), and the binder shown in FIGS. 86 to 88 are locked. The method of using the dial lock for this purpose can be applied not only to the dial lock according to the embodiment of the present invention but also to a locking device having another configuration such as a band-type cylinder lock or a card-type lock. .

  Further, for example, as in the case of the lock body 100 shown in FIG. 5, the contact surface with the locking object is in an arc shape, so that the effect of being able to lock the locking object in close contact with the band type cylinder lock, This is also effective in a locking device having another configuration such as a card-type lock.

  As described above, the locking device of the present invention utilizes the form of a band-type dial lock that can lock the band at an arbitrary position, and can be disassembled and assembled only when unlocked. Furthermore, the components of the lock can be exchanged. In addition, by utilizing, applying, and arranging these structural features, the chain-type dial lock, the wire-type dial lock, the U-shaped dial-type lock, etc., which are often used in the past, can be locked in place. In the locking device, a dedicated member such as a retainer or a pin for fastening a dial ring or a shaft can be omitted. These conventional locking devices can also be provided at low cost by reducing the number of members, simplifying disassembly / assembly during unlocking, and reducing manufacturing costs.

  The dial lock 1 and the dial lock 2 may be used not only as a locking device for locking an umbrella or the like, but also for other purposes.

  In the description of FIG. 6, it is assumed that a dial ring that is easy to remember the unlocking position can be provided to the user by supplying a dial ring with a symbol or a picture other than a number attached to the dial ring. In this way, the dial lock may be used for other purposes by attaching symbols or pictures other than numbers to the dial ring.

  For example, it can be used as an accessory or a bracelet. By supplying the lock dial ring 200 with alphabets or hiragana characters in place of the numbers, it is possible to produce a dial lock with the name of the person or lover, the initials of the name, etc. as the unlocking number. Further, for example, by supplying a lock dial ring 200 with an animated character or the like instead of a number, it can be used as a toy for children.

  In addition, for example, a clock is provided on the upper surface of the lock body, so that it is normally used as a wristwatch, and may be used as a locking device when locking an umbrella or the like.

  The dial lock 1 and the dial lock 2 are provided with three dial rings and have a three-digit unlocking number, but the number of dial rings may be two or four or more. For example, in the dial lock 1 shown in FIG. 1, the structure in which the lock dial ring 200 locks the band body of the band 400 is independent in each lock dial ring 200, and four or more lock dial rings 200 are provided. It is possible to produce the dial lock 1 having

  By doing so, for example, the number of combinations of numbers to be unlocked numbers can be increased, and the antitheft effect can be improved.

  Since the locking device of the present invention is easy to disassemble and assemble, the damaged component can be replaced at low cost, the unlocking number can be freely changed, and the component can be replaced. This is a locking device that allows a dial ring displaying characters, symbols, pictures, etc. to be freely selected and used instead of the dial ring. Therefore, the locking device is safe even if parts necessary for assembling the locking device such as the lock body are individually supplied and the user performs the assembly. Moreover, since the locking method of the present invention can effectively and simply lock an article, it is useful as a locking method for preventing theft of a carrying article such as an umbrella.

1 is a perspective view showing an overview of a dial lock according to Embodiment 1. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of the front, diagonally upper, and upper surfaces of the dial lock of FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overview of the side of the dial lock of FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which an umbrella is locked by the dial lock of FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing an overview of each part constituting the dial lock of FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the lock dial ring. 7 is a perspective view when the lock body of FIG. 5 is viewed from the front. FIG. 8 is a view showing an example of a state where a coiled wire is attached to the dial lock of FIG. 1 and is connected to a handle of the door by the coiled wire. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example in which an umbrella and a door handle are connected by a dial lock to which a coiled wire is attached. 10 is a view showing a case where a wire attachment hole and a wire anchoring portion are provided in the lock body of FIG. 11 is a view showing a modification of the lock body of FIG. 12 is a view showing an overview of the upper surface of the dial lock 1 using the lock body of FIG. 11 instead of the lock body of FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a structure for preventing the lock dial ring from being looked into. 14 is a view showing a modification of the locking dial ring of FIG. FIG. 15 is a view showing an overview of an example of a type in which the band body is locked on the inner surface of the locking dial ring. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a band having a band body corresponding to the locking dial ring of FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a band corresponding to the locking dial ring of FIGS. 6 and 14 or the locking dial ring of FIG. FIG. 18 shows an example of a metal band. Figure 19 shows an example of how to use a band where the band itself passes twice through the dial ring. FIG. 20 shows an example of a double-headed band. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a band having a function of locking the band body itself and a method of using the band. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing another example of a band having a function of locking the band body itself and a method of using the band. FIG. 23 is a view showing an example of a band in which the band shown in FIG. FIG. 24 is a conceptual diagram showing a method of locking with a band tail and a band having a sphere. FIG. 25 is a conceptual diagram showing that a band made of one string can correspond to two shaped band tails. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an outline of a band 530 having a plurality of holes into which the band head portion (locking portion) is inserted into the band body portion, and the dial lock 1 for using the band 530. FIG. 27A is a diagram showing a modification of the band of FIG. The figure which shows the example of the locking form using the band shown to FIG. 27B FIG. 27A FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of a lock body in which the dial lock cannot be reassembled. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an outline when the dial lock of the first embodiment is configured using a U-shaped metal bar instead of a band. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock according to the second embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an overview of a band used for the dial lock of FIG. FIG. 32 is a diagram showing an overview of the shaft used in the dial lock of FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an outline of a lock body used for the dial lock of FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock in which the band body is locked in the shaft. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock in which the band main body is locked by the rings respectively attached to the two shafts. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an outline of the configuration of the dial lock in a state in which three geared locking dial rings are passed through both the front shaft and the rear shaft. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a method of using the band by penetrating the lock body twice without locking the band to the lock body. FIG. 38 is a view showing a state in which the dial lock shown in FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a double-headed band that can be used for the dial lock of the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a method of using a double-headed band in the dial lock of the second embodiment. 41 is a view showing a modification of the band of FIG. 31 and the band of FIG. 35 (c). FIG. 42 is a view showing an example of a band having a protrusion for locking the band main body with a peripheral locking ring with a gear. FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a band having a plurality of spheres in the band body. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a state in which the band main body of the band of FIG. 43 (c) is locked by the peripheral locking ring with gears. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of an overview when the band of FIG. 43 (c) is used for the dial lock of the dial lock of the second embodiment. FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an outline of the internal structure of the dial lock according to the second embodiment when a U-shaped metal bar is used. 46B is a schematic diagram of the internal structure of the dial lock shown in FIG. 46A when the rotary shaft of the dial ring and the lock body are coupled in a screw manner. 47 is a diagram showing an outline of the internal structure of the lock body before assembling the dial lock shown in FIG. 46A (a). FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a procedure for assembling the dial lock of FIG. 46A (a). FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed in a band used for the dial lock of the first embodiment and is reinforced. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed and reinforced in the band of FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which a wire is enclosed and reinforced in the band of FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an outline of a dial lock that locks the band body from both sides, with a geared peripheral locking ring attached to two shafts that are opposed to each other. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a plurality of relationships between the shaft and the lock body when the shaft is fixed to the lock body by frictional force. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a plurality of relationships between the shaft and the lock body when the shaft having a thread is fixed to the lock body having a thread groove. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a plurality of relationships between the shaft and the lock body when a shaft having a large diameter portion at the rear portion of the shaft is fixed to the lock body. 56 is a diagram showing a case where a hole for pushing out the shaft is provided in the lock body in the shaft and the lock body shown in FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a case where a hole for pushing out the shaft is provided in the lock body in the shaft and lock body shown in FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the difference in the path of the band with respect to the shaft and the lock body viewed from the direction in which the notch of the dial ring exists when unlocking. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the difference in the insertion / extraction direction, insertion / extraction path, and lock position of the locking portion with respect to the shaft of the dial lock and the lock body in which the locking portion is locked at a specific fixed position. FIG. 60 shows a lock body, shaft, dial ring, and locking portion that can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocking without using a retainer or pin of the dial lock that exists in the shaft in parallel with the shaft. Diagram showing the relationship FIG. 61A is a diagram showing an example of a dial lock that eliminates the shaft from the dial lock of the first embodiment and enables disassembly and reassembly only when unlocked. FIG. 61B is a diagram showing another example of a dial lock that can be disassembled and reassembled only when unlocked by removing the shaft from the dial lock of the first embodiment. FIG. 61C is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock that includes a plug-in type sub member and that is locked at a specific position. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the dial lock when the shaft is removed from the dial lock of the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock using a shaft provided with a locking portion. 64 is a view showing the shape of the lock body shown in FIG. 65 is a view showing the shape of the shaft with the locking portion shown in FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a procedure for assembling a dial lock using a shaft provided with a locking portion. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a configuration of a dial lock including a shaft that rotatably supports a locking dial ring, and a locking plate having a locking hole for locking a band, and a locked state thereof. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a procedure for locking the dial lock having a structure in which the band main body passes through the shaft and the locking plate, and the locked state. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a procedure for locking the dial lock having a structure in which the band main body passes through the shaft and the lock main body, and the locked state. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a procedure for locking the dial lock having a structure in which the band main body passes through the lock main body, the shaft, and the locking plate, and the locked state. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a shaft with a locking portion that can be disassembled. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the shape of a shaft with a locking portion for locking a locking member other than a band having a clear convex portion. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a front surface, a cross section of an example of a band corresponding to the shaft with a locking portion of FIG. FIG. 74 is a front view, a cross-section of another example of the band corresponding to the shaft with the locking portion, and a diagram showing the relationship between the protrusion of the shaft with the locking portion and the cross-section of the band FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the upper surface of the shaft with the locking portion and the front of the rear portion of the shaft that does not have a protrusion in the locking hole. 76 is a diagram showing an example of a band corresponding to the shaft with the locking portion shown in FIG. 75, and side surfaces of the lock body and the lock dial ring when the band is applied to the dial lock shown in FIG. 77 is a view showing the front, right side, and cross section of the dial lock shown in FIG. 69. FIG. 78 is a view showing a front face, a right side face, and a cross section of a dial lock using a lock body provided with a band through groove instead of a band through hole. FIG. 79 is a view showing an example of a locking device having a structure in which a locking device other than the dial lock locks a member for locking the band. FIG. 80 is a view showing two examples of a lock body having one space for attaching a plurality of dial rings. FIG. 81 is a view showing a shaft that can be inserted and removed from both the left and right directions of the lock body, an overview of the lock body, and a shaft side band groove of the shaft while preventing rotation with respect to the lock body. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of the structure of a dial lock that can be disassembled and assembled using a lock body with a shaft. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a plurality of examples of auxiliary tools FIG. 84 is a diagram showing another example of auxiliary tools FIG. 85A is a diagram showing a dial lock using a lock main body provided with a hole or groove through which the band main body of another dial lock is passed, and a method of locking an article in a cross shape using the two dial locks. FIG. 85B is a diagram showing an example of a binding tool for binding articles in a cross shape and its components. FIG. 85C is a diagram showing another example of a binding tool for binding articles in a cross shape and its components. FIG. 85D is a schematic view when the articles are bound using three binding belts shown in FIG. 85B (e), and a schematic view when the articles are bound using four binding belts. FIG. 86 shows an example of a binder that can be locked by a dial lock. 87 is a diagram showing two examples of a binder having a dial lock. FIG. 88 is a view showing an example of a binder to which the dial lock can be detachably attached. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a double-headed band having a plurality of holes. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a dial lock that locks an umbrella or the like using the band shown in FIG. 89 and the locking procedure. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing an example of a cap attached to the locking portion. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing an example of another shape of the band holding portion. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a dial lock including a lock body having a band holding portion and a locking procedure. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing two examples of bands that can be used for the dial lock shown in FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a dial lock that can lock an umbrella or the like without passing the locking portion through the hole of the band. FIG. 96 is a view showing an overview, a right side surface and a rear surface of the lock body and the band shown in FIG. FIG. 97 is a view showing a lock body having a band attachment groove which is a groove for attaching the band, and a right side surface and a rear surface of the lock body in a state where the band is attached. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a plurality of examples of a band stopper having a natural fall prevention function and a lock body. FIG. 99 is a view showing an upper surface, a right side surface, and a rear surface of the lock body to which the adapter can be attached. 100 is a view showing the upper surface, the right side surface, and the rear surface of the adapter that can be attached to the lock body shown in FIG. 101 is a view showing the upper surface and the right side surface of the lock body shown in FIG. 99 to which the adapter shown in FIG. 100 is attached. FIG. 102 is a view showing a right side surface and a rear surface of a lock body having an adapter insertion port on the rear surface. 103 is a diagram showing the external appearance of the upper surface, the right side surface, the rear surface of the adapter that can be attached to the lock body shown in FIG. 104 is a top view of the lock body shown in FIG. 102 with the adapter shown in FIG. 103 attached. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an example of the internal structure of the dial lock having a structure in which the band does not return, and the shape of the shaft rear part of the shaft with the locking part and the band return preventing part. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the movement of the shaft and the spring when the band is pulled in order to tighten the band of the dial lock shown in FIG. 105 to the locking object. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing another example of the internal structure of the dial lock having a structure in which the band does not return, and another shape of the shaft rear part of the shaft with the locking part and the band return preventing part. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the movement of the shaft and the spring when the band is pulled to tighten the dial lock band shown in FIG. 107 on the object to be locked. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a structure and assembly procedure of a dial lock having two shafts that can be disassembled only at the time of unlocking and that can be reassembled. 110 is a view showing the right side surface of the auxiliary member shown in FIG. 109 and the left side surface of the lock main body with shaft. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of the structure and assembly order of a single-shaft dial lock that can be attached while sliding the sub member to the lock body with the shaft. 112 is a right side view of the auxiliary member shown in FIG. 111 and a left side view of the lock main body with the shaft. FIG. 113 shows a structure of a dial lock in which a band mounting hole exists in the right rear portion of the lock body, a structure of a dial lock in which the band mounting hole is provided so as to penetrate the shaft-lock body and the sub member, and the sub member. The figure which shows the structure of the dial lock in which only the band attachment hole is provided FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of the structure and assembly procedure of a dial lock using a shaft retaining member, the shape of the shaft, and the left side surface of the shaft retaining member. 115 is a view showing an example of a shaft retaining member having a groove through which a band passes, and a left side view of the lock body shown in FIG. 114 with a retaining member inserted. FIG. 116 is a view showing a state in which the shaft retaining member is inserted from the upper surface of the lock body shown in FIG. FIG. 117 is a view showing a state where the shaft retaining member is inserted from the rear surface of the lock body shown in FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the top surface of the dial lock in which the shaft retaining member shown in FIG. 114 is inserted from the front surface, the dial lock in which the shaft lock member is inserted from the upper surface, and the dial lock in the form inserted from the rear surface. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an adapter that can be detachably attached by sliding up and down, a shape of a lock body corresponding to the adapter, and an attaching procedure. 120 is an adapter that is detachable by sliding up and down, and shows an example of an adapter for converting the rear surface of the lock body from a curved surface to a flat surface and a shape of the lock body corresponding to the adapter. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a plurality of examples of the structure of the dial lock that restricts the movement of the dial ring in the axial direction by the rod provided on the shaft member and the wall of the lock body. FIG. 122 shows a plurality of dial locks having a structure in which the movement of the dial ring in the axial direction is restricted by the hook provided on the shaft member and the wall of the lock body, and the shaft and the lock body are coupled in a screw manner. Figure showing an example

Claims (18)

A lock body, a shaft member supported by the lock body, a plurality of dial rings having the shaft member as a rotation shaft, and a long engagement locked by being directly locked by the plurality of dial rings A locking device comprising a stop member and a shaft retaining member for restraining the shaft member to the lock body ,
The lock body has a body shaft hole or body shaft hole into which the shaft member is inserted from outside, and an insertion hole or insertion hole into which the shaft retaining member is inserted from outside.
The shaft member has a shaft retaining hole, a shaft retaining hole or a shaft retaining groove into which the shaft retaining member is inserted at a position following the insertion hole or the insertion hole of the lock body,
At least a part of the shaft retaining hole, the shaft retaining hole or the shaft retaining groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft member with respect to the lock body,
The shaft retaining member has a locking hole, a locking hole, or a locking groove into which the locking member is inserted, and the insertion hole or the insertion hole in a state where the shaft member is inserted into the lock body. Inserted between the lock body and the shaft member,
At least a part of the locking hole, the locking hole, or the locking groove is formed in a direction different from the insertion / extraction direction of the shaft retaining member with respect to the lock body. When the dial ring is in the unlocked position and the shaft retaining member is removed from the shaft retaining hole, the shaft retaining hole, or the shaft retaining groove, the shaft member further moves the shaft member to the lock body. locking device according to claim 1, characterized in that it comprises at the rear end a flange for withdrawing from. The lock body has a hole that allows the shaft member to be pushed out by pushing the shaft head in a direction opposite to the insertion direction of the shaft member into the lock body,
The hole is located on the shaft head side, and further opens on the outer surface of the lock body,
The main body shaft hole or the main body shaft hole has at least a part of an inner diameter smaller than an outer diameter of at least a part of the shaft member, or the body shaft hole does not penetrate the lock body. Thus, the shaft member is a shaft head when the dial ring is in the unlocked position and the shaft retaining member is removed from the shaft retaining hole, the shaft retaining hole, or the shaft retaining groove. The locking device according to claim 1 , wherein the locking device can be extracted only in the opposite direction. The locking device according to claim 3 , wherein the hole is a hole extending from the outer surface of the lock body to the body shaft hole, and an inner diameter of the hole is smaller than an inner diameter of the body shaft hole. The locking device further includes an adapter for changing the shape of the surface of the lock body that contacts the lock target article,
The lock body has a surface in contact with the article to be locked, an upper or lower or left and right surface of the surface, an adapter mounting groove for mounting the adapter, an adapter mounting hole or an adapter mounting hole, and a through-hole for passing the locking member. Having a body side hole or body side groove,
The adapter includes the adapter mounting groove, the adapter mounting hole or a mounting portion having a shape corresponding to the adapter mounting hole, and an adapter side hole or an adapter side groove for allowing the locking member to pass therethrough.
The main body side hole or the main body side groove exists at a position where one passage is formed by the main body side hole or the main body side groove and the adapter side hole or the adapter side groove,
The passage formed by the adapter side hole or the adapter side groove and the main body side hole or the main body side groove is formed in a direction different from a direction in which the adapter is attached to and detached from the lock body. The locking device according to claim 1 . The locking device further includes an adapter for changing the shape of the surface of the lock body that contacts the lock target article,
The lock body has a surface in contact with the article to be locked , an upper or lower or left and right surface of the surface, an adapter mounting groove for mounting the adapter, an adapter mounting hole or an adapter mounting hole, and a through-hole for passing the locking member. Having a body side hole or body side groove,
The adapter includes the adapter mounting groove, the adapter mounting hole, or a mounting portion having a shape corresponding to the adapter mounting hole, and an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking one end of the locking member. And
The main body side hole or the main body side groove exists at a position where one passage is formed by the main body side hole or the main body side groove and the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove,
The locking member has a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end locking hole or the end locking groove only at one end, and the end locking hole or the end locking groove from the end locking groove end tail no inserted, locking device according to claim 1 wherein said characterized in that the locked dial ring in a state of penetrating the body-side hole or the body groove. The locking member state, and are capable of at least partially curved or bent,
The second end facing the first end in the longitudinal direction of the locking member has a locking portion for locking to the dial ring,
Wherein the first end portion, wherein, wherein one or more through holes that are large enough to said second end portion of the front to be locked to the dial ring penetrates is formed Item 2. A locking device according to item 1 .   The locking device has a passage for inserting and removing the locking member,
  The passage extends through the lock body;
  The locking member has a plurality of concavo-convex portions for directly locking with the plurality of dial rings,
  The uneven portion of the locking member has a larger number of convex portions or concave portions than the number of the dial rings.
  The locking device according to claim 7. The lock body further has an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking the rear end of the locking member,
The first end portion has a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove,
The locking device according to claim 7 , wherein the through hole exists between the tail portion and the locking portion in the longitudinal direction of the locking member. The first end of the locking member is connected to the lock body,
The locking device according to claim 7 , wherein the through hole exists between a portion connected to the lock body in the longitudinal direction of the locking member and the locking portion. A locking method for locking the first article using the locking device according to claim 8 and connecting the first article and the second article,
At least a part of the second article is formed only by the locking member by causing the second end to pass through one through hole of the locking member so that the second article is wound around the locking member. A first forming step for forming a first annular region in which
By passing the second end portion through the through hole or another through hole in a direction opposite to the direction penetrating the through hole in the first forming step, a second different from the first annular region is provided. A second forming step for forming an annular region;
A penetrating step for penetrating the second end portion through the lock body ;
An arrangement step of arranging the first article in the second annular region;
A clamping step of clamping the first article with the locking member by pulling the second end in the same direction as the direction in which the locking member penetrates the lock body ;
A locking method comprising: a locking step in which the locking member is locked to the plurality of dial rings so that the locking member cannot be inserted into and removed from the lock body . The shaft member has a screw thread for screwing it into the lock body on its circumference,
  The main body shaft hole or the main body shaft hole has a thread groove having a shape corresponding to the thread on the inner peripheral surface.
  The locking device according to claim 1.   The locking member has an uneven portion that is locked by the dial ring,
  The dial ring is configured by detachably fitting an inner member having a notch for passing the convex portion of the locking member and an outer member which is a portion other than the inner member,
  The inner member has a deformation notch on a side surface perpendicular to the axial direction, and the deformation notch is inserted into the outer member while being narrowed, and is fitted to the outer member by a restoring force of the deformation notch.
  The locking device according to claim 1.   The lock body has an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking one end of the locking member;
  The locking member is a member that can be at least partially curved or bent, and has a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end locking hole or the end locking groove only at one end,
  At least a part of the end portion locking hole or the inlet side of the end portion locking groove is narrower than the tail portion,
  The tail portion has elasticity and is inserted into the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove by being deformed into a size that can be inserted into the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove. After insertion, the elasticity is restored to the shape according to the shape of the end locking hole or the end locking groove inside by the elasticity,
  At least a part of the end portion locking hole or the outlet side of the end portion locking groove is narrow enough to prevent the tail portion from passing even if the tail portion is deformed.
  The locking device according to claim 1.   The lock body has an end locking hole or an end locking groove for locking one end of the locking member;
  The locking member is a member that can be at least partially curved or bent, and has a tail portion of a size that cannot pass through the end locking hole or the end locking groove only at one end,
  At least a part of the end side locking hole or the inlet side of the end locking groove forms a narrowed part narrower than the tail part,
  The narrowed portion of the end portion locking hole or the end portion locking groove has elasticity, and the tail portion is inserted by deforming the shape of the narrowed portion so that the tail portion can be inserted, After insertion, the shape of the constriction portion is restored to the shape corresponding to the shape of the tail portion due to the elasticity.
  The locking device according to claim 1.   The locking member has an uneven portion in which unevenness is repeatedly formed in the longitudinal direction,
  The plurality of dial rings allow the locking member to be inserted / removed at a rotational position that is an unlocked position, and abuts with a convex portion of the concavo-convex portion of the locking member at a rotational position other than the unlocked position. Has a notch provided in a part of the circumferential direction,
  The locking device has a passage for inserting and removing the locking member,
  A part of the passage is a hole from the outside of the locking device to the dial ring,
  The hole is curved or bent so that the dial ring is not visible from the outside of the locking device through the hole.
  The locking device according to claim 1.   The passage extends through the lock body;
  The uneven portion of the locking member has a larger number of convex portions or concave portions than the number of the dial rings.
  The locking device according to claim 16.   The locking device further includes a large-diameter portion forming member for increasing the outer diameter of one or more places when the umbrella to be locked is closed,
  The outer diameter of the large-diameter portion forming member is such that the large-diameter portion forming member is located between the lower loft of the middle rod of the umbrella and the stone protrusion, or in the state where the umbrella is closed, The umbrella can be closed when it is in contact with the part located between the heel and the stone or the rib
  The locking device according to claim 17.

Images